6ES7400-1JA01-0AA0 - SIEMENS

SIMATIC

S7-400

S7-400 Automation System Module

Data

Reference Manual

Ausgabe 11/2016

A5E00850736-08

Preface

General specifications 1

Rack 2

Power supply modules 3

Digital modules 4

Analog modules 5

Interface modules 6

S5 interface IM 463-2 7

PROFIBUS DP master

interface IM 467/IM 467 FO 8

Cable duct and fan

subassemblies 9

RS 485 repeater 10

Parameter sets of signal

modules A

Diagnostic data of signal

modules B

Accessories and spare parts C

Directive on handling

electrostatic sensitive

devices (ESD) D

List of abbreviations E

Legal information

Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent

damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert

symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are

graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION

indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE

indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be

used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property

damage.

Qualified Personnel

The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific

task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified

personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding

potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:

WARNING

Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical

documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or

approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and

maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible

ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication

may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.

Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in

this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG

Division Process Industries and Drives

Postfach 48 48

90026 NÜRNBERG

GERMANY

A5E00850736-08

Ⓟ 11/2016 Subject to change

Preface

Purpose of this manual

The information contained in this manual can be used as a reference for operating, for

descriptions of the functions, and for the specifications of the signal modules, power supply

modules and interface modules of the S7-400.

How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-400 system is described in the

installation manuals for each system.

Basic knowledge required

This manual requires general knowledge of automation engineering.

In addition, you are required to know how to use computers or devices with similar functions

(e. g. programming devices) under Windows 2000 or XP operating systems. Since S7-400 is

configured with the

STEP 7

basic software, you have to have a good working knowledge of

the software. You can acquire this knowledge in the manual

"Programming with STEP 7"

. Read

the notes on the safety of electronic controllers in the appendix of the Installation manual –

especially when using an S7-400 in safety-relevant areas.

Target group

This manual is aimed at people with the required qualifications to commission, operate and

maintain the products described.

Scope of the manual

The manual applies to the S7-400 automation system.

Changes compared to the previous version

The following changes have been made compared to the previous version of this manual

S7-400 Automation System; Module Specifications, Edition 05/2007 (A5E00850735-04):

The revision of the ATEX standard was taken into consideration in chapter Standards,

certificates and approvals (Page 13).

Approvals

You can find details on the certificates and approvals in the chapter General specifications

(Page 13)“General specifications.”

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 3

Position in the information landscape

This manual forms part of the S7-400 documentation.

System Documentation package

S7-400 ●

S7-400 automation system, installation

●

S7-400 automation system, module specifications

●

S7-400 automation system, CPU specifications

●

S7-400 instruction list

Further Information

You can find further and additional information on the topics in this manual in the following

manuals:

Programming with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652056)

Configuring Hardware and Communication Connections with STEP 7 (http://

support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652631)

System and Standard Functions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

1214574)

PROFINET system description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

19292127)

Isochrone mode (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045)

Recycling and disposal

The S7-400 is environmentally friendly and is thus recyclable. For environmentally compliant

recycling and disposal of your discarded device, please contact a company certified for the

disposal of electronic waste.

Additional support

If you have any questions relating to the products described in this manual and cannot find the

answers in this documentation, please contact your Siemens partner at the appropriate office

or sales and service location.

You will find information on who to contact at:

Contact partners (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner)

A guide to the technical documents for the various SIMATIC products and systems is available

at:

Documentation (http://www.automation.siemens.com/simatic/portal/html_76/techdoku.htm)

You can find the online catalog and order system under:

Catalog (http://mall.automation.siemens.com/)

Preface

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

4Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Training center

We offer a range of relevant courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC S7 automation

system. Please contact your regional training center or our central training center in 90327

Nuremberg, Germany for details:

Training (http://www.sitrain.com/index_en.html)

Technical support

You can contact Technical Support for all Industry Automation products using the Web form

for Support Request

Support Request (http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request)

Additional information about our technical support is available on the Internet at

Technical Support (http://support.automation.siemens.com)

Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base online on the

Internet at:

Service & Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)

There you will find:

● Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products.

● The latest documents via our search function in Service & Support.

● An international forum where users and specialists can exchange their experiences.

● Your local contact partner for automation and drive technology in our contacts database.

● Information about on-site service, repairs and spare parts. Much more can be found under

"Services".

● Applications and tools for optimizing operations with SIMATIC S7. Performance

measurements for DP and PN, for example, are also published here.

Preface

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 5

Preface

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

6Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Table of contents

Preface.........................................................................................................................................................3

1General specifications................................................................................................................................13

1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals....................................................................................13

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility.................................................................................................20

1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries......................................23

1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation.....................................................24

1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection............................26

2 Rack...........................................................................................................................................................27

2.1 Function and design of the racks...........................................................................................27

2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0).........................29

2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0).....................................................................................31

2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0).......................................................................................33

2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)......................................................................................35

2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)...............................36

3 Power supply modules...............................................................................................................................39

3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules..........................................................39

3.2 Redundant power supply modules.........................................................................................41

3.3 Backup battery (option)..........................................................................................................43

3.4 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................45

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs.............................................................................................48

3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)..................................................54

3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)..................................................57

3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R

(6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)........................................................................................................60

3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R

(6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)........................................................................................................63

3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)................................................66

3.11 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)................................................68

3.12 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0)..................................................70

3.13 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0)..................................................72

3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R

(405-0KR00-0AA0).................................................................................................................74

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 7

3.15 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R

(405-0KR02-0AA0).................................................................................................................76

3.16 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)................................................78

3.17 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)................................................80

4 Digital modules...........................................................................................................................................83

4.1 Module overview....................................................................................................................83

4.2 Steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module......................................................85

4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules...............................................................................85

4.3.1 Parameters.............................................................................................................................85

4.3.2 Parameters of digital input modules.......................................................................................87

4.3.3 Parameters of digital output modules.....................................................................................88

4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules..............................................................................................88

4.4.1 General information about diagnostic messages...................................................................88

4.4.2 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules..........................................................................90

4.4.3 Causes of errors and remedies for digital modules................................................................91

4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules.............................................................................................93

4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs.............................................................................95

4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)..............................97

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)............................100

4.8.1 Features...............................................................................................................................100

4.8.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V.......................................................105

4.8.3 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V............................................................................107

4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)..........................109

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0).......................112

4.10.1 Features...............................................................................................................................112

4.10.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V..................................................116

4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)..................119

4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)...................122

4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)............................126

4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)................129

4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0).......132

4.15.1 Features...............................................................................................................................132

4.15.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A.....................................136

4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)...............137

4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)...............140

4.17.1 Features...............................................................................................................................140

4.17.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A............................................144

4.17.3 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A................................................................145

4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)...........145

4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0).........149

Table of contents

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

8Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)..........153

4.20.1 Features...............................................................................................................................153

4.20.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A........................................157

4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)....158

5 Analog modules........................................................................................................................................163

5.1 General information..............................................................................................................163

5.2 Module overview..................................................................................................................164

5.3 Steps for commissioning analog modules............................................................................167

5.4 Representation of analog values..........................................................................................167

5.4.1 General information..............................................................................................................167

5.4.2 Representation of analog values of analog input channels..................................................169

5.4.3 Binary representation of input ranges..................................................................................170

5.4.4 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..........................................172

5.4.5 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges......................................174

5.4.6 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors.............................................176

5.4.7 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer ............................................177

5.4.8 Representation of analog values for thermocouples............................................................180

5.4.9 Representation of analog values for analog output channels..............................................185

5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels..................................189

5.6 Behavior of the analog modules...........................................................................................192

5.6.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................192

5.6.2 Effect of supply voltage and operating mode.......................................................................193

5.6.3 Effect of the value range for analog values..........................................................................194

5.6.4 Effect of operational limit and basic error limit.....................................................................195

5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules......................................196

5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules............................................................................199

5.8.1 General information about parameter assignment...............................................................199

5.8.2 Parameters of analog input modules...................................................................................201

5.8.3 Parameters of analog output modules.................................................................................203

5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs...................................................................................204

5.10 Connecting voltage sensors.................................................................................................207

5.11 Connecting current sensors.................................................................................................208

5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors.............................................................212

5.13 Connecting thermocouples..................................................................................................215

5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs.....................................................................219

5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs....................................................................220

5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs.....................................................................222

5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules.............................................................................223

5.18 Interrupts of analog modules................................................................................................227

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)..................................229

5.19.1 Features...............................................................................................................................229

Table of contents

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 9

5.19.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit............................................................................235

5.19.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit..................................236

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)..................................237

5.20.1 Features...............................................................................................................................237

5.20.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit............................................................................247

5.20.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit..................................249

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)..................................253

5.21.1 Features...............................................................................................................................253

5.21.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit............................................................................259

5.21.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit..................................262

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)...............................264

5.22.1 Features...............................................................................................................................264

5.22.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit..........................................................................270

5.22.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit................................271

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)...............................273

5.23.1 Features...............................................................................................................................273

5.23.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit..........................................................................284

5.23.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit................................288

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)......................292

5.24.1 Features...............................................................................................................................292

5.24.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit.................................................................299

5.24.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit.................302

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)..................................303

5.25.1 Features...............................................................................................................................303

5.25.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit............................................................................310

5.25.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit..................................315

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0).............................316

5.26.1 Features...............................................................................................................................316

5.26.2 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit..........................................................................322

5.26.3 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit .......................................................................323

6 Interface modules.....................................................................................................................................325

6.1 Common features of the interface modules.........................................................................325

6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7

461-0AA01-0AA0)................................................................................................................330

6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1

(6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)......................................................................................................333

6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3

(6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)......................................................................................................337

6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4;

(6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)......................................................................................................340

7 S5 interface IM 463-2...............................................................................................................................345

7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400................................................................345

7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units.............................................................................347

7.3 Operator controls and indicators..........................................................................................348

Table of contents

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

10 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2................................................................................350

7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314..........................................................................352

7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400...........................................................355

7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable........................................................................................357

7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314........................................................................................359

7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0) ................................................................361

8 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO................................................................................363

8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO............................................................363

8.1.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................363

8.1.2 Indicators and the mode selector.........................................................................................366

8.2 Configuration........................................................................................................................368

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP..............................................................................................368

8.3.1 Connection options .............................................................................................................368

8.3.2 Bus connector......................................................................................................................369

8.3.3 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP..................................................................................371

8.3.4 Connecting a fiber-optic cable to the IM 467 FO..................................................................372

8.4 Specifications.......................................................................................................................374

8.4.1 Specifications of the IM 467 (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0))........................................................374

8.4.2 Specifications of the IM 467 FO (6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0) ...................................................376

9 Cable duct and fan subassemblies...........................................................................................................377

9.1 Features...............................................................................................................................377

9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies.............................................................................378

9.3 Cable duct (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)....................................................................................380

9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0).............................................381

9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)....................................................384

10 RS 485 repeater.......................................................................................................................................387

10.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................387

10.2 Applications and features (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0).............................................................388

10.3 Design of the RS 485 repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)....................................................389

10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation....................................................390

10.5 Specifications.......................................................................................................................392

A Parameter sets of signal modules............................................................................................................395

A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program...............................395

A.2 Parameters of digital input modules.....................................................................................397

A.3 Parameters of digital output modules...................................................................................400

A.4 Parameters of analog input modules...................................................................................403

Table of contents

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 11

B Diagnostic data of signal modules............................................................................................................405

B.1 Evaluating diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program......................................405

B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1.....................................................406

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2.....................................................407

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2...................................................412

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2....................................................420

C Accessories and spare parts....................................................................................................................429

C.1 Accessories and spare parts................................................................................................429

D Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD).....................................................................433

D.1 ESD: What are the directives for handling electrostatic sensitive devices?.........................433

D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons.........................................................................................434

D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge..................................................435

E List of abbreviations..................................................................................................................................437

E.1 List of abbreviations.............................................................................................................437

Glossary...................................................................................................................................................441

Index.........................................................................................................................................................455

Table of contents

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

12 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

General specifications 1

1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

Information on the type plate

Note

You will find the current approvals on the type plate of the respective product.

WARNING

Open Equipment

Death, serious injury or substantial material damage can occur.

S7 400 modules are classified as open equipment, This means that the S7 400 should only

be installed in an enclosure or cabinet.

Access to the enclosures or cabinets should only be possible with a key or with a tool, and

access should only be permitted for trained or approved personnel.

IEC 61131-2

The S7-400 automation system meets the requirements and criteria of standard IEC 61131-2

(Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests.)

CE marking

Our products meet the requirements and protective objectives of the following EU Directives

and comply with the corresponding European standards (EN):

● Directive 2014/35/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014

on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to the making available on

the market of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits (Low

Voltage Directive)

● Directive 2014/30/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014

on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic

compatibility (EMC Directive)

● Directive 2014/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014

on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States relating to equipment and protective

systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres (ATEX Directive)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 13

The EC Declaration of Conformity can be downloaded from the Customer Support Internet

pages (keyword "declaration of conformity").

EMC directive

SIMATIC products are designed for industrial applications.

Table 1-1 Use in industry

Area of application Noise emission requirements Noise immunity requirements

Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2001 + A1:2011 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

Low voltage directive

The products in the following table meet the requirements of EU Directive 2014/35/EU "Low

Voltage Directive". Compliance with this EU directive has been checked in accordance with

DIN EN 61131-2 (corresponds to IEC 61131-2).

Table 1-2 Products that fulfill the requirements of the low-voltage directive

Name Order number

Digital input module SM 421;DI 32 x UC 120 V 6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0

Digital input module SM 421;DI 16 x UC 120/230 V 6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0

Digital output module SM 422;DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5A 6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0

Digital output module SM 422;DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2A 6ES7 422-1FH00-0AB0

Relay output module SM 422;DO 16 x UC30/230 V/Rel5A 6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0

Digital input module SM 421;DI 16 x UC 120/230 V 6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0

The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly 6ES7 408-1TB00-0XA0

PS 407 4A 6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0

6ES7 407-0DA02-0AA0

PS 407 10A 6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0

6ES7 407-0KA02-0AA0

PS 407 20A 6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0

6ES7 407-0RA02-0AA0

PS 407 10A R 6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0

6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0

Note

In the new releases, some of the devices listed above fulfill the requirements of the explosion

protection guidelines instead of those of the low-voltage directive. Please note the information

on the type plate.

General specifications

1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

14 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

ATEX Directive

In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres;

Type of Protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres

- Part 0: General requirements)

II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4..T6 Gc

Marking for Australia and New Zealand

Our products meet the requirements of standard EN 61000-6-4.

cULus approval

Note

The marks on the rating plate indicate which cULus approvals have been issued for your

product.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or cULus approval, Hazardous Location

HAZ. LOC.

CULUS Listed E248953 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

● ISA 12.12.01 (Hazardous Location)

● CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)

General specifications

1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 15

APPROVED for Use in

● Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A

● Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4

Note the following information.

or cULus Approvals, Hazardous Location for Relay Modules

HAZ. LOC.

CULUS Listed E223122 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

● UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)

● CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)

APPROVED for Use in

● Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A

● Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4

● Cl. 1, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC T4

Note the following information.

Note

This product must be installed according to the NEC (National Electric Code) stipulations.

When used in environments according to class I, division 2 (see above), S7-400 must be

mounted in an enclosure that corresponds to at least IP54 according to EN 60529.

You can find information about the use of S7-400 in hazardous areas of zone 2 in a separate

document, which is included in this documentation package.

General specifications

1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

16 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

WARNING

Installation Instructions according cULus

WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known

to be non-hazardous.

WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class

I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D; Class I, Zone

2, Group IIC, or non-hazardous locations only.

CuULu requirements for hazardous location on the battery power supply for CPUs

The backup voltage for a CPU must be supplied over a non-incendive plug connection. The

figure below shows such a plug connection.

1 2

(1) Battery or supply voltage

(2) CPU with "Ext. Batt." connector

Figure 1-1 Back-up voltage supply

The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:

Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

Isc (short-circuit current)= 50 mA Imax = 50 mA

Ca = Battery/voltage supply capacity Ci = 25 nF maximum

La = Battery/voltage supply inductance Li = 2 mH maximum

The battery/power supply that powers the non-incendive connection must comply with the

following ratings:

Battery/Power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

Voc ≤ Vmax (15 V)

Isc ≤ Imax (50 mA)

Ca ≥ Ci + Cc (25 nF + Cc)

La ≥ Li + Lc (2 mH + Lc)

Cc = Cable capacity

Lc = Cable inductance

Note

If you do not know the capacity and inductance of the cable, you can use the following values:

Cc = 197 pF/m (60 pF/ft.), Lc = 0.66 mH/m (0.2 mH/ft)

General specifications

1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 17

Example

The Varta 4022 battery together with a 1.5 m long cable and a Leonhardy 02-02.1500 plug

meet these conditions.

FM Approval

Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D.

Temperature class: T4 at 60° C ambient temperature

WARNING

Personal injury or property damage can result.

In hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if you create or break an

electrical circuit during operation of an S7-400 (for example, by means of plug-in connections,

fuses, switches).

Do not create or break live electrical circuits unless you are certain there is no danger of

explosion.

When used in FM conditions, the S7-400 must be fitted in an enclosure that corresponds to

at least IP54 in accordance with EN 60529.

NEC (National Electric Code) and CEC (Canadian Electric Code) requirements for Hazardous

Locations for battery power supply for CPUs

The backup voltage for a CPU must be supplied over a non-incendive plug connection. The

figure below shows such a plug connection.

1 2

(1) Battery or supply voltage

(2) CPU with "Ext. Batt." connector

Figure 1-2 Back-up voltage supply

The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:

Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

Isc (short-circuit current)= 50 mA Imax = 50 mA

Ca = Battery/voltage supply capacity Ci = 25 nF maximum

La = Battery/voltage supply inductance Li = 2 mH maximum

General specifications

1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

18 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

The battery/power supply that powers the non-incendive connection must comply with the

following ratings:

Battery/power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

Voc ≤ Vmax (15 V)

Isc ≤ Imax (50 mA)

Ca ≥ Ci + Cc (25 nF + Cc)

La ≥ Li + Lc (2 mH + Lc)

Cc = Cable capacity

Lc = Cable inductance

Note

The concept of non-incendive field wiring allows the interconnection of devices with non-

incendive field wiring using any wiring method approved for unclassified sites.

If you do not know the capacity and inductance of the cable, you can use the following values:

Cc = 197 pF/m (60 pF/ft.), Lc = 0.66 mH/m (0.2 mH/ft)

Marine Approvals

Classification societies:

● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)

● BV (Bureau Veritas)

● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)

● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)

● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)

● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Safety requirements for installation

The S7-400 automation system is "open-type equipment" in accordance with standard

IEC 61131-2 and therefore EU Directive 2014/35/EU (Low Voltage Directive), and "open type"

in accordance with UL/CSA certification.

To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability, flame retardation,

stability, and shock-hazard protection, the following alternative types of installation are

specified:

● Installation in a suitable cabinet

● Installation in a suitable housing

● Installation in a suitably equipped, enclosed operating area.

General specifications

1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 19

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Introduction

This section provides details of the immunity of S7-400 modules and information on RFI

suppression.

All components of the S7-400 automation system meet the requirement of the standards

applicable in Europe provided the system is installed in accordance with all applicable

regulations (see

Installation manual, sections 2 and 4

"EMC" definition

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device or system to operate

satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without affecting that environment.

WARNING

Personal injury or property damage can result.

Installing expansions that are not approved for the S7-400 can breach the requirements and

regulations governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility.

Only use expansions that are approved for the system.

Pulse-shaped interference

The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the modules with pulse shaped

interference. The system S7-400 system must meet the requirements and guidelines for

electrical assembly.

Table 1-3 Pulse-shaped interference

Pulse-shaped interference Test voltage Corresponds to

immunity test lev‐

Electrostatic discharge

in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2

Air discharge:

Contact discharge:

±8 kV

±6 kV

Burst (electrical fast transient) in accord‐

ance with IEC 61000-4-4

2 kV (power supply line)

2 kV (signal line >30 m)

1 kV (signal line <30 m)

General specifications

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

20 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Pulse-shaped interference Test voltage Corresponds to

immunity test lev‐

Surge

in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5

● Asymmetrical connection 2 kV (supply line) DC with protective

components

2 kV (signal line/data line only > 30 m),

where applicable with protective compo‐

nents

● Symmetrical connection 1 kV (supply line) DC with protective

components

1 kV (signal line only > 30 m), where ap‐

plicable with protective components

Sinusoidal interference

The table below shows S7-400 module EMC for sinusoidal interference.

Table 1-4 Sinusoidal interference

Sinusoidal interference Test values Corresponds

to immunity

test level

High frequency radiation (electromagnetic

fields)

in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3

80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4 GHz to 2 GHz

10 V/m with 80 % amplitude modulation

at 1 kHz

2 GHz to 2.7 GHz

3 V/m with 80 % amplitude modulation

at 1 kHz

HF currents on cables and cable shielding

in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6

Test voltage 10 V with 80 % amplitude

modulation of 1 kHz in a range of 10 kHz

to 80 MHz

Emission of radio frequency interference

Emissions from electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 61000-6-4.

Emissions over main AC supply in accordance with 61000-6-4.

Line harmonics

The AC power modules for S7-400 comply with the following standards for line harmonics:

Harmonic current: EN 61000-3-2

Voltage supply fluctuations and flicker: EN 61000-3-3

General specifications

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 21

Additional measures

If you want to connect an S7-400 system to the public network, you must ensure compliance

with class B pursuant to EN 55032.

Appropriate additional measures are to be taken if you need to increase the immunity of the

system in the light of high external interference.

General specifications

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

22 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries

Shipping and storage of modules

S7-400 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131-2 with respect to shipping and storage

requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or stored in their original

packing.

Climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC 60721-3-2,

Class 2K4 for transportation.

Mechanical conditions are compliant with IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.

Table 1-5 Shipping and storage conditions for modules

Permissible range

Free fall ≤ 1m (to 10 kg)

Temperature -40 to +70° C

Barometric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an elevation of -1000 to 3500 m)

Relative humidity (at +25° C) 5 to 95%, without condensation

Sinusoidal vibration in accord‐

ance with IEC 60068-2-6

5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm

9 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2

Shock in accordance with IEC

60068-2-29

250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

Shipment of backup batteries

Backup batteries should always be shipped in their original package. No special measures are

required for the transport of the backup batteries used in the S7-400 system. The lithium

component of the backup battery is less than 0.5 g.

Storing backup batteries

Always store backup batteries in a cool and dry place. The batteries have a maximum shelf

life of 10 years.

WARNING

Risk of injury, material damage, release of hazardous substances.

Lithium batteries can explode if handled improperly. Their improper disposal may result in

the release of hazardous substances. Strictly adhere to the following instructions:

Do not throw a new or low battery into an open fire and do not perform any soldering work

on the cell casing (max. temperature 100° C). Do not recharge the battery - risk of explosion!

Do not open a battery. Replace a faulty battery only with the same type. Replacement

batteries can be ordered from SIEMENS (for order numbers, refer to the

"Module

Specifications" reference manual

, in Appendix C (Page 429)).

Always try to return low batteries to the manufacturer or deliver these to a registered recycling

company.

General specifications

1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 23

1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation

Operating conditions

S7-400 systems are designed for stationary use in weather-proof locations. The S7-400 fulfills

the requirements for use in accordance with IEC 60721-3-3:

● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)

● Class 3K3 (climatic ambient conditions)

Use with additional measures

The S7-400 may not be used under the conditions outlined below without taking additional

measures:

● at locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation

● in aggressive environments caused, for example, by

– the development of dust

– corrosive vapors or gases

– strong electric or magnetic fields

● in installations requiring special monitoring, for example

– elevators

– electrical plants in potentially hazardous areas

An additional measure would be to install the S7-400 in a cabinet or housing.

Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for S7-400 modules are listed in the following table in the

form of sinusoidal vibrations.

Table 1-6 Mechanical ambient conditions

Frequency range in Hz Test values

10 ≤ f < 58 0.075 mm amplitude

58 ≤ f < 500 1 g constant acceleration

Reducing vibrations

If your S7-400 modules are exposed to severe shock or vibration, take appropriate measures

to reduce acceleration or the amplitude.

We recommend the installation of the S7-400 on damping materials (for example, rubber-metal

vibration dampers.)

General specifications

1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

24 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Testing mechanical ambient conditions

The table below provides important information with respect to the type and scope of testing

of mechanical ambient conditions.

Table 1-7 Test for mechanical ambient conditions

Condition tested Test standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test in accord‐

ance with IEC 60068-2-6

(sinusoidal)

Type of vibration: frequency sweeps with a rate of

change of 1 octave/minute.

10 Hz ≤ f < 58 Hz, constant amplitude 0.075 mm

58 Hz ≤ f < 500 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g

Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis

in each of three axes perpendicular to each other.

Shock Shock test in accordance

with IEC 60068-2-29

Type of shock: half-sine

Severity of shock: 10 g peak value, 6 ms duration

Direction of shock: 100 shocks in each of the 3 axes

arranged vertically to each other.

Climatic ambient conditions

The S7-400 may be operated under the following climatic ambient conditions:

Table 1-8 Climatic ambient conditions

Ambient conditions Permissible range Remark

Temperature 0 to +60° C

Temperature change Max. 10° C / h

Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25° C No condensation

Barometric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa (corresponds to an elevation of

-1000 to 2000 m)

Concentration of pollutants SO2: < 0.5 ppm;

RH < 60%, no condensation

H2S: < 0.1 ppm;

RH < 60%, no condensation

Test: 10 ppm; 10 days

Test: 1 ppm; 10 days

ISA-S71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 -

General specifications

1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 25

1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of

protection

Test voltages

Where required, insulation resistance is proved in routine testing with test voltages in

accordance with IEC 61131-2.

Protection class

Protection class I in accordance with IEC 61140, i.e. protective conductor connection to power

module required!

Protection from foreign objects and water

IP20 in accordance with IEC 60529, i.e. protection against contact with standard probes.

There is no water ingress protection.

General specifications

1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

26 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Rack 2

2.1 Function and design of the racks

Introduction

The racks for the S7-400 have the following functions:

● They physically hold the modules.

● They supply the modules with operating voltage.

● They connect the individual modules to each other via the signal busses.

Design of the racks

A rack consists of the following elements:

● Mounting rail with threaded bolts for fixing the modules and lateral cutouts for mounting the

rack

● Plastic parts that function, among other things, as guides when swinging the modules into

place

● A backplane bus, an I/O bus and, if necessary, a communication bus with bus connector

● Connection for local ground

The following figure shows the mechanical configuration of a rack (UR1).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Figure 2-1 Configuration of a rack with 18 slots

(1) Mounting rail

(2) Plastic parts

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 27

(3) Bus connector (covered when shipped)

(4) Connection for local ground

UL/CSA note

Special requirements should be taken into consideration in the area of influence of the UL/

CSA; these may be fulfilled by installing the system in a cabinet.

Rack

2.1 Function and design of the racks

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

28 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2

(6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)

Order number

The "x" variable has the following meaning for order numbers 6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0 and

6ES7400-1JAx1:

● x=0: Mounting rail made of sheet steel

● x=1: Mounting rail made of aluminum

Introduction

The UR1 and UR2 racks are used for assembling central racks and expansion racks. The UR1

and UR2 racks have both an I/O bus and a communication bus.

Suitable modules for UR1 and UR2

You can use the following modules in the UR1 and UR2 racks:

● When the UR1 or UR2 is used as a central rack:

All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs

● When the UR1 or UR2 is used as an expansion rack:

All S7-400 modules except for CPUs and send IMs

Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1 receive

IM.

Design of the UR1 and UR2

1 2

465 mm 240 mm

482,5 mm 257,5 mm

290 mm 190 mm

40 mm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(1)+(2) I/O bus

(3)+(4) Communication bus

Figure 2-2 UR1 rack with 18 slots and UR2 with 9 slots

Rack

2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 29

Specifications of the UR1 and UR2 racks

Rack UR1

6ES7

400-1TA01-0AA0

UR1

6ES7

400-1TA11-0AA0

UR2

6ES7

400-1JA01-0AA0

UR2

6ES7

400-1JA11-0AA0

Number of single-width slots 18 18 9 9

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5x 290 x 27.5 482.5x 290 x 27.5 257.5x 290 x 27.5 257.5x 290 x 27.5

Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel Aluminum Sheet steel Aluminum

Weight (in kg) 4,1 3,0 2,15 1,5

Busses I/O bus and communication bus

Rack

2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

30 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0)

Order number

The "x" variable has the following meaning for order number 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0:

● x=0: Mounting rail made of sheet steel

● x=1: Mounting rail made of aluminum

Introduction

The UR2-H rack is used for assembling two central racks or expansion racks in one rack. The

UR2-H rack essentially represents two electrically isolated UR2 racks on the same mounting

rail. The main area of application of the UR2-H is in the compact structure of redundant

S7-400H systems (two devices or systems in one rack).

Suitable modules for UR2-H

You can use the following modules in the UR2-H rack:

● When the UR2-H is used as a central rack:

All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs

● When the UR2-H is used as an expansion rack:

All S7-400 modules except for CPUs, send IMs, the IM 463-2, and the adapter module

Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1 receive

IM.

Design of the UR2-H

The following figure shows the design of the UR2-H rack with 2x9 slots.

1 2

465 mm

482,5 mm

290 mm 190 mm

40 mm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Figure 2-3 Rack dimensions

Rack

2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 31

(1) System I

(2) System II

CAUTION

Danger of damage to equipment.

If you insert the power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply modules,

the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby power supply modules

starting from slot 1 must be inserted without leaving gaps.

Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permitted slots. Take particular

notice of the option of swapping modules in slot 1 on rack II and slot 9 on rack I.

Specifications of the UR2-H rack

Rack UR2-H

6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0

UR2-H

6ES7 400-2JA10-0AA0

Number of single-width slots 2 x 9 2 x 9

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 482.5 x 290 x 27.5

Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel Aluminum

Weight (in kg) 4,1 3,0

Busses Segmented I/O bus,

segmented communication bus

Rack

2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

32 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)

Introduction

The CR2 rack is used for the design of segmented central racks. The CR2 has both an I/O

bus and a communication bus. The I/O bus is split into two local bus segments with 10 or 8

slots.

Suitable modules for the CR2

You can use the following modules in the CR2 rack:

● All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs

Design of the CR2

1 2

465 mm

482,5 mm

290 mm 190 mm

40 mm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Figure 2-4 CR2 rack

(1) Segment 1

(2) Segment 2

(3) I/O bus segment 2

(4) Communication bus

(5) I/O bus segment 1

Specifications of the CR2 rack

Rack CR2

Number of single-width slots 18

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5

Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel

Weight (in kg) 4,1

Rack

2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 33

Rack CR2

Busses Segmented I/O bus,

full-length communication bus

Only one power supply module required

Rack

2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

34 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)

Introduction

The CR3 rack is used for the design of central racks in standard systems (not in fault-tolerant

systems). The CR3 has both an I/O bus and a communication bus.

Suitable modules for the CR3

You can use the following modules in the CR3 rack:

● All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs

● You can only operate only one CPU 41x-4H at a time.

Design of the CR3

190 mm

40 mm

1 2 3 4

115 mm

132 mm

290 mm

Figure 2-5 CR3 rack

Specifications of the CR3 Rack

Rack CR3

Number of single-width slots 4

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 132 x 290 x 27.5

Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel

Weight (in kg) 0,75

Busses I/O bus and communication bus

Rack

2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 35

2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2

(6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)

Order number

The "x" variable has the following meaning for order numbers 6ES7403-1TAx0-0AA0 und

6ES7403-1JAx01-0AA0:

● x=0: Mounting rail made of sheet steel

● x=1: Mounting rail made of aluminum

Introduction

The ER1 and ER2 racks are used for the design of expansion racks.

The ER1 and ER2 racks have only one I/O bus with the following restrictions:

● Interrupts from modules in the ER1 or ER2 have no effect since there are no interrupt lines

provided.

● Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not supplied with 24 V. Modules requiring a 24 V supply

are not provided for use in the ER1 or ER2.

● Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not backed up either by the battery in the power supply

module or by the voltage supplied externally to the CPU or the receive IM (EXT.-BATT.

socket).

There is therefore no advantage in using backup batteries in the power supply modules in

ER1 and ER2.

Battery faults and backup voltage faults are not reported to the CPU. The battery monitoring

function of a power supply module installed in the ER1 or ER2 should therefore always be

switched off.

Suitable modules for ER1 and ER2

You can use the following modules in the ER1 and ER2 racks:

● All power supply modules

● Receive IMs

● All signal modules provided the above-mentioned restrictions are observed.

Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1 receive

IM.

Rack

2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

36 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Design of the ER1 and ER2

1 1

465 mm 240 mm

482,5 mm 257,5 mm

290 mm 190 mm

40 mm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Figure 2-6 ER1 rack with 18 slots and ER2 with 9 slots

(1) I/O bus

Specifications of the ER1 and ER2 racks

Rack ER1

6ES7

403-1TA01-0A

ER1

6ES7

403-1TA11-0AA0

ER2

6ES7

403-1JA01-0AA0

ER2

6ES7

403-1JA11-0AA0

Number of single-width

slots

18 18 9 9

Dimensions

W x H x D (in mm)

482.5 x 290 x

27.5

482.5 x 290 x 27.5 257.5 x 290 x 27.5 257.5 x 290 x 27.5

Material of the mount‐

ing rail

Sheet steel Aluminum Sheet steel Aluminum

Weight (in kg) 3,8 2,5 2,0 1,25

Busses Restricted I/O bus

Rack

2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 37

Rack

2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

38 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Power supply modules 3

3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules

Functions of the power supply modules

The power supply modules of the S7-400 supply the other modules in the rack with their

operating voltages via the backplane bus. They do not provide load voltages for the signal

modules.

Common characteristics of the power supply modules

The power supply modules share the following characteristics in addition to their individual

specifications:

● Encapsulated design for use in racks of the S7-400 system

● Cooling via natural convection

● Plug-in connection of the supply voltage with AC - DC coding

● Protection class I (with protective conductor) in accordance with IEC 61140; VDE 0140,

Part 1

● Limitation of the inrush current in accordance with NAMUR Recommendation NE 21

● Short-circuit-proof outputs

● Monitoring of both output voltages. If one of these voltages fails, the power supply module

signals a fault to the CPU.

● Both output voltages (5 VDCand 24 VDC) share a common ground.

● Primary clocked

● Battery backup as option. The parameters set and the memory contents (RAM) are backed

up via the backplane bus in the CPUs and programmable modules. In addition, the backup

battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU. Both the power supply module and

the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage.

● Operating and fault/error LEDs on the front plate.

Note

A mains disconnecting device must be provided when installing AC power supply modules.

Switching the line voltage Off/On

The power supply modules have an inrush current limiter in accordance with NAMUR.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 39

Power supply module in invalid slot

If you insert the power supply module of a rack in an invalid slot, it will not power up. In this

case, proceed as follows to start up the power supply module correctly:

1. Disconnect the power supply module from the mains (not just the standby switch).

2. Remove the power supply module.

3. Install the power supply module in slot 1.

4. Wait at least 1 minute and then switch the line voltage on again.

CAUTION

Danger of damage to equipment.

If you insert the power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply

modules, the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby power supply

modules starting from slot 1 must be inserted without leaving gaps.

Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permissible slots.

Power supply modules

3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

40 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

3.2 Redundant power supply modules

Order numbers and function

Table 3-1 Redundant power supply modules

Type Order number Input voltage Output voltage See section

PS 407 10A R 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0 85 to 264 VAC or 88 to

300 VDC

5 VDC/10 A and

24 VDC/1 A

3.8 (Page 60)

PS 407 10A R 6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0 85 to 264 VAC or 88 to

300 VDC

5 VDC/10 A and

24 VDC/1 A

3.9 (Page 63)

PS 405 10A R 6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0 19.2 to 72 VDC 5 VDC/10 A and

24 VDC/1 A

3.14 (Page 74)

PS 405 10A R 6ES7 405-0KR02-0AA0 19.2 to 72 VDC 5 VDC/10 A and

24 VDC/1 A

3.15 (Page 76)

Redundant operation

Using two power supply modules of type PS 407 10A R or PS 405 10A R, you can design a

redundant power supply for a rack. We recommend this if you want to increase the availability

of your programmable controller, particularly if you are operating it on an unreliable power

system.

Designing a redundant power supply

Redundant operation is possible with any of the S7 CPUs and racks described in this manual.

STEP 7 as of V4.02 is also required.

To design a redundant power supply, insert a power supply module into slots 1 and 3 of the

rack. You can then insert as many modules as can be supplied by a single power supply

module. In other words, in redundant operation all the modules can only draw a total of 10 A.

Features

The redundant power supply of an S7-400 has the following characteristics:

● The power supply module features an inrush current in accordance with NAMUR.

● Each of the power supply modules can take over the supply of power to the whole rack if

the other one fails. There is no loss of operation.

● Each of the power supply modules can be exchanged while the system is in operation. No

loss of power and no peak stress occurs with the effective voltages when the modules are

removed or inserted.

● Each of the power supply modules monitors its function and sends a message if it fails.

● Neither of the power supply modules can generate an error which affects the output voltage

of the other power supply module.

Power supply modules

3.2 Redundant power supply modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 41

● A redundant battery concept (backup concept) is only provided when two backup batteries

are used in each of the power supply modules. If only one battery is used in each module,

only non-redundant backup is possible, since both batteries are being used at the same

time.

● The failure of a power supply module is registered via a plug and remove interrupt (default

STOP). If used in the second segment of the CR 2 no message is sent if the power supply

module fails.

● If two power supply modules are inserted but only one is switched on, there is a power-up

delay of up to one minute when the line voltage is switched on.

Note

The check box "Startup if preset configuration not equal to actual configuration" should be

activated in the "Properties" dialog box of the CPU.

Power supply modules

3.2 Redundant power supply modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

42 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

3.3 Backup battery (option)

Introduction

The power supply modules of the S7-400 have a battery compartment for one or two backup

batteries. Use of these batteries is optional.

Function of the backup batteries

If backup batteries have been installed, the parameters set and the memory contents (RAM)

will be backed up via the backplane bus in CPUs and programmable modules if the power

supply module is turned off or the supply voltage fails. The battery voltage must be within the

tolerance range.

In addition, the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU after power-on.

Both the power supply module and the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage.

Insert backup battery

Activate battery monitoring once you have installed one or two backup batteries. Make sure

that neither the respective LED BATT1F or BATT2F nor the LED BAF are illuminated. Only

then is the backup battery working properly and backup guaranteed as described above.

Note

Insert the power supply module in the rack and switch it on before you insert the backup battery

for the first time. This will increase the service life of the backup battery.

Power supply modules with two backup batteries:

Some power supply modules contain a battery compartment for two batteries. If you use two

batteries and set the switch to 2BATT, the power supply module defines one of the two batteries

as the backup battery. This assignment remains in force until the battery is empty. When the

backup battery is completely discharged, the system switches to the reserve battery which is

then in turn used as the backup battery for the duration of its life. The status "backup battery"

is also stored in the event of a power failure.

Battery type

You may only use batteries certified by Siemens! (see Appendix C: Spare parts (Page 429)).

The batteries can form a passivation layer. Depassivation takes place when the batteries are

inserted in the power supply module.

Power supply modules

3.3 Backup battery (option)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 43

Specifications of the backup battery

Backup battery

Order number 6ES7971-0BA00

Type 1 x lithium AA

Nominal voltage 3.6 V

Nominal capacity 2,3 Ah

Backup times

The maximum backup time is based on the capacity of the backup batteries used and the

backup current in the rack. The backup current is the sum of all individual currents of the

inserted backed-up modules as well as the requirements of the power supply module when

the power is switched off.

Example for the calculation of backup times

The capacity of the batteries is listed in the technical specifications of the power supply. The

typical and maximum backup current of the backed-up module is listed in the technical

specifications of the module.

The typical backup current of a CPU is an empirically determined value. The maximum backup

current is a worst-case value that is calculated based on the corresponding manufacturer

specifications for the memory blocks.

The following technical specifications produce backup times for a CR with a PS 407 4A

(6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0) and a CPU 417-4 (6ES7417-4XT05-0AB0) as the only backed-up

module:

● Capacity of the backup battery: 2,3 Ah

● Maximum backup current (including own requirement at power off) of the power supply:

100 µA

● Typical backup current of the CPU 417-4: 225 µA to 40° C.

A nominal capacity of less than 100% is to be assumed when calculating the backup time

because the backup battery is also affected at power on by regular depassivation.

A battery capacity of 63% of the nominal capacity produces the following values:

Backup time = 2,3 Ah * 0.63 / (100 + 225) µA = (1,449 / 325) * 1 000 000 = 4458 h

This produces a maximum backup time of 185 days.

Power supply modules

3.3 Backup battery (option)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

44 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

3.4 Operator controls and indicators

Introduction

The power supply modules of the S7-400 have essentially the same controls and indicators.

The main differences are:

● Power supply modules with a backup battery have an LED (BATTF) that indicates an empty,

defective, or missing backup battery.

● Power supply modules with two redundant backup batteries have two LEDs (BATT1F and

BATT2F) to indicate empty, defective or missing backup battery.

Operator controls and indicators

The figure shows you an example of a power supply module (PS 407 20A) with two (redundant)

backup batteries. The LEDs are at the top left of the module front plate.

36$5$$$;)05%$77,1',&%$77%$772)),17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9%$77)%$77%$77/('V,17)%$)%$77)%$77)9'&9'&0RXQWLQJVFUHZ0RXQWLQJVFUHZ)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW8QGHUFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$772))%$77SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

Figure 3-1 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20A power supply module

Meaning of the LEDs

The meaning of the LEDs on the power supply modules is described in the tables below. The

following section contains a list of the faults indicated by these LEDs and notes on how to

acknowledge the faults.

Power supply modules

3.4 Operator controls and indicators

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 45

LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC

Table 3-2 LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC

LED Color Meaning

INTF Red Lights up in the event of an internal fault

5 VDC green Lights up as long as the 5 V voltage is within the tolerance limits

24 VDC green Lights up as long as the 24 V voltage is within the tolerance limits

LEDs BAF, BATTF

Power supply modules with a backup battery have the following indicators:

Table 3-3 LEDs BAF, BATTF

LED Color Meaning

BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the

BATT.INDIC switch is at the BATT position

BATTF Yellow Lights up if the battery is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if the battery

is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the BATT position

LEDs BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

Power supply modules with two backup batteries have the following indicators:

Table 3-4 LEDs BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

LED Color Meaning

BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the

BATT.INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position

BATT1F Yellow Lights up if battery 1 is empty or if the polarity is reversed or if the battery

is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position

BATT2F Yellow Lights up if the battery 2 is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if the battery

is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the 2 BATT position

Backup voltage to the backplane bus

The backup voltage is either supplied by the backup battery or fed externally into the CPU or

receiver IM. In its normal state, the level of the backup voltage is between 2.7 V and 3.6 V.

The backup voltage is monitored at the lower limit. Violation of the lower limit is indicated by

the BAF LED and reported to the CPU.

Power supply modules

3.4 Operator controls and indicators

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

46 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

BAF lights up if the backup voltage on the backplane bus is too low. Possible causes of this

include:

● Battery (batteries) empty or battery polarity has been reversed.

● External supply via CPU or receive IM is defective or supply from secondary power supply

module is defective or missing.

● Short-circuit or overload on the battery voltage.

Note

Due to internal capacities, if you remove the battery or switch off the external supply, some

time may elapse before BAF, BATT1F, or BATT2F lights up.

Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules

Table 3-5 Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules

Control Function

FMR button For acknowledging and resetting a fault indicator after correcting the fault

Standby switch Switches the output voltages (5 V VDC24 VDC) to 0 V by intervening in the

control loop (no mains disconnection).

●Output voltages at nominal value

●Output voltage 0 V

Switches

BATT.INDIC

Used for setting LEDs and battery monitoring

Where one battery can be used (PS 407 4A, PS 405 4A):

● OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive

● BATT: BAF/BATTF LEDs and monitor signals active

Where two batteries can be used (PS 407 10A, PS 407 20A, PS 405 10A, PS

405 20A):

● OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive

● 1 BATT: Only BAF/BATT1F LEDs (for battery 1) active.

● 2 BATT: BAF/BATT1F/BATT2F LEDs (for batteries 1 and 2) active.

Battery compart‐

ment

For backup battery (batteries)

Power connection 3-pin connector for the power main

(do not pull and plug under power)

Cover

The battery compartment, battery selector switch, voltage selector switch and power

connection are housed under one cover. The cover must remain closed during operation in

order to protect these operator controls and to prevent static electricity from affecting the

battery connections.

Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by

touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments.

Power supply modules

3.4 Operator controls and indicators

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 47

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

Introduction

The power supply modules of the S7-400 indicate module faults and backup battery faults via

LEDs on the front plate.

Overview of the error messages of the power supply modules

Table 3-6 Error messages of the power supply modules

Type of fault/error LED

Module error INTF

5 VDC

24 VDC

Backup battery fault Power supplies with 1 backup battery:

BAF

BATTF

Power supplies with 2 backup battery:

BAF

BATT1F

BATT2F

Power supply modules

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

48 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC LEDs

The following table shows the faults indicated by the INTF, 5 VDC, and 24 VDC LEDs and lists

how to remedy the faults. The status of the BAF, BATTF, BATT1F, and BATT2F LEDs is not

relevant here.

Table 3-7 INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC LEDs

INTF

LED

DC5V

LED

DC24V

Cause of fault Remedy

D D D Standby switch in position Set standby switch to the | posi‐

tion

Line voltage missing Check line voltage

Internal fault, power supply module

defective

Replace power supply module

Cutoff after overvoltage on 5 V or

non-permissible external supply

Disconnect from mains and recon‐

nect after approximately 3 mi‐

nutes; if necessary, remove exter‐

nal supply

Power supply module operated in

wrong slot

Install the power supply module in

the correct slot (slot 1)

Short-circuit or overload on 5 V Switch off the power supply mod‐

ule, remove the source of the

short-circuit; after approximately 3

seconds, the power supply mod‐

ule can be switched on with the

standby switch or via the power

system.*

D H D Overvoltage on 24 V Check if there is an external sup‐

ply; if not, replace power supply

module.

H D* D Short-circuit or overload on 5 V and

24 V and overheating

Check the load on the power sup‐

ply module. Remove module if

necessary. Wait 5 minutes before

switching the power supply mod‐

ule again.

H H D If the standby switch is set to the

position, illegal external supply on

5 V

Remove all modules; determine

which module is faulty.

If the standby switch is set to the |

position, short-circuit or overload on

24 V.

Check the load on the power sup‐

ply module. Remove module if

necessary.

D B H Voltage restored after short-circuit or

overload on 5 V if faults occur in op‐

eration

Press FMR button: Flashing

changes to steady light

Dynamic overload on 5 V Check load on the power supply

module. Possibly remove mod‐

ules.

D B B Voltage restored after short-circuit or

overload on 5 V and 24 V if faults oc‐

cur in operation

Press FMR button: Flashing

changes to steady light

Power supply modules

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 49

INTF

LED

DC5V

LED

DC24V

Cause of fault Remedy

D B B Dynamic overload on 5 V and 24 V Check load on the power supply

module. Possibly remove mod‐

ules.

D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up; B = LED flashing;

* If the power supply module does not start up again after a few seconds once the overload

has been removed, remove power to the module for 5 minutes and then switch it on again. If

the module stills does not start up, you must replace it. This applies to the following power

supply modules:

● 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, Release 3

● 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0, Release ≤ 5

● 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, Release ≥ 10

● 6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0

● 6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0

● 6ES7405-0KR02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0

● 6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0

The same characteristic is displayed by the built-in overtemperature protection is triggered.

If either the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs remains dark after switching on, the system has not

powered up.

If either of the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs of the PS 407 10AR remains dark for longer than 1 or

2 seconds after it is switched on, the power supply module will not start up.

The following power supply modules will switch off in the event of a short-circuit or overload

after 1 to 3 seconds. The module will try to restart after no more than 3 seconds. If the error

has been eliminated by then, the module will start up. This applies to the following modules:

Modules

PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0) PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)

PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0) PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)

PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0),

release ≥5

PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0)

PS 405 10A R (6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0) PS 407 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0),

release ≥7

PS 405 10A R (6ES7405-0KR02-0AA0) PS 407 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)

PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0) PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)

PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0) PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)

Power supply modules

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

50 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Overload at 24 V

In the event of overload at 24 V the output current is electronically limited to a value between

100% and 150% of the rated value. If the voltage then goes below the undervoltage threshold

of 19.2 V (-0/+ 5% corresponds to 19.2 V to 20.16 V), the modules respond as follows:

● For the power supply modules, the 24 V voltage is disconnected and reconnected at a

repeat rate of approx. 0.5 to 1 seconds until there is an output voltage that exceeds the

undervoltage threshold.

● For the power supply modules 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, 6ES740x-0KR00-0AA0 and

6ES740x-0KR01-0AA0, the voltage reaches the level determined by the load impedance,

the module is in the characteristic operating range.

After the overload has been eliminated, the voltage returns to the nominal range and the green

24 V LED flashes. The CPU sets the EXTF LED (external fault) and saves the fault in the

diagnostic buffer. You can trigger other responses, such as CPU STOP or a message to a

control room, in OB 81 (power supply error). If OB 81 is not configured, the CPU continues as

normal.

Overload at 5 V

In the event of an overload at 5 V, the power supply modules with 10 A or 20 A output current

can retain an output current of 16 A or 26 A for 300 ms. The power supply modules with 4 A

output current can retain an output current of 6 A for 300 ms. The CPU will then go to DEFECT

afterwards. If the 5 VDC LED flashes on the power supply and can be reset with the FMR

button, you will be able to perform a restart. The CPU will remain in STOP afterwards and will

then require a memory reset.

BAF, BATTF

The following table applies to power supply modules with one battery if the BATT.INDIC switch

is set to the BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the faults.

Table 3-8 BAF, BATTF; BATT.INDIC LEDs on BATT

LED

BAF

LED

BATF

Cause of fault Remedy

H H Battery empty or missing.

No external backup voltage available

Insert new battery. Press FMR button.

D H Battery is empty or missing.

Battery stored too long.

External backup voltage available.

Insert new battery. Press FMR button.

Depassivate battery (see

Installation Man‐

ual

H D Battery in order.

No backup voltage available (short-cir‐

cuit)

● Fault after plugging in a module:

Plugged-in module defective

● Fault after switching on: Remove all

modules and plug in individually

D D Battery OK.

External backup voltage available.

D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up;

Power supply modules

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 51

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT.INDIC

switch is set to the 1BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the

faults.

Nothing is indicated about the condition of any second battery that may be in use.

Table 3-9 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC LEDs on 1BATT

LED

BAF

LED

BATT1F

LED

BATT2F

Cause of fault Remedy

H H D Battery 1 empty or missing

No external backup voltage

available.

Insert new battery in compartment 1.

Press FMR button.

D H D Battery 1 empty or missing

External backup voltage avail‐

able.

Insert new battery in compartment 1.

Press FMR button.

Battery stored too long.

External backup voltage avail‐

able.

Depassivate battery (see

Installation

Manual

)

H D D Battery 1 OK.

No external backup voltage

available (short-circuit)

● Fault after plugging in a module:

Plugged-in module defective

● Fault after switching on: Remove

all modules and plug in

individually

D D D Battery 1 OK.

External backup voltage avail‐

able.

D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up;

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT.INDIC

switch is set to the 2BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the

faults.

Table 3-10 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC LEDs on 2BATT

LED

BAF

LED

BATT1F

LED

BATT2F

Cause of fault Remedy

H H H Both batteries are empty or

missing.

No external backup voltage

available

Insert new batteries in compart‐

ments 1 and 2 Press FMR button.

D H H Both batteries are empty or

missing.

External backup voltage avail‐

able

Insert new batteries in compart‐

ments 1 and 2 Press FMR button.

Power supply modules

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

52 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

LED

BAF

LED

BATT1F

LED

BATT2F

Cause of fault Remedy

H H D Battery 1 empty or missing

No external backup voltage

available (short-circuit or over‐

load)

Insert new battery in compartment 1.

Press FMR button.

● Fault after plugging in a module:

Plugged-in module defective

● Fault after switching on: Remove

all modules and plug in

individually

D H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new batteries in compart‐

ments 1 and 2 Press FMR button.

Battery has been stored for too

long

External backup voltage avail‐

able

Depassivate battery (see

Installation

Manual

H D H Battery 2 empty or missing

No external backup voltage

available (short-circuit or over‐

load)

Insert new battery in compartment 2.

Press FMR button.

● Fault after plugging in a module:

Plugged-in module defective

● Fault after switching on: Remove

all modules and plug in

individually

D D H Battery 2 empty or missing Insert new batteries in compart‐

ments 1 and 2 Press FMR button.

Battery has been stored for too

long

External backup voltage avail‐

able

Depassivate battery (see

Installation

Manual

H D D Both batteries in order.

No external backup voltage

available (short-circuit)

● Fault after plugging in a module:

Plugged-in module defective

● Fault after switching on: Remove

all modules and plug in

individually

D D D Both batteries in order.

External backup voltage avail‐

able

D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up;

Power supply modules

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 53

3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)

Function

The power module PS 407 4A is designed for connection to an 85 to 264 V AC network or an

88 to 300 V DC network, and supplies DC 5 V/4 A and DC 24 V/0.5 A at the secondary side.

PS 407 4A operator control and monitoring elements



/('V,17)%$)%$77)9'&9'&0RXQWLQJVFUHZ0RXQWLQJVFUHZ)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW8QGHUFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$772))SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV36$;)05%$77,1',&%$772)),17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9'$$$

Figure 3-2 PS 407 4A operator control and monitoring elements

Mains connection

An AC power plug is used with PS 407 4A for connection to an AC network and for connection

to a DC network.

Reverse polarity of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of DC 88 V to DC 300 V does not affect the

function of the power supply. The connection should comply with the instructions in the

installation manual.

Power supply modules

3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

54 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

PS 407 4A technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

25 x290x217

0.76 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule with insulating

sleeve; use hose line only)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

● Rated value DC 120/240 V

AC 120/240 V

● Permitted range 88 to 300 V DC

85 to 264 V AC

(wide range input)

Line frequency

● Rated value 50/60 Hz

● Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz

Rated input current

● With 120 V AC 0.38 A

● With 120 V DC 0.37 A

● With 240 V AC 0.22 A

● With 240 V DC 0.19 A

Leakage current < 3.5 mA

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values 5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values 5 V DC: 4 A

24 V DC: 0.5 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to

IEC 60536

I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR recommendation

NE 21

Power consumption 240 V AC 52 W

Power loss 20 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Power supply modules

3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 55

Back-up battery (option) 1 x lithium AA, 3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accord‐

ance with IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

56 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)

Function

The power module PS 407 4A is designed for connection to an 85 to 264 V AC network or an

88 to 300 V DC network, and supplies DC 5 V/4 A and DC 24 V/0.5 A at the secondary side.

PS 407 4A operator control and monitoring elements

Figure 3-3 PS 407 4A operator control and monitoring elements

Mains connection

An AC power plug is used with PS 407 4A for connection to an AC network and for connection

to a DC network.

Reverse polarity of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of 88 V DC to 300 V DC does not affect the

function of the power supply. The connection should comply with the instructions in the

installation manual.

Power supply modules

3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 57

PS 407 4A technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

25 x290x217

0.76 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule with insulating

sleeve; use hose line only)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

● Rated value 120/230 V DC

120/230 V AC

● Permitted range 88 to 300 V DC

85 to 264 V AC

(wide range input)

Line frequency

● Rated value 50/60 Hz

● Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz

Rated input current

● With 120 V AC 0.42 A

● With 120 V DC 0.35 A

● At 230 V AC 0.31 A

● At 230 V DC 0.19 A

Inrush current

● At 230 V AC Peak value 8.5 A

full width at half maximum 5 ms

● At 300 V DC Peak value 8.5 A

full width at half maximum 5 ms

Leakage current < 3.5 mA

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values 5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values 5 V DC: 4 A

24 V DC: 0.5 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to

IEC 61140

I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR recommendation

NE 21

Power consumption 240 V AC 52 W

Power supply modules

3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

58 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Power loss 20 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up battery (option) 1 x lithium AA, 3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accord‐

ance with IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 59

3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS

10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)

Function

The power modules PS 407 10A (standard) and PS 407 10A R (for redundant operation, see

Redundant power supply modules (Page 41)) are designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC

network or an 88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary

side.

PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R operator control and monitoring elements

36$.$$$;)05%$77,1',&%$77%$772)),17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9%$77)%$77%$77/('GLVSOD\V,17)%$)%$77)%$77)'&9'&96HFXULQJVFUHZ6HFXULQJVFUHZ)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW%HORZFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW%$77,1',&VZLWFK%$772))%$77SLQSOXJLQSRZHUVXSSO\FRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKQRGLVFRQQHFWLRQIURPSRZHU

Figure 3-4 PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R operator control and monitoring elements

Mains connection

An AC power plug is used with PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R both for connection to an AC

network and connection to a DC network.

Reverse polarity of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of DC 88 V to DC 300 V does not affect the

function of the power supply. The connection must comply with the instructions in the

installation manual.

Power supply modules

3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

60 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

Cable diameter

50x290x217

1.36 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule with

insulating sleeve; use hose line only)

3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

● Rated value 110/230 V DC

120/230 V AC

● Permitted range 88 to 300 V DC

85 to 264 V AC

(wide range input)

Line frequency

● Rated value 50/60 Hz

● Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz

Rated input current

● With 120 V AC 0.9 A

● At 110 V DC 1.0 A

● At 230 V AC 0.5 A

● At 230 V DC 0.5 A

Inrush current

● At 230 V AC Peak value 230 A, full width at half maximum

200 µs

peak value 63 A*, full width at half maximum 1 ms*

● At 300 V DC Peak value 230 A, full width at half maximum

200 µs

peak value 58 A*, full width at half maximum 1 ms*

Leakage current < 3.5 mA

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values 5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values 5 V DC: 10 A

24 V DC: 1.0 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Power supply modules

3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 61

Backup for power failures > 20 ms

at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR recommen‐

dation NE 21

Power consumption 105 W, PS 407 10A from product version 5

105 W, PS 407 10A R from product version 7

95 W, PS 407 10A from product version 10

Power loss 29.7 W

20 W, PS 407 10A from product version 10

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up batteries (option) 2 x lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accordance with

IEC 61131-2

Yes

*PS 407 10A: from product version 5

* PS 407 10A R: from product version 7

Power supply modules

3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

62 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS

10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)

Function

The power modules PS 407 10A (standard) and PS 407 10A R (for redundant operation, see

Redundant power supply modules (Page 41)) are designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC

network or an 88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary

side.

PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R operator control and monitoring elements

36$.$$$;)05%$77,1',&%$77%$772)),17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9%$77)%$77%$77/('V,17)%$)%$77)%$77)9'&9'&0RXQWLQJVFUHZ0RXQWLQJVFUHZ)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW8QGHUFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$772))%$77SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

Figure 3-5 PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R operator control and monitoring elements

Mains connection

An AC power plug is used with PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R both for connection to an AC

network and connection to a DC network.

Reverse polarity of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of 88 V DC to 300 V DC does not affect the

function of the power supply. The connection must comply with the instructions in the

installation manual.

Power supply modules

3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 63

PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

50x290x217

1.2 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule with

insulating sleeve; use hose line only)

Input variables

Input voltage

● Rated value 120/230 V DC

120/230 V AC

● Permitted range 88 to 300 V DC

85 to 264 V AC

(wide range input)

Line frequency

● Rated value 50/60 Hz

● Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz

Rated input current

● With 120 V AC 0.9 A

● With 120 V DC 1.0 A

● At 230 V AC 0.5 A

● At 230 V DC 0.5 A

Inrush current

● At 230 V AC Peak value 63 A, full width at half maximum 1 ms*

● At 300 V DC Peak value 58 A, full width at half maximum 1 ms*

Leakage current < 3.5 mA

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values 5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values 5 V DC: 10 A

24 V DC: 1.0 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms

at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR recommen‐

dation NE 21

Power consumption 95 W

Power loss 20 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Power supply modules

3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

64 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Back-up batteries (option) 2 x lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accordance with

IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 65

3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)

Function

The power module PS 407 20A is designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC network or an

88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

PS 407 20A operator control and monitoring elements

36$5$$$;)05%$77,1',&%$77%$772)),17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9%$77)%$77%$77/('V,17)%$)%$77)%$77)9'&9'&0RXQWLQJVFUHZ0RXQWLQJVFUHZ)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW8QGHUFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$772))%$77SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

Figure 3-6 PS 407 20 A operator control and monitoring elements

Mains connection

An AC power plug is used with PS 407 20A both for connection to an AC network and for

connection to a DC network.

Reverse polarity of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of 88 V DC to 300 V DC does not affect the

function of the power supply. The connection must comply with the instructions in the

installation manual.

Power supply modules

3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

66 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

PS 407 20A technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

75x290x217

2.2 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule with

insulating sleeve; use hose line only)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

● Rated value 110/230 V DC

120/230 V AC

● Permitted range 88 to 300 V DC

85 to 264 V AC

(wide range input)

Line frequency

● Rated value 50/60 Hz

● Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz

Rated input current

● At 120 V AC/110 V DC 1.5 A

● At 230 V AC/230 V DC 0.8 A

Inrush current Peak value 88 A full width at half maximum 1.1 ms

Leakage current < 3.5 mA

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values 5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values 5 V DC: 20 A

24 V DC: 1.0 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR

recommendation NE 21

Power consumption 168 W

Power loss 44 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up batteries (option) 2 x lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accordance with

IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 67

3.11 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)

Function

The power module PS 407 20A is designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC network or an

88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

PS 407 20A operator control and monitoring elements

Figure 3-7 PS 407 20A power module operator control and monitoring elements

Mains connection

An AC power plug is used with PS 407 20A both for connection to an AC network and for

connection to a DC network.

Reverse polarity of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of 88 V DC to 300 V DC does not affect the

function of the power supply. The connection must comply with the instructions in the

installation manual

Power supply modules

3.11 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

68 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

PS 407 20A technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

25x290x217

1.3 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule with

insulating sleeve; use hose line only)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

● Rated value 120/230 V DC

120/230 V AC

● Permitted range 88 to 300 V DC

85 to 264 V AC

(wide range input)

Line frequency

● Rated value 50/60 Hz

● Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz

Rated input current

● At 120 V AC/120 V DC 1.4 A

● At 230 V AC/230 V DC 0.7 A

Inrush current Peak value 88 A full width at half maximum 1.1 ms

Leakage current < 3.5 mA

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values 5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values 5 V DC: 20 A

24 V DC: 1.0 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR

recommendation NE 21

Power consumption 158 W

Power loss 35 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up batteries (option) 2 x lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accordance with

IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.11 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 69

3.12 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0)

Function

The PS 405 4A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19.2

to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the secondary side.

Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A

/('V,17)%$)%$77)9'&9'&0RXQWLQJVFUHZ0RXQWLQJVFUHZ)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW8QGHUFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$772))SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV36$;,17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9)05%$77,1',&%$772))'$$$

Figure 3-8 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A

Specifications of the PS 405 4A

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

25x290x217

0.76 kg

3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule, use

component conductor or flexible sheath cable)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input parameters

Input voltage

● Nominal value 24 VDC / 48 V / 60 V

Power supply modules

3.12 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

70 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 72 VDC

Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 VDC

Nominal input current 2/1/0.8 A

Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN VDE 0160, curve B2

Output parameters

Output voltages

● Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC

Output currents

Nominal values 5 VDC: 4 A

24 VDC: 0.5 A

Electrical parameters

Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Nominal voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the

NAMUR recommendation NE 21

Power consumption (24 VDC) 48 W

Power loss 16 W

Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off

Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

Power supply modules

3.12 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 71

3.13 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0)

Function

The power module PS 405 4A is designed for connection to a 19.2 to 72 V DC network, and

supplies 5 V/4 A DC and 24 V/0.5 A DC at the secondary side.

PS 405 4A operator control and monitoring elements

Figure 3-9 PS 405 4A operator control and monitoring elements

PS 405 4A technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

25x290x217

0.76 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule;

use single conductor or hose line)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

Power supply modules

3.13 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

72 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Rated value 24 V/48 V/60 V DC

● Permitted range Static: 19.2 to 72 V DC

Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 V DC

Rated input current 2 A/1 A/0.8 A

Inrush current Peak value 18 A

Full width at half maximum 20 ms

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values 5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

Rated values 5 V DC: 4 A

24 V DC: 0.5 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR

recommendation NE 21

Power consumption (24 V DC) 48 W

Power loss 16 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up battery (option) 1 x lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accordance with

IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.13 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 73

3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS

405 10A R (405-0KR00-0AA0)

Function

The power modules PS 405 10A (standard) and PS 405 10A R (for redundant operation) are

designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC

at the secondary side.

PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R operator control and monitoring elements

36$.$$$;)05,17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9%$77)%$77,1',&%$77%$772))%$77%$77/('V,17)%$)%$77)%$77)9'&9'&0RXQWLQJVFUHZV0RXQWLQJVFUHZV)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW8QGHUFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$772))%$77SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

Figure 3-10 PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R operator control and monitoring elements

PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

50x290x217

1.4 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule;

use single conductor or hose line)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

Power supply modules

3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

74 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Rated value 24 V/48 V/60 V DC

● Permitted range Static: 19.2 to 72 V DC

Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 V DC

Rated input current 4.3 A/2.1 A/1.7 A

Inrush current Peak value 18 A

Full width at half maximum 20 ms

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values

5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values

5 V DC: 10 A

24 V DC: 1.0 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR

recommendation NE 21

Power consumption 104 W

Power loss 29 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up batteries (option) 2 x lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accordance with

IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 75

3.15 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS

405 10A R (405-0KR02-0AA0)

Function

The power modules PS 405 10A (standard) and PS 405 10A R (for redundant operation) are

designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC

at the secondary side.

PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R operator control and monitoring elements

/('V,17)%$)%$77)%$77)9'&9'&0RXQWLQJVFUHZ0RXQWLQJVFUHZ)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW8QGHUFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$772))%$77SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV36$.$$$;)05,17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9%$77)%$77,1',&%$77%$772))%$77%$77

Figure 3-11 PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R operator control and monitoring elements

PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

50x290x217

1.2 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule;

use single conductor or hose line)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

Power supply modules

3.15 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

76 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Rated value 24 V/48 V/60 V DC

● Permitted range Static: 19.2 to 72 V DC

Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 V DC

Rated input current 4.0 A/2.0 A/1.6 A

Inrush current Peak value 18 A

Full width at half maximum 20 ms

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values

5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values

5 V DC: 10 A

24 V DC: 1.0 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR

recommendation NE 21

Power consumption 95 W

Power loss 20 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up batteries (option) 2 x lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accordance with

IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.15 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 77

3.16 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)

Function

The power module PS 405 20A is designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and

supplies 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

PS 405 20A operator control and monitoring elements

36$5$$$;)05,17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9%$77)%$77,1',&%$77%$772))%$77%$77/('V,17)%$)%$77)%$77)9'&9'&0RXQWLQJVFUHZV0RXQWLQJVFUHZV)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW8QGHUFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$772))%$77SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

Figure 3-12 PS 405 20A operator control and monitoring elements

PS 405 20A technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

75x290x217

2.2 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule;

use single conductor or hose line)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

● Rated value 24 V/48 V/60 V DC

Power supply modules

3.16 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

78 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Permitted range Static: 19.2 to 72 V DC

Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 V DC

Rated input current 7.3 A/3.45 A/2.75 A

Inrush current Peak value 56 A Full width at half maximum 1.5 ms

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values

5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values

5 V DC: 20 A

24 V DC: 1.0 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR

recommendation NE 21

Power consumption 175 W

Power loss 51 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up batteries (option) 2 x lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accordance with

IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.16 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 79

3.17 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)

Function

The power module PS 405 20A is designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and

supplies 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

PS 405 20A operator control and monitoring elements

36$5$$$;)05,17)%$)%$77)'&9'&9%$77)%$77,1',&%$77%$772))%$77%$77/('V,17)%$)%$77)%$77)9'&9'&0RXQWLQJVFUHZ0RXQWLQJVFUHZ)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW8QGHUFRYHU%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$772))%$77SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

Figure 3-13 PS 405 20A operator control and monitoring elements

PS 405 20A technical specifications

Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

Cable cross-section

50x290x217

1.3 kg

3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule;

use single conductor or hose line)

Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm

Input variables

Input voltage

● Rated value 24 V/48 V/60 V DC

Power supply modules

3.17 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

80 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Permitted range Static: 19.2 to 72 V DC

Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 V DC

Rated input current 7.0 A/3.2 A/2.5 A

Inrush current Peak value 56 A Full width at half maximum 1.5 ms

Output variables

Output voltage

● Rated values

5.1 V DC/24 V DC

Output current

● Rated values

5 V DC: 20 A

24 V DC: 1.0 A

Parameters

Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor

Overvoltage category II

Pollution degree 2

Rated voltage Ue

0 < Ue ≤ 50 V

150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V

Test voltage

700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)

2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)

Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR

recommendation NE 21

Power consumption 168 W

Power loss 44 W

Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up batteries (option) 2 x lithium AA,

3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accordance with

IEC 61131-2

Yes

Power supply modules

3.17 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 81

Power supply modules

3.17 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

82 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Digital modules 4

4.1 Module overview

Characteristics of digital modules

The tables below summarize the essential characteristics of the digital modules. This overview

supports you in selecting a module to suit your requirements.

Table 4-1 Digital input modules: overview of features

Features SM 421;

DI 32xDC

24 V

(-1BL0x-)

SM 421;

DI 16xDC

24 V

(-7BH0x-)

SM 421;

DI 16xAC

120 V

(-5EH00-)

SM 421;

DI 16xUC

24/60 V

(-7DH00-)

SM 421;

DI 16xUC

120/230 V

(-1FH00-)

SM 421;

DI 16xUC

120/230 V

(-1FH20-)

SM 421;

DI 32xUC

120 V

(-1EL00-)

Number of

inputs

32 DI; isolated

in groups of

16 DI; isolated

in groups of

16 DI; isolated

in groups of

16 DI; isolated

in groups of

16 DI; isola‐

ted in

groups of

16 DI; isola‐

ted in groups

32 DI; isola‐

ted in groups

Nominal in‐

put voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 to 60 VUC 120 VAC/

230 VDC

120/230 VUC 120 VAC/DC

Suitable

for...

Switches; 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)

Configura‐

ble

diagnostics

No Yes No Yes No No No

Diagnostic

interrupt

No Yes No Yes No No No

Hardware

interrupt at

edge transi‐

tion:

No Yes No Yes No No No

Adjustable

input delays

No Yes No Yes No No No

Substitu‐

tion value

output

- Yes - - - - -

Special fea‐

tures

High packag‐

ing density

Quick and

with interrupt

capability

Channel-spe‐

cific isolation

Interrupt ca‐

pability with

low, variable

voltages

For high, var‐

iable voltag‐

For high, vari‐

able voltages

Input charac‐

teristic curve

in accord‐

ance with IEC

61131-2

High packag‐

ing density

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 83

Table 4-2 Digital output modules: overview of features

Features SM 422;

DO 16xDC

24 V / 2 A

(-1BH1x)

SM 422;

DO 16xDC

20-125 V/ 1.5

(-5EH10)

SM 422;

DO 32xDC

24 V / 0.5 A

(-1BL00)

SM 422;

DO 32xDC

24 V / 0.5 A

(-7BL00)

SM 422;

DO 8xAC

120/230 V/ 5 A

(-1FF00)

SM 422;

DO 16xAC

120/230 V/

2 A

(-1FH00)

SM 422;

DO 16xAC

20-120 V/ 2 A

(-5EH00)

Number of

outputs

16 DO; isola‐

ted in groups

of 8

16 DO; isola‐

ted and re‐

verse polarity

protection in

groups of 8

32 DO; isola‐

ted in groups

32 DO; isola‐

ted in groups

8 DO; isolated

in groups of 1

16 DO; iso‐

lated in

groups of

16 DO; isola‐

ted in

groups of

Output cur‐

rent

2 A 1.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 5 A 2 A 2 A

Nominal

load voltage

24 VDC 20 to 125 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230

VAC

20 to 120

VAC

Configura‐

ble

diagnostics

No Yes No Yes No No Yes

Diagnostic

interrupt

No Yes No Yes No No Yes

Substitu‐

tion value

output

No Yes No Yes No No Yes

Special fea‐

tures

For high cur‐

rents

For variable

voltages

High packag‐

ing

density

Particularly

quick and with

interrupt capa‐

bility

For high cur‐

rents with

channel- spe‐

cific isolation

- For variable

currents

with chan‐

nel-specific

isolation

Table 4-3 Relay output module: overview of features

Features SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

(-1HH00)

Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8

Load voltage 125 VDC

230 VAC

Special features -

Digital modules

4.1 Module overview

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

84 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.2 Steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module

Introduction

The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to

commission digital modules successfully.

The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or

later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other modules

in between times.

Overview of steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module

Step Procedure

1 Select the module. Section 4.1 (Page 83) and special sections for

modules beginning with Section 4.7 (Page 97)

2 Mount the module in the rack. "Installing" section in the

Automation System

S7-400, Hardware and Installation

manual

3 Assigning module parameters Section 4.3 (Page 85) and special sections for

modules beginning with Section 4.7

4 Commissioning the configuration "Commissioning" section in the

Automation

System S7-400, Hardware and Installation

manual

5 Analyzing the configuration if commission‐

ing is not successful

Section 4.4 (Page 88)

4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules

4.3.1 Parameters

Introduction

Digital modules may have different features. You can configure the features of some modules.

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in

STEP 7

After you have defined all parameters, download these from your programming device to the

CPU. On a transition from STOP ＞ RUN mode, the CPU then transfers the parameters to the

individual digital modules.

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.

Digital modules

4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 85

Static parameters are passed to digital modules after a STOP ＞ RUN transition of the CPU,

as described above.

You may also edit dynamic parameters in the active user program of an S7 PLC using SFCs.

However, the parameters set in

STEP 7

will be applied again after a RUN > STOP, STOP >

RUN transition of the CPU. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules

in the user program in the Appendix.

Configuration in RUN (CiR)

CiR (Configuration in RUN) is a method you can use to modify your system or edit the

parameters of individual modules. These changes are made while your system is in operation,

that is, your CPU will stay in RUN over a maximum of 2.5 seconds while these changes are

applied.

For detailed information on this topic, refer to the "Configuration in RUN by means of CiR"

manual. This manual is found, for example, as a file in PDF format on the STEP 7

CD supplied.

Digital modules

4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

86 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.3.2 Parameters of digital input modules

Overview

The configurable digital input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values

listed in the table below, depending on functionality. For information on subsets "supported"

by specific digital modules, refer to the chapter dealing with the relevant module. Do not forget

that some digital modules have different input delays after parameter assignment.

The defaults apply if you have not set any parameters in

STEP 7

Table 4-4 Parameters of digital input modules

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Hardware interrupt1Yes/no No

● Destination CPU for

interrupt

1 to 4 - Static Module

Diagnostics

● Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel

● No load voltage L+/sensor

supply

Yes/no No

Hardware interrupt trigger

● Positive edge Yes/no No Dynamic Channel

● Negative edge Yes/no No

Input delay 0.1 ms (DC)

0.5 ms (DC)

3 ms (DC)

20 ms (DC/AC)

3 (DC) Static Channel

Reaction to error Set substitution

value (SSV)

Keep last value

(KLV)

SV Dynamic Module

Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 3

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines

are not available in ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and

without support from HWCONFIG.

3 Channels not selected for substitute value "1" are assigned substitute value "0".

Digital modules

4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 87

4.3.3 Parameters of digital output modules

Overview

The configurable digital output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values

listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. For information on subsets "supported"

by specific digital modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module beginning with

section 4.7.

The defaults apply if you have not set any parameters in

STEP 7

Table 4-5 Parameters of digital output modules

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter type Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Destination CPU for

interrupt

1 to 4 - Static Module

Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a val‐

ue (SV)

Keep last value

(KLV)

SV Dynamic Module

Diagnostics

● Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel

● Load voltage L+

missing

Yes/no No

● Short-circuit to M Yes/no No

● Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No

● Fuse blown Yes/no No

Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 3

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines

are not available in ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and

without support from HWCONFIG.

3 Channels not selected for substitute value "1" are assigned substitute value "0".

4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

4.4.1 General information about diagnostic messages

Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

Using the diagnostics function, we make a distinction between programmable and non-

programmable diagnostic messages.

Digital modules

4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

88 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

You only obtain programmable diagnostic messages if you have enabled the diagnostics using

the relevant parameters. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" tab in

STEP

, see section 6.7.

Digital modules always return non-programmable diagnostic messages, irrespective of

diagnostics being enabled.

Reactions to diagnostic messages in STEP 7

Actions initiated by diagnostic messages:

● The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the digital module, forwarded to

the CPU and can be read out by the user program.

● The fault LED on the digital module lights up.

● If you have set "Enable diagnostic interrupt" in

STEP 7

, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered

and OB 82 is called, see section 5.5.

Reading diagnostic messages

You can read detailed diagnostic messages using SFCs in the user program (refer to the

appendix "Diagnostic data of signal modules").

You can view the cause of the error in

STEP 7

in the module diagnostics (refer to the

online

help for STEP 7

Diagnostics using the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some digital modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal fault) and

EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have been

eliminated.

Refer to the specifications of the modules beginning with section 5.7 to find out which digital

modules have these fault LEDs.

See also

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Interrupts of the digital modules (Page 93)

Digital modules

4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 89

4.4.2 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules

Overview

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the digital modules with

diagnostics capability.

You can find out which diagnostic message each module is capable of in the Appendix entitled

"Diagnostic data of the signal modules".

Table 4-6 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules

Diagnostic message LED Scope of diagnostics Programmable

Module error INTF/EXTF Module No

Internal error INTF Module No

External error EXTF Module No

Channel error INTF/EXTF Module No

External auxiliary voltage missing EXTF Module No

Front connector missing EXTF Module No

No module parameters INTF Module No

Incorrect parameters INTF Module No

Channel information available INTF/EXTF Module No

STOP mode - Module No

Internal voltage failure INTF Module No

EPROM error INTF Module No

Hardware interrupt lost INTF Module No

Parameter assignment error INTF Channel No

Short-circuit to M EXTF Channel Yes

Short-circuit to L+ EXTF Channel Yes

Wire break EXTF Channel Yes

Fuse blown INTF Channel Yes

Sensor supply missing EXTF Channel/channel

group

Yes

Load voltage L+ missing EXTF Channel/channel

group

Yes

Note

Prerequisite for detecting errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is an

appropriate configuration of the digital module in STEP 7.

Digital modules

4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

90 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.4.3 Causes of errors and remedies for digital modules

Overview

Table 4-7 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules, causes of errors and remedies

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Module error Any, the module has detected an

error.

Internal error Module has detected an error within

the automation system.

External error Module has detected an error out‐

side of the automation system.

Channel error Indicates that only certain channels

are faulty.

External auxiliary volt‐

age missing

Voltage required to operate the

module is missing (load voltage,

sensor supply).

Supply missing voltage

Front connector miss‐

ing

Jumper between connections 1 and

2 in the front connector is missing.

Install jumper

No module

parameters

Module requires information wheth‐

er it should operate with default sys‐

tem parameters or with your param‐

eters.

Message queued after power-on until

parameter transmission by the CPU has

been completed; configure the module,

as required.

Incorrect parameters One parameter, or the combination

of parameters, is not plausible.

Reassign parameters to the module

Channel information

available

Channel error; module can provide

additional channel information.

STOP mode No parameters have been as‐

signed to the module and the first

module cycle has not been comple‐

ted.

If after rebooting the CPU all the input

values are in the intermediate memory,

this message is reset.

Internal voltage failure Module is defective Replace the module

EPROM error Module is defective Replace the module

Hardware interrupt

lost

The module cannot send an inter‐

rupt, since the previous interrupt

was not acknowledged; possible

configuration error.

Change the interrupt handling in the

CPU (change priority for interrupt OB;

shorten interrupt program).

Parameter assign‐

ment error

Incorrect parameters transferred to

the module (for example, impossi‐

ble input delay); the corresponding

channel is deactivated.

Reassign parameters to the module

Short-circuit to M Overload at output Eliminate overload

Short-circuit of output to M Check the wiring of the outputs.

Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit of output to L+ Check the wiring of the outputs.

Digital modules

4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 91

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Wire break Lines interrupted Connect the cable

No external sensor supply Wire sensors with10 to 18 kΩ.

Channel not connected (open) Disable the "Diagnostics – Wire break"

parameter for the channel in STEP 7.

Wire the channel

Fuse blown One or more fuses on the module

has blown and caused this fault.

Remove the overload and replace the

fuse.

Sensor supply missing Overload at sensor supply Eliminate overload

Short-circuit of sensor supply to M Eliminate the short-circuit.

Load voltage L+ miss‐

ing

Power supply L+ to module missing Feed in supply voltage L+.

Fuse in module is defective Replace the module

Digital modules

4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

92 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules

Introduction

This section describes the interrupt behavior of the digital modules. There are two types of

interrupt:

● Diagnostic interrupt

● Hardware interrupt

Note that not all digital modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a subset

of the interrupts described here. For information on the digital modules that support interrupts,

refer to their specifications.

For detailed information on the OBs and SFCs mentioned below, refer to the

STEP 7 Online

Help

Enabling interrupts

The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter

assignment. Interrupts are enabled in

STEP 7

Special feature: The module is inserted in ER-1/ER-2

Note

If you use the digital module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for enabling all the

interrupts to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.

Diagnostic interrupt

When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, incoming error events (initial occurrence) and

outgoing error events (error is cleared) are reported by means of an interrupt.

The CPU interrupts user program execution, and executes diagnostic interrupt OB82.

In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic

information from the module.

The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is

exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Hardware interrupt

A digital input module can trigger a hardware interrupt for each channel at a rising or falling

edge, or both, of a signal status change.

You perform parameter assignment for each channel separately. The parameters can be

changed at any time (in RUN mode in the user program.)

Digital modules

4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 93

Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU (OB 40 to OB

47). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or the priority classes with low

priority.

In the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40 to OB 47) you can specify how the

programmable controller is to respond to an edge change. The module acknowledges the

hardware interrupt when the program exits the hardware interrupt OB.

For each channel the digital input module can buffer an interrupt that has not been triggered.

If no run levels of a higher priority class are pending processing, the CPU processes the

buffered interrupts (of all modules) in the order of their occurrence.

Hardware interrupt lost

A "Hardware interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt is generated, if a successive interrupt occurs

at the same channel before the CPU has processed the previously buffered interrupt.

The CPU does not register any further interrupts at this channel unless it has completed

processing of the stacked interrupts of the same channel.

Interrupt-triggering channels

The interrupt-triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware interrupt OBs (in

the start information of the corresponding OB). The start information is two words long (bits 0

to 31). The bit number is the channel number. Bits 16 to 31 are not assigned.

See also

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Digital modules

4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

94 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

IEC 61131, type 1 and type 2

The IEC 61131 standard requires the following for the input current:

● In the case of type 2, an input current of ≥ 2 mA already at + 5 V

● In the case of type 1, an input current of ≥ 0.5 mA already at + 5 V

EN 60947-5-2, 2-wire BEROs

The standard for BEROs (EN 60947-5-2) specifies that there can be a current of ≤ 1.5 mA for

BEROs in the "0" signal state.

The input current of the module in the "0" signal state is decisive for the operation of 2-wire

BEROs. This must be in accordance with BERO requirements.

Digital modules

4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 95

Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

As long as the current flowing into the module remains ≤ 1.5 mA, the module recognizes this

as a "0" signal.

0,5

1,5

0 5 11 13 15 24 30 L+ (V)

- 30 V

I E (mA)

“0” “1”

L+

I < 1,5 mA

Typ. switching threshold(9.5 V)

Resistance characteristic curve

I min to IEC 61131; type 2

BERO

standard

I < 1,5 mA

PLC input resistance

--> “0” Signal

2-wire BERO

I min to IEC 61131; type 1

Figure 4-1 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

Digital modules

4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

96 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)

Properties

Key properties of the SM 421; DI 32 x 24 V DC:

● 32 inputs, isolated in a group of 32

● Rated input voltage 24 V DC

● Suitable for switches and 2-/3-/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 1)

The status LEDs indicate the process status.

Digital modules

4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 97

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x 24 V DC

L+

Process Module

Data register and bus control

Figure 4-2 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x 24 V DC

Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 500 g

Module-specific data

Digital modules

4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

98 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Number of inputs 32

Cable length

● unshielded Maximum 600 m

● shielded max. 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated supply voltage of electronics L+ Not required

Number of inputs that can be enabled simultaneously 32

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels No

Permissible potential difference

● Between different circuits 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)

Current consumption

● from backplane bus (5 V) 20 mA maximum

Module power loss Typ. 6 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Substitute values can be connected No

Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

● Rated value 24 V DC

● For "1" signal 13 to 30 V

● For "0" signal -30 to 5 V

Input current

● For "1" signal 7 mA

Input delay

● For "0" to "1" 1.2 to 4.8 ms

● For "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms

Input characteristic In accordance with IEC 61131-2; type 1

Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible

● Permissible quiescent current Maximum 1.5 mA

Digital modules

4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 99

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

(6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

4.8.1 Features

Overview

SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC has the following properties:

● 16 inputs, isolated in 2 groups of 8

● Rapid signal processing Input filter from 50 µs

● Rated input voltage 24 V DC

● Suitable for switches and 2-/3-/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131-2; type 2)

● 2 short-circuit proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each

● External redundant supply for sensor supply possible

● Status display "Sensor voltage (Vs) O.K."

● Group fault display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)

● Configurable diagnostics

● Configurable diagnostic interrupt

● Configurable hardware interrupts

● Configurable input delays

● Configurable substitute values in the input range

The status LEDs indicate the process status.

Note

The module spare parts are compatible with SM 421 module; DI 16 x 24 V DC;

(6ES7 421-7BH00-0AB0)

To use the new function "Input delay 50 µs", you require STEP7 from V 5.2.

Digital modules

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

100 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC

INTF

EXTF

1L+

1Vs

2L+

2Vs

1L+

2L+

L+

1L+

2L+

24 V

2L+

Front connector monitoring

Monitoring of external auxiliary voltage 1L+

Monitoring of internal voltage

Short-circuit

protection

Monitoring of encoder supply 1Vs

Monitoring of external auxiliary voltage 2L+

Monitoring of internal voltage

Short-circuit

protection

Monitoring of encoder supply 2Vs

Backplane bus connection

Figure 4-3 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC

Digital modules

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 101

Connection diagram for redundant sensor supply

The image below shows how sensors can be supplied with a redundant voltage source over

Vs (e.g. through another module).

L+ 1 L+

2 L+

Short-circuit-

proof driver

Digital input

module

to the sensors

Figure 4-4 Connection diagram for redundant sensor supply for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC

Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 600 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs 16

Cable length

● Unshielded, input delay

0.1 ms

0.5 ms

3 ms

20 m maximum

50 m maximum

600 m maximum

● Shielded, input delay

0.1 ms

0.5 ms

3 ms

30 m maximum

70 m maximum

1000 m maximum

Voltage, current and potential

Rated supply voltage of electronics and sensor L+ 24 V DC

● Reverse polarity protection Yes

Number of inputs that can be enabled simultaneously 16

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels and electronics power supply No

● Between channels

in groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between different circuits 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● channels against rear panel and load voltage L+ 500 V DC

● Between channel groups 500 V DC

Current consumption

● from backplane bus (5 V) 130 mA maximum

Digital modules

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

102 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● from supply voltage L+ 120 mA maximum

Module power loss Typ. 5 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts

● Hardware interrupt Configurable

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions

● Supply voltage monitoring for electronics Yes

● Load voltage monitoring Green LED per group

● Group fault display

for internal fault

for external fault

red LED (INTF)

red LED (EXTF)

● Channel fault display None

● Diagnostic information can be read out Yes

Monitoring for

● Wire break I < 1 mA

Substitute values can be connected Yes

Sensor supply outputs

Number of outputs 2

Output voltage

● loaded At least L+(-2.5 V)

Output current

● Rated value 120 mA

● Permitted range 0 to 150 mA

Additional (redundant) supply Possible

Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic

Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

● Rated value 24 V DC

● For "1" signal 11 to 30 V

● For "0" signal -30 to 5 V

Input current

● For "1" signal 6 to 12 mA

● For "0" signal < 6 mA

Input characteristic In accordance with IEC 61131; type 2

Connection of 2-wire BEROs

● Permissible quiescent current

Possible

3 mA maximum

Time, frequency

Internal preparation time 1 for

Digital modules

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 103

● Status recognition only

Input delay for channel groups 0.05 ms/0.05 ms

Input delay for channel groups 0.05 ms/0.1 ms or

0.1 ms/0.1 ms

Input delay for channel groups ≥ 0.5 ms

Maximum 50 µs

Maximum 70 µs

Maximum 180 µs

● Status recognition and hardware interrupt enable

Input delay for channel groups 0.05 ms/0.05 ms 2)

Input delay for channel groups 0.05 ms/0.1 ms or

0.1 ms/0.1 ms

Input delay for channel groups ≥ 0.5 ms

Maximum 60 µs

Maximum 80 µs

Maximum 190 µs

Internal processing time for diagnostics/diagnostic inter‐

rupt

Maximum 5 ms

Input delay

● Configurable Yes

● Rated value 0.05 / 0.1 /0.5 / 3 ms

● Input frequency

(with 0.1 ms delay time)

< 2kHz

Values included in cycle and response times.

Sensor circuit

Sensor resistor circuit for wire-break monitoring 10 to 18 kΩ

1 The filter times for the selected input delay are added to the total runtime.

2 Substitute value function; diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt must not be selected.

Digital modules

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

104 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.8.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Parameter assignment

You will find a description of the general configuration of digital modules in section 5.3.

Parameters of SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

The table below shows an overview of configurable parameters and their default settings for

SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V.

Table 4-8 Parameters of SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Hardware interrupt1Yes/no No

● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module

Diagnostics

● Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel

Channel group

● No load voltage L+/sensor supply Yes/no No

Hardware interrupt trigger

● Positive edge Yes/no - Dynamic Channel

● Negative edge Yes/no

Input delay 0.05 ms

0.1 ms

0.5 ms

3 ms

3 ms Static Channel group

Reaction to error Set substitution val‐

ue (SSV)

Hold last value (HLV)

SV Dynamic Module

Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in

ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

Allocating the sensor supplies to channel groups

The two sensor supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups: Inputs 0 to 7

and inputs 8 to 15. You also configure diagnostics for the sensor supply at those two channel

groups.

Digital modules

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 105

Ensuring a wire break check is carried out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using

a resistor of 10 to 18 kΩ. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should

be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.

This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:

● If 2-wire BEROs are used

● If you do no configure the "Wire break" diagnostics

Setting the input delay for channel groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for

channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.

Note

The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be equal

to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly configured.

Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after

acknowledgement.

Optimum signal propagation delays

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:

● Both channel groups are configured with an input delay of 50 µs

● All the diagnoses (load voltage error, wire break) are deactivated

● Diagnostic interrupt is not enabled

See also

Parameters (Page 85)

Digital modules

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

106 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.8.3 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Effect of operating mode and supply voltage on the input values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of the CPU and

on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 4-9 Relationships of the analog input values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+ supply

voltage

CPU operating state Power supply L+ at digital module Input value of digital module

POWER ON RUN L+ present Process value

L+ missing 0 signal*

STOP L+ present Process value

L+ missing 0 signal*

POWER OFF - L+ present -

L+ missing -

* Depends on the parameter assignment

Reaction to failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by the EXTF

LED on the module. This information is also available on the module (entry in diagnostic data.)

Diagnostics interrupt triggering is based on parameter settings.

Short-circuit at the sensor supply Vs

The relevant Vs LED goes dark if a short-circuit is detected at the sensor supply Vs, irrespective

of parameter settings.

Effect of errors and parameter assignment on the input values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC are affected by certain errors and the parameter

assignment of the module. The following table lists the effects on the input values.

You can find more diagnostic messages in the Appendix "Diagnostic Data of the Signal

Modules".

Table 4-10 Relationships between the input values of errors and the configuration

Diagnostic message "Diagnostics"

parameter

"Reaction to Error"

parameter

Input value of digital module

No module parame‐

ters

Cannot be disa‐

bled

Not relevant 0 signal (all channels)

Front connector miss‐

ing

Substitute a value

(SV)

Configured substitute value

KLV Last read, valid value

Digital modules

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 107

Diagnostic message "Diagnostics"

parameter

"Reaction to Error"

parameter

Input value of digital module

Incorrect parameters

(module/channel)

Cannot be disa‐

bled

Not relevant 0 signal (module/all incorrectly config‐

ured channels)

Internal voltage failure Cannot be disa‐

bled

Substitute a value

(SV)

Configured substitute value

KLV Last read, valid value

Hardware interrupt

lost

Cannot be disa‐

bled

Not relevant Current process value

Wire break (for each

channel)

Disabled - 0 signal

Activated Substitute a value

(SV)

Configured substitute value

KLV Last read, valid value

Sensor supply miss‐

ing (also activated via

"No Load Voltage L+")

Disabled - 0 signal

Activated Substitute a value

(SV)

Configured substitute value

KLV Last read, valid value

No load voltage L+

(for each channel

group)

Disabled - 0 signal, if the contact is connected via

the sensor supply; process value for

the external sensor supply

Activated Substitute a value

(SV)

Configured substitute value

KLV Last read, valid value

Behavior when the input delay equals 0.1 ms or 0.05 ms and an error occurs

If you have set the following parameters:

● Input delay: 0.1 ms or 0.05 ms

● Reaction to error: "Keep Last Value" (KLV) or "Substitute Value" (SV)

● Set substitution value "1"

In the event of a fault on a channel that has a 1 signal, the following could occur:

● A 0 signal may be briefly output

● If configured, a hardware interrupt may be generated.

This occurs before the last valid value or substitute value "1" is output.

Digital modules

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

108 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V

(6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)

Features

The SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V has the following features:

● 16 inputs, isolated

● Nominal input voltage 120 VAC

● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 2)

Digital modules

4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 109

Wiring diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V

4 0

Byte 0

10 3

15 4

17 5

19 6

21 7

10N

11N

12N

13N

14N

15N

16N

Byte 1

Process Module

Adaptation

Data register and bus control

Figure 4-5 Wiring diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120

Specifications of SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight Approx. 650 g

Module-specific data

Digital modules

4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

110 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Number of inputs 16

Cable length

● Unshielded 600 m

● Shielded 1000 m

Voltages, currents, electrical potentials

Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 16

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and the backplane bus Yes

● Between channels

In groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between Minternal and the inputs 120 VAC

● Between inputs of different groups 250 VAC

Isolation test voltage 1500 VAC

Current consumption

● From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 100 mA

Power loss of the module Typ. 3.0 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Sensor selection data

Input voltage

● Nominal value 120 V

● For "1" signal 72 to 132 VAC

● For "0" signal 0 to 20 V

● Frequency band 47 to 63 Hz

Input current

● With "1" signal 6 to 20 mA

● With "0" signal 0 to 4 mA

Input delay

● At "0" to "1" transitions 2 to 15 ms

● With "1" to "0" 5 to 25 ms

Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131; type 2

Connection of 2-wire BEROs

● Permissible quiescent current

Supported

Max. 4 mA

Digital modules

4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 111

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

(6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

4.10.1 Features

Overview

SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V has the following features:

● 16 inputs, individually isolated

● Rated input voltage UC 24 V to UC 60 V

● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)

● Suitable as P-reading and M-reading input

● Group fault display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)

● Configurable diagnostics

● Configurable diagnostic interrupt

● Configurable hardware interrupts

● Configurable input delays

The status LEDs indicate the process status.

Digital modules

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

112 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

1 N

4 N

2 N

3 N

5 N

6 N

7 N

8 N

9 N

10 N

11 N

12 N

13 N

14 N

15 N

16 N

INTF

EXTF

Process Module

Front connector jumper

Adaptation

Data register and bus control

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Input

Diagnostics

Figure 4-6 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 600 g

Module-specific data

Digital modules

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 113

Number of inputs 16

Cable length

● Unshielded, input delay

0.5 ms

3 ms

10 / 20 ms

Maximum 100 m

Maximum 600 m

● Cable length, shielded 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

Number of inputs that can be enabled simultaneously 16

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels

in groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between different circuits 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ 1500 V AC

● Between channels 1500 V AC

Current consumption

● from backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 150 mA

Module power loss Typ. 8 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts

● Hardware interrupt Configurable

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

● Group fault display

for internal fault

for external fault

red LED (INTF)

red LED (EXTF)

● Channel fault display None

● Diagnostic information can be read out Possible

Monitoring for

● Wire break I > 0.7 mA

Substitute values can be connected No

Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

● Rated value UC 24 to 60 V

● For "1" signal 15 to 72 V DC

- 15 to -72 V DC

15 to 60 V AC

● For "0" signal DC - 6 to +6 V

AC 0 to 5 V

Frequency range DC/AC 47 to 63 Hz

Digital modules

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

114 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Input current

● For "1" signal Typ. 4 to 10 mA

Input characteristic as IEC 61131-2 1)

Connection of 2-wire BEROs

● Permissible quiescent current

Possible

Maximum 0.5 to 2 mA2)

Time, frequency

Internal processing time for

● hardware interrupt enable only Maximum 450 µs

● Hardware and diagnostic interrupt enable Maximum 2 ms

Input delay

● Configurable Yes

● Rated value 0.5 / 3 / 10 / 20 ms

Values included in cycle and response times.

Sensor circuit

Sensor resistor circuit for wire-break monitoring

● Rated voltage 24 V(15 to 35 V) 18 kΩ

● Rated voltage 48 V(30 to 60 V) 39 kΩ

● Rated voltage 60 V(50 to 72 V) 56 kΩ

1 IEC 61131-2 does not specify any data for UC modules. The values were, however, adjusted as far

as possible to IEC 61131-2.

2 Minimum quiescent current is required for wire break monitoring.

Digital modules

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 115

4.10.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Parameter assignment

You will find a description of the general configuration of digital modules in section 5.3.

Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

The following table contains an overview of the parameters you can set and their default

settings for the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V.

Table 4-11 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter type Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Hardware interrupt1Yes/no No

● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module

Diagnostics

● Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel

Hardware interrupt trigger

● Positive edge

● Negative edge

yes/no

- Dynamic Channel

Input delay30.5 ms (DC)

3 ms (DC)

20 ms (DC/AC)

3 ms (DC) Static Channel group

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in

ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

3 If you assign 0.5 ms , then you should not configure diagnostics because the internal processing time for diagnostic functions

can be > 0.5 ms.

Ensuring a wire break check is carried out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using

a resistor of 18 to 56 kΩ. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should

be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.

This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:

● If 2-wire BEROs are used

● If you do no configure the "Wire Break" diagnostics

Digital modules

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

116 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Setting the input delay for channel groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for

channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.

Note

The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be equal

to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly configured.

Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after

acknowledgement.

Optimum signal propagation delays

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:

● Both channel groups are configured with an input delay of 0.5 ms

● The diagnostics parameter is disabled

● The diagnostic interrupt parameter is disabled

Circuit as for active high or active low input

"1"

"0"

- L+

U_s

"1"

U_s

DI_x

"1"

"0"

L+

- L+

U_s

DI_xN SM 421 DI 16xUC 24/60 V

L+

U_s

Channel x of the

Active high Source input

Input threshold

Figure 4-7 Circuit as for active high or active low input

Digital modules

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 117

See also

Parameters (Page 85)

Digital modules

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

118 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7

421-1FH00-0AA0)

Features

The SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 is characterized by the following features:

● 16 inputs, isolated

● Nominal input voltage 120/230 VUC

● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches

Digital modules

4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 119

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

48 4 N

3 N

Process Module

Data register and bus control

Figure 4-8 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight Approx. 650 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs 16

Digital modules

4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

120 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Cable length

● Unshielded 600 m

● Shielded 1000 m

Voltages, currents, electrical potentials

Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 16 at 120 V

8 at 240 V

16 with fan subassembly

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and the backplane bus Yes

● Between channels

In groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● between Minternal and inputs 230 VAC

● Between inputs of different groups 500 VAC

Insulation resistance 4000 VAC

Current consumption

● From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 100 mA

Power loss of the module Typ. 3.5 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Sensor selection data

Input voltage

● Nominal value 120/230 VUC

● For "1" signal 79 to 264 V AC

80 to 264 V DC

● For "0" signal 0 to 48 V UC

● Frequency band 47 to 63 Hz

Input current

● With "1" signal 2 to 5 mA

● With "0" signal 0 to 1 mA

Input delay

● At "0" to "1" transitions 5 to 25 ms

● With "1" to "0" 5 to 25 ms

Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131-2; Type 1

Connection of 2-wire BEROs

● Permissible quiescent current

Supported

Max. 1 mA

Digital modules

4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 121

4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

(6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)

Properties

SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V has the following features:

● 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 4

● Rated input voltage UC 120/230 V

● Input characteristic in accordance with IEC 61131-2; type 2

● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)

The status LEDs indicate the process status.

Digital modules

4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

122 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Process Module

Data register and bus control

Figure 4-9 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 650 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs 16

Cable length

● unshielded 600 m

Digital modules

4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 123

● shielded 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated supply voltage of electronics L+ None

Number of inputs that can be enabled simultaneously 16

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels

in groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between Mintern and the inputs 250 V AC (reinforced insulation)

Test voltage:

4000 Vac (type test)

2400 AC (routine test)

● Between inputs of different groups 500 V AC (basic insulation)

Test voltage:

2400 Vac (routine test)

2300 Vac (type test)

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 80 mA

Module power loss Typ. 12 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Substitute values can be connected No

Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

● Rated value UC 120/230 V

● For "1" signal 74 to 264 V AC

80 to 264 V DC

-80 to -264 V DC

● For "0" signal 0 to 40 V AC

-40 to +40 V DC

Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz

Input current

● For "1" signal (120 V) Typ. 10 mA AC

Typ. 1.8 mA DC

● For "1" signal (230 V) Typ. 14 mA AC

Typ. 2 mA DC

● For "0" signal 0 to 6 mA AC

0 to 2 mA DC

Input delay

● For "0" to "1" Maximum 20 ms AC

Maximum 15 ms DC

Digital modules

4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

124 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● For "1" to "0" Maximum 30 ms AC

Maximum 25 ms DC

Input characteristic In accordance with IEC 61131-2; type 2

Connection of 2-wire BEROs

● Permissible quiescent current

Possible

Maximum 5 mA AC

Digital modules

4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 125

4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V

(6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)

Properties

SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V has the following features:

● 32 inputs, isolated

● Rated input voltage UC 120 V

● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches

Digital modules

4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

126 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V

Process Module

Data register and bus control

Figure 4-10 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V

Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 600 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs 32

Digital modules

4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 127

Cable length

● unshielded 600 m

● shielded 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

● Reverse polarity protection Yes

Number of inputs that can be enabled simultaneously 32

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels

in groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between Mintern and the inputs 120 V AC (reinforced insulation)

● Between inputs of different groups 250 V AC (basic insulation)

Insulation tested at 1500 V AC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 200 mA

Module power loss Typ. 6.5 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

● Rated value UC 120 V

● For "1" signal 79 to 132 V AC

80 to 132 V DC

● For "0" signal 0 to 20 V

● Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz

Input current

● For "1" signal 2 to 5 mA

● For "0" signal 0 to 1 mA

Input delay

● For "0" to "1" 5 to 25 ms

● For "1" to "0" 5 to 25 ms

Input characteristic In accordance with IEC 61131; type 1

Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible

● Permissible quiescent current Maximum 1 mA

Digital modules

4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

128 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A;

(6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)

Properties

SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A has the following features:

● 16 outputs, isolated in two groups of 8

● Output current 2 A

● Rated load voltage 24 V DC

The status LEDs indicate the system state even if the front connector is not connected.

Special points to note when commissioning

Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, order number 6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0,

differs from digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, order number

6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0, in the following feature:

To commission the module, it is not necessary to supply each group of 8 outputs with load

voltage (e.g. connection of 1L+ and 3L+). The module is fully functional even if only one group

is supplied with L+.

Note

Any switch-off of all outputs by switching off a single L+ supply implemented with the previous

module 6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0 is no longer possible.

Digital modules

4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 129

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

1L+

2L+

3L+

4L+

Process Module

Data memory and bus control

LED control

1st supply group

2nd supply group

3rd supply group

4th supply group

5th supply group

6th supply group

7th supply group

8th supply group

Front connector jumper

Figure 4-11 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

Technical specifications for SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 600 g

Module-specific data

Digital modules

4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

130 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Number of outputs 16

Cable length

● unshielded 600 m

● shielded 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated supply voltage of electronics L+ 24 V DC

Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC

Total current of outputs (1 to 2 outputs for each supply group)

● Up to 40°C Maximum 3 A

● Up to 60°C Maximum 2 A

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels

in groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between different circuits 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)

● Between outputs of different groups 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 160 mA

● Supply and load voltage L + (no load) Maximum 30 mA

Module power loss Typ. 5 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

● For "1" signal At least L+ (-0.5 V)

Output current

● For "1" signal

Rated value

Permitted range

5 mA to 2.4 A

● For "0" signal (residual current) Maximum 0.5 mA

Output delay (with resistive load)

● For "0" to "1" Maximum 1 ms

● For "1" to "0" Maximum 1 ms

Load resistance range 24 Ω to 4 kΩ

Lamp load Maximum 10 W

Connection of 2 outputs in parallel

● For redundant control of a load Possible (only outputs of the same group)

● For increasing the power Not possible

Digital modules

4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 131

Control of a digital input Possible

Switching frequency max.

● With resistive load 100 Hz

● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC

947-51, DC 13

0.2 Hz at 1 A

0.1 Hz at 2 A

● With lamp load Maximum 10 Hz

(Internal) limitation of inductive switch-off voltage to Maximum -30 V

Short-circuit protection for output

● Response threshold

Clocked electronically2

2.8 to 6 A

1 A supply group always consists of 2 neighboring channels, starting from channel 0. Channels 0 and

1, 2 and 3, ... 14 and 15 therefore each form a supply group.

2 Reclosing at full load is not guaranteed after a short circuit. Measures for dealing with this problem:

● Change the signal at the output or

● Interrupt the load voltage of the module

● Briefly disconnect the load from the output

4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

(6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

4.15.1 Features

Overview

The SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A has the following features:

● 16 outputs, each channel is fused; reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 8

● Output current 1,5 A

● Nominal load voltage 20 to 125 VDC

● Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)

● Programmable diagnostics

● Programmable diagnostic interrupt

● Programmable substitution value output

Digital modules

4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

132 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

4 0

Byte 0

6 1

8 2

10 3

13 L1+

15 4

17 5

19 6

21 7

- +

L1+

Byte 1

L2+

- +

L2+

Process Module

Data memory and bus control

LED control

Front connector jumper

Figure 4-12 Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight Approx. 800 g

Module-specific data

Number of outputs 16

Digital modules

4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 133

Cable length

● Unshielded Max. 600 m

● Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, electrical potentials

Nominal load voltage L1 20 to 138 V DC

● Reverse polarity protection Yes, with fuse

Total current of the outputs 1)

With fan subassembly

● Up to 40° C Max. 16 A 21 A

● Up to 60° C Max. 8 A 14 A

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and the backplane bus Yes

● Between channels Yes

In groups of 8

Permissible potential difference

● Between outputs of different groups 250 VAC

Isolation test voltage 1500 VAC

Current consumption

● From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 700 mA

● From load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 2 mA

Power loss of the module Typ. 10 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts

● Diagnostic interrupt Programmable

Diagnostic functions

● Group error display

for internal disruption

for external disruption

Configurable

Red LED (INTF)

Red LED (EXTF)

● Diagnostic information dump Yes

Injection of substitution values Yes, programmable

Actuator selection data

Output voltage

● With "1" signal Min. L+ (-1.0 V)

Output current

● With signal "1"

Rated value

Permissible range

Permissible peak current

1.5 A

10 mA to 1.5 A

Maximum 3 A (for 10 ms)

● With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 0,5 mA

Output delay (resistive load)

● At "0" to "1" transitions Max. 2 ms

● With "1" to "0" Max. 13 ms

Digital modules

4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

134 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Wiring two outputs in parallel

● For redundant load control Supported (only outputs of the same group)

● For performance increase Supported (only outputs of the same group)

Triggering a digital input Supported

Switching frequency

● With resistive load Max. 10 Hz

● With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1,

DC 13

Max. 0.5 Hz

Short-circuit protection of the output Electronically protected2)

● Threshold Typ. 04 to 5 A

Replacement fuses Fuse, 8 A/250 V, quick blow

1 To achieve maximum performance capability, distribute the high-current load between the two groups.

2 To reset a deactivated output, first set the output signal to 0 and then to 1.

If output signal 1 is written to a deactivated output and the short-circuit remains, additional interrupts

are generated (provided the diagnostic interrupt parameter was set).

Note

If the power supply is switched on by means of a mechanical contact, a voltage pulse may

occur at the outputs. The transient pulse lasts a maximum of 0.5 ms.

Changing fuses

WARNING

This can result in injury.

If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you could be injured

by an electric shock.

Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

Digital modules

4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 135

4.15.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Parameter assignment

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules

in the respective sections.

Parameters of the SM 421; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM

422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A in the following table.

Table 4-12 Parameters of the SM 421; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Parameters Value range Default setting2Parameter type Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module

Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value (SV)

Keep last value (KLV)

SV Dynamic Module

Diagnostics

● Load voltage L+ missing Yes/no No Static Channel group

● Short-circuit to M Yes/no No Static Channel

Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in

ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

Assigning the "No load voltage L+" diagnostics to channel groups

You can only set the "No load voltage L+" diagnostics separately for each channel group. In

other words, the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7, and the setting for channel 8

applies to inputs 8 to 15.

See also

Parameters (Page 85)

Digital modules

4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

136 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

(6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)

Properties

SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A has the following features:

● 32 outputs, isolated in a group of 32

● Power supply in groups of 8 channels.

● A supply group always consists of 8 neighboring channels, starting from channel 0.

Channels 0 to 7, 8 to 15, ... 16 to 23 and 24 to 31 each form a supply group.

● Each of these supply groups can be switched off separately by disconnecting L+; however,

you must remember the common ground connection.

● Output current 0.5 A

● Rated load voltage 24 V DC

The status LEDs indicate the system state even if the front connector is not connected.

Digital modules

4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 137

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422\; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

L+

3L+

2L+

4L+

1L+

2L+

3L+

4L+

Process Module

Data memory and bus control

LED control

Front connector jumper

Figure 4-13 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 600 g

Module-specific data

Digital modules

4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

138 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Number of outputs 32

Cable length

● unshielded 600 m

● shielded 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated supply voltage of electronics L+ 24 V DC

Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC

Total current of outputs (1 to 8 outputs for each supply group)

Up to 40°C

Up to 60°C

Maximum 4 A

Maximum 2 A

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels No

Permissible potential difference

● Between different circuits 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)

● Load voltage L+ to backplane bus 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 200 mA

● Supply and load voltage L + (no load) Maximum 30 mA

Module power loss Typ. 4 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

● For "1" signal At least L+ (-0.3 V)

Output current

● For "1" signal

Rated value

Permitted range

500 mA

5 mA to 600 mA

● For "0" signal (residual current) Maximum 0.3 mA

Output delay (with resistive load)

● For "0" to "1" Maximum 1 ms

● For "1" to "0" Maximum 1 ms

Load resistance range 48 Ω to 4 kΩ

Lamp load Maximum 5 W

Connection of 2 outputs in parallel

● For redundant control of a load Possible (only outputs of the same group)

● For increasing the power Possible (only outputs of the same group)

Control of a digital input Possible

Digital modules

4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 139

Switching frequency

● With resistive load Maximum 100 Hz

● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC

947-5-1, DC 13

Maximum 2 Hz at 0.3 A

Maximum 0.5 Hz at 0.5 A

● With lamp load Maximum 10 Hz

(Internal) limitation of inductive switch-off voltage to Typ. - 27 V

Short-circuit protection for output Clocked electronically

● Response threshold Typ. 0.7 to 1.5 A

1 A supply group always consists of 8 neighboring channels, starting from channel 0. Channels 0 to 7,

8 to 15, 16 to 23 and 24 to 32 therefore each form a supply group.

4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

(6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

4.17.1 Features

Overview

SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A has the following features:

● 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8

● Output current 0.5 A

● Rated load voltage 24 V DC

● Group fault display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)

● Configurable diagnostics

● Configurable diagnostic interrupt

● Configurable substitute value output

The status LEDs indicate the system state even if the front connector is not connected.

Digital modules

4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

140 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

L+

3L+

2L+

4L+

1L+

24 V

1L+

2L+

3L+

4L+

INTF

EXTF

4M 4M

4L+

3L+

2L+

Process Module

%DFNSODQHEXVFRQQHFWLRQ

1L+ monitoring

Control

Monitoring of internal voltage

Control

Diagnostics

Output status

Channel status

display

Front connector jumper

Figure 4-14 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 600 g

Digital modules

4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 141

Module-specific data

Number of outputs 32

Cable length

● unshielded 600 m

● shielded 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated supply voltage of electronics L+ 24 V DC

Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC

Total current of outputs (per group)

● Up to 40°C Maximum 4 A

● Up to 60°C Maximum 2 A

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels Yes

In groups of 8

Permissible potential difference

● Between different circuits 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ 500 V DC

● Between outputs of different groups 500 V DC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 200 mA

● Supply and load voltage L + (no load) 120 mA maximum

Module power loss Typ. 8 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

● Hardware interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions

● Load voltage monitoring Yes

● Group fault display

For internal fault Red LED (INTF)

For external fault Red LED (EXTF)

● Diagnostic information can be read out Yes

Monitoring for

● Short circuit > 1 A (typ.)

● Wire break < 0.15 mA

Substitute values can be connected Yes

Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

● For "1" signal At least L+ (-0.8 V)

Digital modules

4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

142 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Output current

● For "1" signal

Rated value

Permitted range

0.5 A

5 mA to 600 mA

● For "0" signal (residual current) Maximum 0.5 mA

Load resistance range 48 Ω to 4 kΩ

Connection of 2 outputs in parallel

● For redundant control of a load Possible (only outputs of the same group)

● For increasing the power Possible (only outputs of the same group)

Control of a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

● With resistive load Maximum 100 Hz

● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1,

DC 13

Maximum 2 Hz

● With lamp load Maximum 2 Hz

(Internal) limitation of inductive switch-off voltage to Typ. L + (- 45 V)

Short-circuit protection for output

● Response threshold

Clocked electronically

Typ. 0.75 to 1.5 A

Time, frequency

Internal processing time between backplane bus and input of the output driver 1)

Up to product version 03

● Irrespective of diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/

substitute value enable

Maximum 100 µs

Up to product version 04

● Without diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/substitute

value enable

Maximum 60 µs

● With diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/substitute value

enable

Maximum 100 µs

1 The switching time of the output driver (< 100 µs with resistive load) is added to the total runtime

Digital modules

4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 143

4.17.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Parameter assignment

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules

in the respective sections.

Parameters of SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the

SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A in the table below.

Table 4-13 Parameters of SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter type Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module

Reaction to CPU STOP Set substitution val‐

ue (SSV)

Keep last value

(KLV)

SV Dynamic Module

Diagnostics

● Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel

● No load voltage L+/sensor supply Yes/no No Channel group

● Short-circuit to M Yes/no No Channel

● Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No Channel

Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in

ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

See also

Parameters (Page 85)

Digital modules

4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

144 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.17.3 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Influence of the operating state and supply voltage on output values

The output values of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A depend on the operating mode of

the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 4-14 Relationships of the analog output values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+

supply voltage

CPU operating mode Power supply L+ at digital module Output value of digital module

POWER ON RUN L+ present CPU value

L+ missing 0 signal

STOP L+ present Substitution value/last value (de‐

fault = 0 signal)

L+ missing 0 signal

POWER OFF - L+ present 0 signal

L+ missing 0 signal

Reaction to failure of the supply voltage

The failure of the supply voltage of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A is always indicated

by the EXTF LED on the module. This information is also available on the module (entry in

diagnostic data.)

Diagnostics interrupt triggering is based on parameter settings.

See also

Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (Page 144)

4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

(6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

Properties

SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A has the following features:

● 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1

● Output current 5 A

● Rated load voltage 120/230 V AC

The status LEDs indicate the system state even if the front connector is not connected.

Digital modules

4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 145

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

F100

F200

F300

F400

F500

F600

F700

F800

INFT

EXTF

Process Module

Data register and bus control

LED control

Figure 4-15 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 800 g

Module-specific data

Digital modules

4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

146 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Number of outputs 8

Cable length

● unshielded 600 m

● shielded 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated load voltage L1

Permissible frequency range

79 to 264 V AC

47 to 63 Hz

Total current of outputs

With fan module

● Up to 40°C 24 A 24 A

● Up to 60°C max. 16 A 20 A

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels Yes

In groups of 1

Permissible potential difference

● Between outputs of different groups 500 V AC

Insulation strength 4000 V AC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 250 mA

● From load voltage L + (no load) Maximum 1.5 mA

Module power loss Typ. 16 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions Not configurable

● Group fault display

for internal fault

for external fault

red LED (INTF) fuse failure

red LED (EXTF) no load voltage

Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

● For "1" signal At maximum current at least L1

(-1.5 Vrms)

At minimum current at least L1

(-10.7 Vrms)

Output current

● For "1" signal

Rated value

Permitted range

Permitted surge current (per group)

5 A

10 mA to 5 A

Maximum 50 A per cycle

● For "0" signal (residual current) Maximum 3.5 mA

Output delay (with resistive load)

● For "0" to "1" Maximum 1 AC cycle

● For "1" to "0" Maximum 1 AC cycle

Digital modules

4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 147

Minimum load current 10 mA

Zero crossing Maximum 55 V

Size of motor starter Maximum 5 pursuant to NEMA

Lamp load Maximum 100 W

Connection of 2 outputs in parallel

● For redundant control of a load Possible (only outputs connected to

same load)

Control of a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

● With resistive load Maximum 10 Hz

● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC

947-5-1, DC 13

Maximum 0.5 Hz

● With lamp load 1 Hz

Short-circuit protection for output Fuse, 8 A, 250 V (per output)

● Current required for safety shutdown At least 100 A

● Response time Maximum 100 ms

Spare fuses Fuse, 8 A, quick-response

● Wickmann 194-1800-0

● Schurter SP001.1013

● Littelfuse 217.008

Changing the fuse

WARNING

Injury is possible.

If you change a fuse without first unplugging the front connector of the module, you may

receive an electric shock.

Always remove the front connector before changing a fuse.

Digital modules

4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

148 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

(6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

Properties

SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A has the following features:

● 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 4

● Output current 2 A

● Rated load voltage 120/230 V AC

The status LEDs indicate the system state even if the front connector is not connected.

Digital modules

4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 149

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Byte 0

Byte 1

INTF

EXTF

Process Module

Data memory and bus control

LED control

16 digital outputs (four to ground)

Front connector jumper

Figure 4-16 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 800 g

Module-specific data

Digital modules

4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

150 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Number of outputs 16

Cable length

● unshielded 600 m

● shielded 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated load voltage L1

Permissible frequency range

79 to 264 V AC

47 to 63 Hz

Total current of outputs (per group)

With fan module

● Up to 40°C max. 4 A 6 A

● Up to 60°C max. 2 A 5 A

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels

in groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between outputs of different groups 500 V AC (basic insulation)

Test voltage:

1350 Vac (routine test)

● Between Mintern and the outputs 250 V AC (reinforced insulation)

Test voltage:

4000 Vac (type test)

1350 AC (routine test)

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 400 mA

● From load voltage L + (no load) 1.5 mA

Module power loss Typ. 16 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions Not configurable

● Group fault display

for internal fault

for external fault

Red LED (INTF) fuse failure

Red LED (EXTF) no load voltage

Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

● For "1" signal At maximum current at least L1

(-1.3 Vrms)

At minimum current at least L1

(-18.1 Vrms)

Output current

● For "1" signal

Rated value

Permitted range

Permitted surge current (per group)

2 A

10 mA to 2 A

Maximum 50 A per cycle

Digital modules

4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 151

● For "0" signal (residual current) Maximum 2.6 mA

Output delay (with resistive load)

● For "0" to "1" Maximum 1 ms

● For "1" to "0" Maximum 1 AC cycle

Minimum load current 10 mA

Zero crossing No zero crossing switch

Size of motor starter Maximum 5 pursuant to NEMA

Lamp load Maximum 50 W

Connection of 2 outputs in parallel

● For redundant control of a load Possible (only outputs connected to same

load)

Control of a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

● With resistive load Maximum 10 Hz

● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC

947-5-1, AC 15

Maximum 0.5 Hz

● With lamp load 1 Hz

Short-circuit protection for output Fuse, 8 A, 250 V (per group)

● Current required for safety shutdown At least 100 A

● Response time Maximum 100 ms

Spare fuses Fuse, 8 A, quick-response

● Wickmann 194-1800-0

● Schurter SP001.1013

● Littelfuse 217.008

Changing the fuse

Note

Injury is possible.

If you change a fuse without first unplugging the front connector of the module, you may receive

an electric shock.

Always remove the front connector before changing a fuse.

Digital modules

4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

152 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

(6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

4.20.1 Features

Overview

The SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A has the following features:

● 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 1

● Output current 2 A

● Nominal load voltage 20 VAC to 120 VAC

● Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)

● Programmable diagnostics

● Programmable diagnostic interrupt

● Programmable substitution value output

Digital modules

4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 153

Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Byte 0

10 3

1L1

15 4

17 5

19 6

21 7

2L1

3L1

4L1

5L1

6L1

7L1

8L1

9L1

10L1

11L1

12L1

13L1

14L1

15L1

16L1

Byte 1

INTF

EXTF

Process Module

Data register and bus control

LED control

Figure 4-17 Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight Approx. 800 g

Module-specific data

Digital modules

4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

154 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Number of outputs 16

Cable length

● Unshielded Max. 600 m

● Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, electrical potentials

Nominal load voltage L+ 20 to 132 VAC

● Permitted frequency range 47 to 63 Hz

Total current of the outputs

With fan subassembly

● Up to 40° C Max. 16 A 24 A

● Up to 60° C Max. 7 A 16 A

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and the backplane bus Yes

● Between channels

In groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between M-internal and the outputs 120 VAC

● Between outputs of different groups 250 VAC

Isolation test voltage 1500 VDC

Current consumption

● From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 600 mA

● From load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 0 mA

Power loss of the module Typ. 20 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts

● Diagnostic interrupt Programmable

Diagnostic functions Programmable

● Group error display

for internal disruption

for external disruption

Red LED (INTF)

Red LED (EXTF)

● Diagnostic information dump Supported

Injection of substitution values Yes, programmable

Actuator selection data

Output voltage

● With "1" signal

L1 (-1.5 Vrms)

Output current

● With "1" signal

Nominal value

Permissible range

Permissible inrush current (per group)

2 A

100 mA

to 2 A

Maximum 20 A / 2 cycle

● With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 2.5 mA at 30 V

Max. 4.5 mA at 132 V

Output delay (resistive load)

Digital modules

4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 155

● At "0" to "1" transitions 1 ms

● With "1" to "0" 1 AC cycle

Zero transition Non-zero cross outputs

Size of the motor starter Max. size 5 to NEMA

Lamp load Max. 50 W

Wiring two outputs in parallel

● For redundant load control Supported (only outputs of the same group)

● For performance increase Not supported

Triggering a digital input Supported

Switching frequency

● With resistive load Max. 10 Hz

● With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1,

13 DC

Max. 0.5 Hz

● With lamp load Max. 1 Hz

Short-circuit protection of the output Fuse 8A/125 V 2AG (per output)

● Fuse-tripping current Min. 40 A

● Response time Typ. 33 ms

Replacement fuses

● Littelfuse

8 A fuse, fast-blowing

225.008

Changing fuses

WARNING

This can result in injury.

If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you could be injured

by an electric shock.

Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

Digital modules

4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

156 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

4.20.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Parameter assignment

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules

in the respective sections.

Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM

422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A in the following table.

Table 4-15 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter type Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module

Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value

(SV)

Keep last value

(KLV)

SV Dynamic Module

Diagnostics

● Fuse blown Yes/no No Static Channel

Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in

ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

See also

Parameters (Page 85)

Digital modules

4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 157

4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

(6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

Properties

SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A has the following features:

● 16 outputs, isolated in 8 groups of 2

● Output current 5 A

● Rated load voltage 230 V AC/125 V DC

The status LEDs indicate the system state even if the front connector is not connected.

Digital modules

4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

158 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

Process Module

Data memory and bus control

LED control

Front connector jumper

Figure 4-18 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

Technical specifications for SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 700 g

Module-specific data

Number of outputs 16

Digital modules

4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 159

Cable length

● unshielded Maximum 600 m

● shielded max. 1000 m

Voltage, current and potential

Total current of outputs (per group)

With fan module

● Up to 40°C Max. 10 A 10 A

● Up to 60°C Max. 5 A 10 A

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels

in groups of

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between outputs of different groups 500 V AC (basic insulation)

Test voltage:

1350 Vac (routine test)

● Between Mintern and outputs 250 V AC (reinforced insulation)

Test voltage:

4000 Vac (type test)

1350 AC (routine test)

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 1 A

Module power loss Typ. 4.5 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display

Interrupt

Diagnostic functions

Green LED per channel

None

Relay features

Relay response times

● Switch on Maximum 10 ms

typ. 5.5 ms

● Switch off Maximum 5 ms

typ. 3 ms

Debounce time typ. 0.5 ms

Data for selecting an actuator

Thermal continuous current Maximum 5 A

Minimum load current 10 mA

External fuse for relay outputs Fuse, 6 A, quick-response

Switching capacity and service life of contacts

● For resistive load

Digital modules

4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

160 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Voltage Current Number of op‐

erating cycles

(typ.)

30 V DC

60 V DC

125 V DC

230 V AC

5.0 A

1.2 A

0.2 A

5.0 A

0.18 million

0.1 million

0.18 million

● For an inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1DC 13 / AC 15

Voltage Current Number of op‐

erating cycles

(typ.)

30 V DC

(τ=7 ms max.)

5.0 A 0.1 million

230 V AC

(pf=0.4)

5.0 A 0.1 million

Size of motor starter Maximum 5 pursuant to NEMA

Lamp load Maximum 60 W

Contact wiring (internal) None

Connection of 2 outputs in parallel

● For redundant load control Possible (only outputs with same load volt‐

age)

● For increasing the power Not possible

Control of a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

● Mechanical Maximum 20 Hz

● With resistive load Maximum 10 Hz

● With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1,

DC 13/AC 15

Maximum 1 Hz

● With lamp load Maximum 1 Hz

Note

Use a suppressor circuit in environments with high humidity and where sparks might occur at

the relay contacts. This will increase the service life of the relay contacts.

To install the suppressor circuit, connect an RC element or a varistor in parallel with the relay

contacts or load. The dimensions depend on the size of the load.

Digital modules

4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 161

Digital modules

4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

162 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Analog modules 5

5.1 General information

Structure

This section contains the following topics:

1. Overview of the analog modules available

2. General information concerning all analog modules (such as parameter assignment and

diagnostics)

3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, features, wiring diagram and block

diagrams, specifications and special characteristics of the module):

a) for analog input modules

b) for analog output modules

STEP 7 blocks for analog functions

You can use blocks FC 105 and FC 106 to read and output analog values in

STEP 7

. You will

find the FCs in the standard library of

STEP 7

in the subdirectory called "S5-S7 Converting

Blocks" (for a description refer to the

STEP 7 Online Help

for the FCs).

Further information

The appendix describes the structure of the parameter records (data records 0 and 1) and

diagnostic information (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with

this configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the

STEP 7

user

program.

The structure of diagnostic information (data records 0 and 1) is described in the system data

section of the appendix. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate

the diagnostic data of the modules in the

STEP

user program.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 163

5.2 Module overview

Features of the analog modules

The tables below set out the main features of the analog modules. This summary is designed

to help you select the right module for your requirements.

Table 5-1 Analog input modules: Summary of features

Properties SM 431;

AI 8 x 13 bit

(-1KF00-)

SM 431;

AI 8 x 14 bit

(-1KF10-)

SM 431;

AI 8 x 14 bit

(-1KF20-)

SM 431;

AI 16 x 13 bit

(-0HH0-)

SM 431;

AI 16 x 16 bit

(-7QH00-)

SM 431;

AI 8 x RTD

16 bit

(-7KF10-)

SM 431;

AI 8 x 16 bit

(-7KF00-)

Number of inputs 8 AI for U/I

measure‐

ment

4 AI for re‐

sistance

measure‐

ment

8 AI for U/I

measure‐

ment

4 AI for re‐

sist. / temp.

measure‐

ment

8 AI for U/I

measure‐

ment

4 AI for re‐

sistance

measure‐

ment

16 inputs 16 AI for U/

I / temp.

measure‐

ment

8 AI for re‐

sistance

measure‐

ment

8 inputs 8 inputs

Resolution 13 bits 14 bits 14 bits 13 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits

Type of measure‐

ment

Voltage

Current

Resistance

Voltage

Current

Resistance

Tempera‐

ture

Voltage

Current

Resistance

Voltage

Current

Voltage

Current

Resistance

Tempera‐

ture

Resistance Voltage

Current

Tempera‐

ture

Measuring principle Integrating Integrating Instantane‐

ous value

encoding

Integrating Integrating Integrating Integrating

Configurable diag‐

nostics

No No No No Yes Yes Yes

Diagnostic interrupt No No No No Can be set Yes Yes

Threshold value

monitoring

No No No No Can be set Can be set Can be set

Hardware interrupt

upon limit violation

No No No No Can be set Can be set Can be set

Hardware interrupt at

end of cycle

No No No No Can be set No No

Voltage relationships Analog section isolated from the CPU Non-isola‐

ted

Analog section isolated from the CPU

Analog modules

5.2 Module overview

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

164 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Properties SM 431;

AI 8 x 13 bit

(-1KF00-)

SM 431;

AI 8 x 14 bit

(-1KF10-)

SM 431;

AI 8 x 14 bit

(-1KF20-)

SM 431;

AI 16 x 13 bit

(-0HH0-)

SM 431;

AI 16 x 16 bit

(-7QH00-)

SM 431;

AI 8 x RTD

16 bit

(-7KF10-)

SM 431;

AI 8 x 16 bit

(-7KF00-)

Maximum permitted

common mode volt‐

age

between

channels or

between ref‐

erence po‐

tential of

connected

sensors and

MANA:

30 V AC

between

channels or

between

channel and

central

grounding

point:

60 V DC /

30 V AC

(SELV)

between

channels or

between ref‐

erence po‐

tential of

connected

sensors and

MANA:

8 V AC

between

channels or

between ref‐

erence po‐

tential of

connected

sensors and

central

grounding

point:

2 V DC/AC

between

channels or

between

channel and

central

grounding

point:

60 V DC /

30 V AC

(SELV)

between

channel and

central

grounding

point:

60 V DC /

30 V AC

(SELV)

between

channels or

between

channel and

central

grounding

point:

60 V DC /

30 V AC

(SELV)

External power sup‐

ply required

No 24 V DC (on‐

ly with cur‐

rent, 2

DMU) 1

24 V DC (on‐

ly with cur‐

rent, 2

DMU) 1

24 V DC (on‐

ly with cur‐

rent, 2

DMU) 1

24 V DC (on‐

ly with cur‐

rent, 2

DMU) 1

No No

Special features - Suitable for

temp. meas‐

urement

Tempera‐

ture sensor

types config‐

urable

Lineariza‐

tion of sen‐

sor charac‐

teristic

curves

Measured

value

smoothing

can be set

Rapid A/D

change,

suitable for

highly dy‐

namic pro‐

cesses

Measured

value

smoothing

can be set

- Suitable for

temp. meas‐

urement

Tempera‐

ture sensor

types config‐

urable

Lineariza‐

tion of sen‐

sor charac‐

teristic

curves

Measured

value

smoothing

can be set

Resistance

thermome‐

ter configu‐

rable

Lineariza‐

tion of sen‐

sor charac‐

teristic

curves

Measured

value

smoothing

can be set

Internal

measure‐

ment resist‐

ance

Field con‐

nection with

internal ref‐

erence tem‐

perature (in‐

cluded in

module

scope of de‐

livery)

Measured

value

smoothing

can be set

1 2-DMU 2-wire transducer

Table 5-2 Analog output modules: Summary of features

Properties Module

SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

(-1HF00-)

Number of outputs 8 outputs

Resolution 13 bits

Type of output Channel by channel:

● Voltage

● Current

Configurable diagnostics No

Diagnostic interrupt No

Analog modules

5.2 Module overview

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 165

Properties Module

SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

(-1HF00-)

Substitute value output No

Voltage relationships Analog section isolated from:

● the CPU

● the load voltage

Maximum permitted common mode voltage Between channels or between channels and MANA

3 V DC

Special features -

Analog modules

5.2 Module overview

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

166 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.3 Steps for commissioning analog modules

Introduction

The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to

commission analog modules successfully.

The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or

later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other modules

in between times.

Steps

Table 5-3 Steps from the selection of analog modules to commissioning

Step Procedure

1 Select the module.

2 For certain analog input modules: Set the measuring type and range using the measuring

range module.

3 Mount the module in the rack.

4 Assign parameters to module.

5 Connect the measuring sensors or loads to the module.

6 Commission the configuration.

7 Analyze the configuration if commissioning failed.

5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.1 General information

Introduction

This chapter describes the analog values for all measuring or output ranges supported by the

analog modules.

Analog to digital conversion

Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.

Analog output modules convert digital output values to analog signals.

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 167

Representation of analog values at a resolution of 16 bits

The digitized analog value applies to input and output values of the same nominal range.

Analog values are output as real numbers in two's complement. The resulting assignment:

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit values 215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

Bit 15 can be interpreted as a sign

The sign of the analog value is always set at bit 15:

● "0" → +

● "1" → -

Resolution less than 16 bits

On analog modules with a resolution of less than 16 bits, the analog value is stored left-justified.

The unused least significant bit positions are padded with "0".

Example

The example below demonstrates the "0" padding of unused bit positions for low resolution

values.

Table 5-4 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and 13-bit analog value

Resolution Analog value

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

16-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

13-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

168 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.4.2 Representation of analog values of analog input channels

Introduction

The tables in this section contain the measured value representations for the various

measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules

with the corresponding measuring ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

The tables "Bipolar input ranges", "Unipolar input ranges", "Life-zero input ranges" contain the

binary representation of the measured values.

The binary representation of the measured values is always the same, so the analog

representation tables only compare the measuring ranges and the units.

Measured value resolution

The resolution of the analog values may differ, based on the analog module and module

parameters. At resolutions < 16 bits, all bits identified by "x" are set to "0".

Note

This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are

the result of a conversion in the analog module (see tables for analog representation of

resistance thermometer and for thermometer elements).

Table 5-5 Supported analog value resolutions

Resolution in bits Unit decimal Unit hexadecimal Analog value

High byte

Analog value

Low byte

9 128 80H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x x x

10 64 40H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x x

11 32 20H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x

12 16 10H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x

13 8 8H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x

14 4 4H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x

15 2 2H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x

16 1 1H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 169

5.4.3 Binary representation of input ranges

Input ranges

The input ranges shown in tables "Bipolar input ranges", "Unipolar input ranges", "Life-zero

input ranges" are defined in complementary 2-by-2 representation:

Table 5-6 Bipolar input ranges

Units Measured

value

in %

Data word Range

215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

32767 >118,515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range

27649 >100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range

- 1 - 0,003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

- 27648 - 100,000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

- 27649 ≤- 100,004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range

- 32512 - 117,593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

- 32768 ≤- 117,596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table 5-7 Unipolar input ranges

Units Measured

value in %

Data word Range

215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

32767 ≧118,515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range

27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal range

0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

- 1 - 0,003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range

- 4864 - 17,593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

-32768 ≤- 17,596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

170 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Table 5-8 Life-zero input ranges

Units Meas‐

ured val‐

ue in %

Data word Range

215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range

27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range

1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

- 1 -

0,003617

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range

- 4864 - 17,593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

In the event of a wire break, the module reports 7FFFH

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 171

5.4.4 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

Table 5-9 Representation of analog values in the ±1 V to ±10 V voltage measuring ranges

System Voltage measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 10 V ± 5 V ± 2.5 V ± 1 V

118,515 % 32767 7FFF 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V Overflow

117,593 % 32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V Overshoot range

27649 6C01

100,000 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5 V 2.5 V 1 V

Nominal range

75,000 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1.875 V 0.75 V

0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV 90.4 µV 36.17 µV

0 % 0 0 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

- 1 FFFF

- 75,00 % - 20736 AF00 - 7.5 V - 3.75 V - 1.875 V - 0.75 V

- 100,000 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V - 5 V - 2.5 V - 1 V

- 27649 93FF Undershoot range

- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 11.759 V - 5.879 V - 2.940 V - 1.176 V

- 117,596 % - 32513 80FF Underflow

- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 - 11.851 V - 5.926 V - 2.963 V - 1.185 V

Table 5-10 Representation of analog values in the ±25 to ±500 mV voltage measuring ranges

System Voltage measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 500 mV ± 250 mV ± 80 mV ± 50 mV ± 25 mV

118,515 % 32767 7FFF 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 94.8 mV 59.3 mV 29.6 mV Overflow

117,593 % 32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV 29.4 mV Overshoot

range

27649 6C01

100,000 % 27648 6C00 500 mV 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV 25 mV

Nominal range

75 % 20736 5100 375 mV 187.54 mV 60 mV 37.5 mV 18.75 mV

0,003617% 1 1 18.08 µV 9.04 µV 2.89 µV 1.81 µV 904.2 nV

0 % 0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV

- 1 FFFF

- 75,00 % - 20736 AF00 - 375 mV -187.54 mV - 60 mV - 37.5 mV - 18.75 mV

- 100,000% - 27648 9400 - 500 mV - 250 mV - 80 mV - 50 mV - 25 mV

- 27649 93FF Undershoot

range

- 117,593% - 32512 8100 - 587.9 mV - 294.0 mV - 94.1 mV - 58.8 mV - 29.4 mV

- 117,596% - 32513 80FF Underflow

- 118,519% - 32768 8000 - 592.6mV - 296.3 mV - 94.8mV - 59.3 mV - 29.6 mV

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

172 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Table 5-11 Representation of analog values in the voltage measuring ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V

System Voltage measuring range

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V

118,515 % 32767 7FFF 5.741 V 11.852 V Overflow

117,593 % 32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overshoot range

27649 6C01

100,000 % 27648 6C00 5 V 10 V

Nominal range

75 % 20736 5100 3.75 V 7.5 V

0,003617 % 1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 0 V + 361.7 µV

0 % 0 0 1 V 0 V

- 1 FFFF Undershoot range

- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 0.296 V Negative values are not

supported

Wire break

≤-17,596 % 32767 7FFF

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 173

5.4.5 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

Table 5-12 Representation of analog values in the ±3.2 mA to ±20 mA current measuring ranges

System Current measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 20 mA ± 10 mA ± 5 mA ± 3.2 mA

118,515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 5.93 mA 3.79 mA Overflow

117,593 % 32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 5.88 mA 3.76 mA Overshoot

range

27649 6C01

100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 10 mA 5 mA 3.2 mA

Nominal range

75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 7.5 mA 3.75 mA 2.4 mA

0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA 361.7 nA 180.8 nA 115.7 nA

0 % 0 0 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA

- 1 FFFF

- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 15 mA - 7.5 mA - 3.75 mA - 2.4 mA

- 100,000 % - 27648 9400 - 20 mA - 10 mA - 5 mA - 3.2 mA

- 27649 93FF Undershoot

range

- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 23.52 mA - 11.76 mA - 5.88 mA - 3.76 mA

- 117,596 % - 32513 80FF Underflow

- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 - 23.70 mA - 11.85 mA - 5.93 mA - 3.79 mA

Table 5-13 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA

System Current measuring range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA

118,515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA Overflow

117,593 % 32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overshoot range

27649 6C01

Nominal range

100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA

75 % 20736 5100 15 mA

0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA

0 % 0 0 0 mA

- 1 FFFF Undershoot range

- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 - 3.52 mA

- 4865 ECFF Underflow

≤ - 17,596 % - 32768 8000

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

174 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Table 5-14 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA

System Current measuring range

Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA

118,515 % 32767 7FFF 22.96 mA Overflow

117,593 % 32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 22.81 mA Overshoot range

27649 6C01

Nominal range

100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA

75 % 20736 5100 16 mA

0,003617 % 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA

0 % 0 0 4 mA

- 1 FFFF Undershoot range

- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 1.185 mA

Wire break

≤ - 17,596 % 32767 7FFF

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 175

5.4.6 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors

Table 5-15 Analog value representation for resistance-type sensors from 48 Ω to 6 kΩ

System Resistive transducer range

Dec. Hex. 48 Ω 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 6 kΩ

118,515 % 32767 7FFF 56.89 Ω 177.77 Ω 355.54 Ω 711.09 Ω 7.11 kΩ Overflow

117,593 % 32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 56.44 Ω 176.38 Ω 352.77 Ω 705.53 Ω 7.06 kΩ Overshoot

range

27649 6C01

100,000 % 27648 6C00 48 Ω 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 6 kΩ Nominal range

75 % 20736 5100 36 Ω 112.5 Ω 225 Ω 450 Ω 4.5 kΩ

0,003617 % 1 1 1.74 mΩ 5.43 mΩ 10.85 mΩ 21.70 mΩ 217.0 mΩ

0 % 0 0 0 Ω 0 Ω 0 Ω 0 Ω 0 Ω

(negative values are physically impossible) Undershoot

range

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

176 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.4.7 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer

Representation of the analog values of Pt x00 standard resistance thermometers

Table 5-16 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers

Pt x00

Standard in

° C

(1 digit

= 0.1° C)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Pt x00

Standard in

° F

(1 digit

= 0.1 ° F)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Pt x00

Standard in

(1 digit

= 0.1 K)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 1000,0 32767 7FFFH> 1832,0 32767 7FFFH> 1273,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1000,0

850,1

10000

8501

2710H

2135H

1832,0

1562,1

18320

15621

4790H

3D05H

1273,2

1123,3

12732

11233

31BCH

2BE1H

Overshoot

range

850,0

-200,0

8500

-2000

2134H

F830H

1562,0

-328,0

15620

-3280

3D04H

F330H

1123,2

73,2

11232

732

2BE0H

2DCH

Nominal range

-200,1

-243,0

-2001

-2430

F82FH

F682H

-328,1

-405,4

-3281

-4054

F32FH

F02AH

73,1

30,2

731

302

2DBH

12EH

Undershoot

range

< -243,0 -32768 8000H< -405,4 -32768 8000H< 30,2 32768 8000HUnderflow

Representation of analog values for Pt x00 climatic resistance thermometers

Table 5-17 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers

Pt x00 Cli‐

matic in °C

(1 digit =

0.01° C)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Pt x00 Cli‐

matic in °F

(1 digit =

0.01 °F)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 155,00 32767 7FFFH> 311,00 32767 7FFFHOverflow

155,00

130,01

15500

13001

3C8CH

32C9H

311,00

266,01

31100

26601

797CH

67E9H

Overshoot range

130,00

-120,00

13000

-12000

32C8H

D120H

266,00

-184,00

26600

-18400

67E8H

B820H

Nominal range

-120,01

-145,00

-12001

-14500

D11FH

C75CH

-184,01

-229,00

-18401

-22900

B81FH

A68CH

Undershoot range

< - 145,00 -32768 8000H< -229,00 -32768 8000HUnderflow

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 177

Representation of analog values for Ni x00 standard resistance thermometers

Table 5-18 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000

Ni x00

Standard in

°C (1 digit =

0.1° C)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Ni x00

Standard in

°F (1 digit =

0.1 °F)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Ni x00

standard in

K (1 digit =

0.1 K)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 295,0 32767 7FFFH> 563,0 32767 7FFFH> 568,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

295,0 2950 B86H563,0 5630 15FEH568,2 5682 1632HOvershoot

range

: : : : : : : : :

250,1 2501 9C5H482,1 4821 12D5H523,3 5233 1471H

250,0 2500 9C4H482,0 4820 12D4H523,2 5232 1470HNominal range

: : : : : : : : :

-60,0 -600 FDA8H-76,0 -760 FD08H213,2 2132 854H

-60,1 -601 FDA7H -76,1 -761 FD07H 213,1 2131 853HUndershoot

range

: : : : : : : : :

-105,0 -1050 FBE6H-157,0 -1570 F9DEH168,2 1682 692H

< -105,0 -32768 8000H< -157,0 -32768 8000H< 168,2 32768 8000HUnderflow

Representation of analog values for Ni x00 climatic resistance thermometers

Table 5-19 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000

Ni x00 Cli‐

matic in °C

(1 digit =

0.01° C)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Ni x00 Cli‐

matic in °F

(1 digit =

0.01 °F)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 295,00 32767 7FFFH> 325,11 32767 7FFFHOverflow

295,00

250,01

29500

25001

733CH

61A9H

327,66

280,01

32766

28001

7FFEH

6D61H

Overshoot range

250,00

-60,00

25000

-6000

61A8H

E890H

280,00

-76,00

28000

-7600

6D60H

E250H

Nominal range

-60,01

-105,00

-6001

-10500

E88FH

D6FCH

-76,01

-157,00

-7601

-15700

E24FH

C2ACH

Undershoot range

< -105,00 -32768 8000H< -157,00 -32768 8000HUnderflow

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

178 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Representation of analog values for Cu 10 standard resistance thermometers

Table 5-20 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 standard resistance thermometers

Cu 10

Standard in

°C (1 digit =

0.01° C)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Cu 10

Standard in

°F (1 digit =

0.01° F)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Cu 10

Standard in

K (1 digit =

0.01 K)

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 312,0 32767 7FFFH> 593,6 32767 7FFFH> 585,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

312,0

260,1

3120

2601

C30H

A29H

593,6

500,1

5936

5001

1730H

12D5H

585,2

533,3

5852

5333

16DCH

14D5H

Overshoot

range

260,0

-200,0

2600

-2000

A28H

F830H

500,0

-328,0

5000

-3280

1389H

F330H

533,2

73,2

5332

732

14D4H

2DCH

Nominal range

-200,1

-240,0

-2001

-2400

F82FH

F6A0H

-328,1

-400,0

-3281

-4000

F32FH

F060H

73,1

33,2

731

332

2DBH

14CH

Undershoot

range

< -240,0 -32768 8000H< -400,0 -32768 8000H< 33,2 32768 8000HUnderflow

Representation of analog values for Cu 10 climatic resistance thermometers

Table 5-21 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 climatic resistance thermometers

Cu 10 Cli‐

matic in °C

(1 digit =

0.01° C)

Unit deci‐

mal

Unit hexadeci‐

mal

Cu 10 Climatic in

°F (1 digit = 0.01°

Unit decimal Unit hexadecimal Range

> 180,00 32767 7FFFH>325,11 32767 7FFFHOverflow

180,00

150,01

18000

15001

4650H

3A99H

327,66

280,01

32766

28001

7FFEH

6D61H

Overshoot range

150,00

-50,00

15000

-5000

3A98H

EC78H

280,00

-58,00

28000

-5800

6D60H

E958H

Nominal range

-50,01

-60,00

-5001

-6000

EC77H

E890H

-58,01

-76,00

-5801

-7600

E957H

E250H

Undershoot range

< -60,00 -32768 8000H< -76,00 -32768 8000HUnderflow

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 179

5.4.8 Representation of analog values for thermocouples

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type B

Table 5-22 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type B

Type B in °C Unit dec‐

imal

Unit dec‐

imal

Type B in °F Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type B in K Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 2070,0 32767 7FFFH>3276,6 3276,6 7FFFH> 2343,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

2070,0

1821,0

20700

18210

50DCH

4722H

3276,6

2786,6

32766

27866

7FFEH

6CDAH

2343,2

2094,2

23432

20942

5B88H

51CEH

Overshoot

range

1820,0

0,0

18200

4718H

0000H

2786,5

-32,0

27865

-320

6CD9H

FEC0H

2093,2

273,2

20932

2732

51C4H

0AACH

Nominal range

-120,0

-1200

FB50H

-184,0

-1840

F8D0H

153,2

1532

05FCH

Undershoot

range

< -120,0 -32768 8000H< -184,0 -32768 8000H< 153,2 32768 8000HUnderflow

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type E

Table 5-23 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type E

Type E in °C Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adecimal

Type E in °F Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type E in K Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 1200,0 32767 7FFFH> 2192,0 32767 7FFFH> 1473,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1200,0

1000,1

12000

10001

2EE0H

2711H

2192,0

1833,8

21920

18338

55A0H

47A2H

1473,2

1274,2

14732

12742

398CH

31C6H

Overshoot

range

1000,0

-270,0

10000

-2700

2710H

F574H

1832,0

-454,0

18320

-4540

4790H

EE44H

1273,2

12732

31BCH

0000H

Nominal range

< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H< -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H< 0 <0 <0000HUnderflow

Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong

type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...

... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

180 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type J

Table 5-24 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type J

Type J in °C Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adecimal

Type J in °F Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type J in K Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 1450,0 32767 7FFFH> 2642,0 32767 7FFFH> 1723,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1450,0

1201,0

14500

12010

38A4H

2EEAH

2642,0

2193,8

26420

21938

6734H

55B2H

1723,2

1474,2

17232

14742

4350H

3996H

Overshoot

range

1200,0

-210,0

12000

-2100

2EE0H

F7CCH

2192,0

-346,0

21920

-3460

55A0H

F27CH

1473,2

63,2

14732

632

398CH

0278H

Nominal range

< -210,0 < -2100 <F7CCH< -346,0 < -3460 <F27CH< 63,2 < 632 < 0278HUnderflow

Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong

type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...

... F31CH, and to output 8000H. ... EA0CH, and to output 8000H. ... FDC8H, and to output 8000H.

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type K

Table 5-25 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type K

Type K in °C Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adecimal

Type K in °F Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type K in K Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 1622,0 32767 7FFFH> 2951,6 32767 7FFFH> 1895,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1622,0

1373,0

16220

13730

3F5CH

35A2H

2951,6

2503,4

29516

25034

734CH

61CAH

1895,2

1646,2

18952

16462

4A08H

404EH

Overshoot

range

1372,0

-270,0

13720

-2700

3598H

F574H

2501,6

-454,0

25016

-4540

61B8H

EE44H

1645,2

16452

4044H

0000H

Nominal range

< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H< -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H< 0 < 0 < 0000HUnderflow

Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong

type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...

... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 181

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type L

Table 5-26 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type L

Type L in °C Unit deci‐

mal

Unit hex‐

adecimal

Type L in °F Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type L in K Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adecimal

Range

> 1150,0 32767 7FFFH> 2102,0 32767 7FFFH> 1423,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1150,0

901,0

11500

9010

2CECH

2332H

2102,0

1653,8

21020

16538

521CH

409AH

1423,2

1174,2

14232

11742

3798H

2DDEH

Overshoot

range

900,0

-200,0

9000

-2000

2328H

F830H

1652,0

-328,0

16520

-3280

4088H

F330H

1173,2

73,2

11732

732

2DD4H

02DCH

Nominal

range

< -200,0 < -2000 < F830H< -328,0 < -3280 < F330H< 73,2 < 732 <02DCHUnderflow

Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong

type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...

... F380H, and to output 8000H. ... EAC0H, and to output 8000H. ... FE2CH, and to output 8000H.

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type N

Table 5-27 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type N

Type N in °C Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adecimal

Type N in °F Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type N in K Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 1550,0 32767 7FFFH> 2822,0 32767 7FFFH> 1823,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1550,0

1300,1

15500

13001

3C8CH

32C9H

2822,0

2373,8

28220

23738

6E3CH

5CBAH

1823,2

1574,2

18232

15742

4738H

3D7EH

Overshoot

range

1300,0

-270,0

13000

-2700

32C8H

F574H

2372,0

-454,0

23720

-4540

5CA8H

EE44H

1573,2

15732

3D74H

0000H

Nominal range

< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H< -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H< 0 < 0 < 0000HUnderflow

Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong

type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...

... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

182 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Representation of analog values for thermocouple types R, S

Table 5-28 Representation of analog values for thermocouple types R, S

Type R, S in

°C

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type R, S in

°F

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Types R, S

in K

Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 2019,0 32767 7FFFH> 3276,6 32767 7FFFH> 2292,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

2019,0

1770,0

20190

17770

4EDEH

4524H

3276,6

3218,0

32766

32180

7FFEH

7DB4H

2292,2

2043,2

22922

20432

598AH

4FD0H

Overshoot

range

1769,0

-50,0

17690

-500

451AH

FE0CH

3216,2

-58,0

32162

-580

7DA2H

FDBCH

2042,2

223,2

20422

2232

4FC6H

08B8H

Nominal range

-51,0

-170,0

-510

-1700

FE02H

F95CH

-59,8

-274,0

-598

-2740

FDAAH

F54CH

222,2

103,2

2222

1032

08AEH

0408H

Undershoot

range

< -170,0 -32768 8000H< -274,0 -32768 8000H< 103-2 < 1032 8000HUnderflow

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type T

Table 5-29 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type T

Type T in °C Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type T in °F Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type T in K Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Range

> 540,0 32767 7FFFH> 1004,0 32767 7FFFH> 813,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

540,0

401,0

5400

4010

1518H

0FAAH

1004,0 10040 2738H813,2 8132 1FC4HOvershoot

range

400,0

-270,0

4000

-2700

0FA0H

F574H

752,0

-454,0

7520

-4540

1D60H

EE44H

673,2

3,2

6732

1AACH

0020H

Nominal range

< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H< -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H< 3,2 < 32 < 0020HUnderflow

Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong

type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...

... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 183

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type U

Table 5-30 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type U

Type U in °C Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type U in °F Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adeci‐

mal

Type U in K Unit dec‐

imal

Unit hex‐

adecimal

Range

> 850,0 32767 7FFFH> 1562,0 32767 7FFFH> 1123,2 32767 7FFFHOverflow

850,0

601,0

8500

6010

2134H

177AH

1562,0

1113,8

15620

11138

2738,0H

2B82H

1123,2

874,2

11232

8742

2BE0H

2226H

Overshoot

range

600,0

-200,0

6000

-2000

1770H

F830H

1112,0

-328,0

11120

-3280

2B70H

F330H

873,2

73,2

8732

732

221CH

02DCH

Nominal range

< -200,0 < -2000 < F830H< -328,0 < -3280 < F330H< 73,2 < 732 <02DCHUnderflow

Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong

type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...

... F380H, and to output 8000H. ... EAC0H, and to output 8000H. ... FE2CH, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

184 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.4.9 Representation of analog values for analog output channels

Introduction

The tables in this section contain the analog value representation for output channels of the

analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding

output ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

The tables "Bipolar output ranges", "Unipolar output ranges", "Life-zero output ranges" contain

the binary representation of the measured values.

Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting with the table

at "Representation of Analog Values in the Voltage Output Range ± 10 V" these tables only

contain the output ranges and the units.

Binary representation of output ranges

The input ranges shown in tables "Bipolar output ranges", "Unipolar output ranges", "Life-zero

output ranges" are defined in complementary 2-by-2 representation:

Table 5-31 Bipolar output ranges

Units Output

value in

Data word Range

215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

≧3251

0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow

32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot

range

27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal

range

1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

- 1 -0,00361

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

27648

-100,000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

27649

≤100,004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Undershoot

range

32512

-117,593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

≤

32513

0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 185

Table 5-32 Unipolar output ranges

Units Output

value in

Data word Range

215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

≧3251

0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow

32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot

range

27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal

range

1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

- 1 0,000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to

the low limit

of the nomi‐

nal range, 0

V or 0 mA

- 32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

≤

32513

0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow

Table 5-33 Life-zero input ranges

Units Output

value in

Data word Range

215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

≧3251

0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow

32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot

range

27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal

range

1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

- 1 -0,00361

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot

range

- 6912 -25,000 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

- 6913

-25,000

1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to

overshoot

range lower

limit 0 V and

0 mA

- 32512

≤-3251

- 25 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

186 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges

Table 5-34 Representation of analog values in the ±10 V output range

System Voltage output range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V

118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, off power

32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overshoot range

27649 6C01

100 % 27648 6C00 10 V

75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V Nominal range

0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV

0 % 0 0 0 V

- 1 FFFF - 361.7 µV

- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 7.5 V

- 100 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V

- 27649 93FF Undershoot range

- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 11.76 V

- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state

- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V

Table 5-35 Representation of analog values in the 0 V to 10 V and 1 V to 5 V output ranges

System Voltage output range

Dec. Hex.0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V

118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 0.00 V Overflow, off power

32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.70 V Overshoot range

27649 6C01

100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5 V

Nominal range

75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V

0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV 1V+144.7µV

0 % 0 0 0 V 1 V

- 1 FFFF Undershoot range

- 25 % - 6912 E500 0 V

- 6913 E4FF Not possible. The output value is limi‐

ted to 0 V.

- 117,593 % - 32512 8100

- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state

- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 187

Representation of analog values in the current output ranges

Table 5-36 Representation of analog values in the ±20 mA output range

System Current output range

Dec. Hex. ± 20 mA

118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA Overflow, off power

32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overshoot range

27649 6C01

100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA

75 % 20736 5100 15 mA Nominal range

0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 mA

0 % 0 0 0 mA

- 1 FFFF - 723.4 mA

- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 15 mA

- 100 % - 27648 9400 - 20 mA

- 27649 93FF Undershoot range

- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 23.52 mA

- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state

- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 mA

Table 5-37 Representation of analog values in the 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA output ranges

System Current output range

Dec. Hex.0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off power

32512 7F00

117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overshoot range

27649 6C01

100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range

75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 15 mA

0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 mA 4mA+578.7 nA

0 % 0 0 0 mA 4 mA

- 1 FFFF Undershoot range

- 25 % - 6912 E500 0 mA

- 6913 E4FF Not possible. Output value

limited to 0 mA.

- 117,593 % - 32512 8100

- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state

- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA

Analog modules

5.4 Representation of analog values

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

188 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels

Two procedures

There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input

channels of analog modules:

● With a measuring range module and STEP 7

● By hardwiring the analog input channel, and programming in STEP 7

The method to use for the various analog modules is module-specific, and described in detail

in the relevant module sections.

The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the module in STEP

7 is described in the respective sections.

This section describes how to set the measuring method and range using measuring range

modules.

Setting the measuring method and range using measuring range modules

Analog modules are supplied with measuring range modules as required.

Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method and range.

Note

Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input module.

Before you install the analog input module, check the measuring method and range of the

measuring range modules, and adapt these as required.

Optional settings of the measuring range modules

Optional settings of the measuring range modules are: "A", "B", "C" and "D".

For detailed information on specific measuring method and range settings, refer to the relevant

module section.

The settings for the various measuring methods and ranges are also shown on the printed

label of the analog module.

Analog modules

5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 189

Replugging measuring range modules

To reconnect a measuring range module:

Graphic Description

Use a screwdriver to lever the measur‐

ing range module out of the analog in‐

put module.

Analog modules

5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

190 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Graphic Description

Insert the measuring range module in‐

to the required slot (1) of the analog

input module.

The measuring range selected is the

one that points to the marker point on

module (2).

Continue with the insertion of all other

measuring range modules.

Then mount the module.

CAUTION

Danger of damage to equipment.

Faulty measuring range module settings may lead to the destruction of the module.

Always make sure the measuring range module is in the correct position before you connect

any sensors to the module.

Analog modules

5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 191

5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

5.6.1 Introduction

Overview

This section describes:

● How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the CPU and

the supply voltage of the analog module

● The reaction of analog modules, based on the actual analog value within the relevant value

range

● The effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

● The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and output value,

as illustrated by an example

Analog modules

5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

192 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.6.2 Effect of supply voltage and operating mode

Overview

The IO values of analog modules are determined by the CPU operating state and the module's

supply voltage.

Table 5-38 Dependencies of the analog IO values on the CPU's operating State and on the L+ supply voltage

CPU operating state Supply voltage L+ at the an‐

alog module

Output value of the

analog output module

Input value of the

analog input module*

POWER

RUN L+ present CPU values Measured value

Until the first conversion...

● after power-up has been

completed, a signal of 0 mA or

0 V is output.

● after programming is

successfully completed, it

outputs the previous value.

7FFFH, until the first conversion

after POWER ON is completed,

or when the module has been

programmed.

L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V

POWER

STOP L+ present Substitution value / last value

(default: 0 mA / 0 V)

Measured value

7FFFH, until the first conversion

after POWER ON is completed,

or when the module has been

programmed.

L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V

POWER

OFF

- L+ present 0 mA / 0 V -

L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V -

* L+ only required with 2-wire sensors

Behavior on failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the load power supply L+ of the diagnostics-capable analog module is indicated in

the case of configured 2-wire sensors by the EXTF LED on the module. This information is

also available on the module (in the diagnostic buffer data.)

Diagnostics interrupt triggering is based on parameter settings.

See also

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Analog modules

5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 193

5.6.3 Effect of the value range for analog values

Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

Errors may lead to an entry in the diagnostics buffer and trigger a diagnostic interrupt at analog

modules with diagnostics function and corresponding parameter settings. You will find the

errors that might be involved in the section "Diagnostics of the analog modules".

Effect of value range on the analog input module

The reaction of analog modules is determined by the actual input values within the value range.

Table 5-39 Reaction of analog input modules as a function of the actual analog value within the value range

Measured value within Input value LED (EXTF) Diagnostics Interrupt

Nominal range Measured value - - -

Overshoot/undershoot range Measured value - - -

Overflow 7FFFH lit1Entry is made1Diagnostic interrupt1

Underflow 8000H lit1Entry is made1Diagnostic interrupt1

Outside of the programmed limit Measured value - - Hardware interrupt1

1 Only for modules with diagnostics function and depending on parameter settings

Effect of value range on the analog output module

The reaction of analog modules is determined by the actual output values within the value

range.

Table 5-40 Behavior of the analog output modules as a function of the position of the analog value within the value range

Output value within Output value LED (EXTF) Diagnostics Interrupt

Nominal range CPU value - - -

Overshoot/undershoot range CPU value - - -

Overflow 0 signal - - -

Underflow 0 signal - - -

Analog modules

5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

194 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.6.4 Effect of operational limit and basic error limit

Operational limit

The operational limit represents the measuring error, or output error, of an analog module

across the entire permissible temperature range of the module, based on the module's nominal

range.

Basic error limit

The basic error limit represents the operational limit at 25° C, based on the module's nominal

range.

Note

The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the specifications of the modules

always refer to the highest possible input and output value in the nominal range of the module.

In the ± 10 V measurement range this would be the 10 V.

Example of determination of the output error of a module

An analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit is being used for voltage output. An output

range of "±10 V" is set. The module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30° C, i.e. the

operational limit applies. The specifications of the module state:

● Operational limit for voltage output: ±0,5 %

Hence, an output error of ±0.05 V (±0.5 % of 10 V) across the nominal range of the module

must be expected.

This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95 V to 1.05

V is output by the module. The relative error is ±5 % in this case.

For the example, the figure below shows how the relative error decreases as the output value

approaches the end of the 10V range.

( ±0,5 %*)

1 V0 V

( ±0,625 %)

( ±5 %)

8 V 10 V

-1 V

±0,05 V

Figure 5-1 Example of the relative error of an analog output module

* Operational limit

(1) Output value

Analog modules

5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 195

5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules

Conversion time of analog input channels

The conversion time is the total of the basic conversion time plus additional processing times

of the module for:

● Resistance measurement

● Wire break monitoring

The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the analog input

channel (integrating method, actual value conversion.)

The integration time of integrating conversions has a direct influence on conversion times. The

integration time depends on the interference frequency suppression you set in STEP 7.

For information on basic conversion times and additional processing times of the various

analog modules, refer to the specifications of the relevant module.

Cycle time of analog input channels

The analog/digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to memory or

to the backplane bus take place sequentially. In other words, the analog input channels are

converted one after the other. The scan time - in other words, the time elapsing until an analog

input value is again converted - is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input

channels of the analog input module.

The figure below provides an overview of the cycle time elements for an n-channel analog

module.

Conversion time, channel 1

Conversion time, channel 2

Conversion time, channel 3

Cycle time

Figure 5-2 Scan time of an analog input or output module

Basic execution time of the analog input channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.

Setting of the smoothing of analog values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input modules.

Analog modules

5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

196 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Use of smoothing

Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing.

It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured values, for

example, with temperature measurements.

Smoothing principle

The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished by the

module calculating mean values, derived from a defined number of converted (digitized) analog

values.

The user assigns parameters to smoothing with a maximum of four levels (none, weak,

medium, strong). The grade determines the number of analog signals used for averaging.

A higher smoothing provides a more reliable analog value, and prolongs the time it takes to

apply a smoothed analog signal following a step response (see the example below.)

Example

The figure below shows the number of cycles a module requires to apply an almost 100%

analog value after a step response, based on the smoothing function settings. The figure

applies to all signal changes at the analog input.

100

50 100 150 200

Step response for any analog input signalSignal variation in

percent

Smoothing Low:

average:

high:

Module cycles

Figure 5-3 Example of the effect of smoothing on step responses

Further information on smoothing

For information showing whether a specific module supports smoothing functions, and special

features to observe, refer to the section dealing with the analog input module.

Analog modules

5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 197

Conversion time of the analog output channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels includes the transfer of digitized output

values from internal memory, and their digital-to-analog conversion.

Cycle time of analog output channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially - that is the analog output channels

are converted one after the other.

The cycle time - that is the time expiring until an analog output value is converted again, is

equivalent to the accumulated conversion times of all activated analog output channels. Refer

to the figure "Cycle Time of an Analog Input/Output Channel".

Basic execution time of the analog output channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.

Note

You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan time in

STEP 7.

Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules

t1t2t3

Figure 5-4 Settling and response times of the analog output channels

tA = Response time

tS = Setting time

t3 = Specified output value reached

t2 = Output value transferred and converted

tC = Cycle time, corresponds to n x conversion time (n = activated channels)

t1 = New output value is present

Settling time

The settling time (t2 to t3) - that is the time from the application of the converted value until the

specified value is obtained at the analog output - depends on the load. We therefore distinguish

between resistive, capacitive and inductive load.

For information on settling times as a function of load at the various analog output modules,

refer to the specifications of the relevant module.

Analog modules

5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

198 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Response time

The response time (t1 to t3) - that is the time from the application of the digital output values in

internal memory until the specified value is obtained at the analog output - is, in the most

unfavorable case, the sum of the cycle time and the settling time.

The worst case scenario is given, when the analog channel has been converted immediately

before a new output value is transferred, and is not converted again until all other channels

have been converted (cycle time.)

See also

Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (Page 235)

5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

5.8.1 General information about parameter assignment

Introduction

The characteristics of analog modules may differ. The characteristics of the modules can be

defined by assigning parameters.

Tools for parameter assignment

You program analog modules in

STEP 7

After you have defined all parameters, download these from your programming device to the

CPU. The CPU transfers the parameters to the relevant analog modules at the STOP > RUN

transition.

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.

Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.

You may also edit dynamic parameters in the active user program of an S7 PLC using SFCs.

However, the parameters set in

STEP 7

will be applied again after a RUN > STOP, STOP >

RUN transition of the CPU. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules

in the user program in the Appendix.

Configuration in RUN (CiR)

CiR (Configuration in RUN) is a method you can use to modify your system or edit the

parameters of individual modules. These changes are made while your system is in operation,

that is, your CPU will stay in RUN over a maximum of 2.5 seconds while these changes are

applied.

Analog modules

5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 199

For detailed information on this topic, refer to the "Configuration in RUN by means of CiR"

manual. This manual is found, for example, as a file in PDF format on the STEP 7

CD supplied.

Analog modules

5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

200 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.8.2 Parameters of analog input modules

Overview

Analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and value range listed in the table below,

based on their functionality. For information on subsets "supported" by specific analog

modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module.

The defaults apply if you have not set any parameters in

STEP 7

Table 5-41 Parameters of analog input modules

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Hardware interrupt1Yes/no No

● Destination CPU for

interrupt

1 to 4 - Static Module

Hardware interrupt trigger

● End of scan cycle reached

at input

Yes/no No Static Channel

May be restricted by the measuring range

● High limit 32511 to - 32512 - Dynamic Channel

● Low limit -32512 to 32511

Diagnostics

● Wire break Yes/no No

Static

Channel

● Reference channel error Yes/no No

● Underflow Yes/no No

● Overflow Yes/no No

● Short-circuit to M Yes/no No

Measurement

● Measuring method Disabled U

Static

Channel

U Voltage

4DMU Current (4-wire sensor)

2DMU Current (2-wire sensor)

R-4L Resistance (4-conductor con‐

nection)

R-3L Resistance (3-conductor con‐

nection)

RTD-4L Thermal resistance (linear, 4-

conductor connection)

RTD-3L Thermal resistance (linear, 3-

conductor connection)

TC-L Thermocouple (linear)

Analog modules

5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 201

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

● Measuring range For information on configurable measuring

ranges of the input channels, refer to the rel‐

evant module description.

± 10 V

● Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67° C 0° C Dynamic Module

● Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Kelvin Degrees

Celsius

Static Module

● Temperature coefficient

for temperature

measurement with

thermal resistance (RTD)

Platinum (Pt)

0.00385 Ω/Ω/° C

0.003916 Ω/Ω/° C

0.003902 Ω/Ω/° C

0.003920 Ω/Ω/° C

Nickel (Ni)

0.00618 Ω/Ω/° C

0.00672 Ω/Ω/° C

0,00385 Static Channel

● Interference frequency

suppression

400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz; none 50 or 60 Hz

● Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None

● Reference junction None

internal

RTD on channel 0

dynamic reference temperature value

None

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in

ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

See also

Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (Page 247)

Analog modules

5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

202 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.8.3 Parameters of analog output modules

Overview

Analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and value range listed in the table

below, based on their functionality. For information on subsets "supported" by specific analog

modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module.

The default settings apply if you have not set any parameters in STEP 7.

Table 5-42 Parameters of analog output modules

Parameters Value range Default set‐

ting1

Parameter

type

Scope

Output

● Output type Deactivated

voltage

current

U Static Channel

● Output range For information on configurable measuring rang‐

es of output channels, refer to the relevant mod‐

ule description.

± 10 V

1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

See also

Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (Page 247)

Analog modules

5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 203

5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs

Introduction

The analog input modules support various sensors, such as voltage/current sensors, and

resistors, depending on the set measuring method.

This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection

options for sensors described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire analog signals. This reduces interference.

Connect both ends of the analog cable shield to ground.

If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current,

which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. To avoid this

situation, you should ground the shield only at one end of the cable.

Non-isolated analog input modules

In the case of the non-isolated analog input modules there is an electrical connection between

the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.

You use non-isolated analog modules if there are few or no potential differences between the

measuring sensors and chassis ground.

Isolated analog input modules

With the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between the reference

point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.

You use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between the

reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of an equipotential

bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make sure that UISO does

not exceed the permitted value.

Limited potential difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur amongst the M-

measuring lines of the input channels and between the leads and the reference point of the

measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded, you

must take different actions, described below, depending on the potential connection of the

sensors.

Connecting electrically isolated sensors

The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (chassis ground). They

can be floating.

With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different sensors. These

potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the local distribution of the sensors.

Analog modules

5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

204 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded during use in heavily EMC-

affected environments, connect M- to MANA in modules with an MANA connection.

M+

M-

UISO

M+

M-

MANA

Figure 5-5 Connecting isolated sensors to an electrically isolated AI

(1) Electrically isolated sensors

(2) Chassis ground

(3) Connection required for modules with MANA

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)

MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground

Note

Do not connect M- to MANA when connecting 2-wire transducers for current measurement

and when connecting resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are

programmed accordingly, but remain unused.

Non-isolated sensors

The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (chassis ground). When

using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to chassis ground.

Analog modules

5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 205

Connecting non-isolated sensors

Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic)

can occur between the locally distributed measuring points. If the permitted value for UCM is

exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points.

M+

M-

UISO

M+

M-

MANA

UCM

Figure 5-6 Connecting non-isolated sensors to an isolated AI

(1) Non-isolated sensors

(2) Chassis ground

(3) Equipotential bonding conductor

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)

MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground

Note

Do not use non-isolated 2-wire transducers and non-isolated resistance-type sensors!

Analog modules

5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

206 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.10 Connecting voltage sensors

Connecting voltage sensors

Note

The cables required to connect the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in the

figures shown below.

In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section "Connecting

sensors to analog inputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.

-U

M+

M-

M+

MANA*

M-

Figure 5-7 Connecting voltage sensors to an AI

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)

MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

(1) Connection required for modules with Mana

Analog modules

5.10 Connecting voltage sensors

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 207

5.11 Connecting current sensors

Sensor supply voltage

Note

The cables required to connect the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in the

figures shown below.

In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section "Connecting

sensors to analog inputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.

The 2-wire sensor is wired to a short-circuit-proof supply voltage at the terminals of the analog

input module. This 2-wire transducer then converts the measured variable into a current.

Because the 2-wire transducer is supplied by the module, you must not ground the M- cables.

4-wire transducers require a separate supply voltage UH (auxiliary supply).

Connecting 2-wire transducers

2 3

+24 V

L+

M+

M-

M+

M-

MANA

Figure 5-8 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an isolated AI

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)

L +: Power supply connection 24 VDC

MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge

(2) + (3) 2-wire transducer

(4) Connection required for modules with Mana

Analog modules

5.11 Connecting current sensors

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

208 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting 2-wire transducers

Because the supply voltage for the 2-wire transducers is not fed by the SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit,

you must supply the sensors separately with 24 V.

2 3 +24 V

-MI+

M-

MANA

MV+

MI+

M-

MI+

Figure 5-9 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit

MI+: Measuring current (positive)

MV+: Measuring voltage (positive)

M +: Measuring line (positive)

MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

M -: Measuring line (negative)

(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge

(2)+(3) 2-wire transducer

Analog modules

5.11 Connecting current sensors

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 209

Connecting 4-wire transducers

M+

M-

M+

M-

MANA

Figure 5-10 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an AI

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)

MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

UH: Auxiliary voltage

(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge

(2) 4-wire transducer

(3) Connection required for modules with Mana

SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting 4-wire transducers

To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded, you must connect the M-cables

to MANA.

MI+

M-

MV+

MI+

M-

Figure 5-11 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit

Analog modules

5.11 Connecting current sensors

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

210 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

MI+: Measuring current (positive)

MV+: Measuring voltage (positive)

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)

UH: Auxiliary voltage

(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge

(2) 4-wire transducer

Analog modules

5.11 Connecting current sensors

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 211

5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

Note

The cables required to connect the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in the

figures shown below.

In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section "Connecting

sensors to analog inputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.

Resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in 2-, 3- or 4-wire technique.

With 4-conductor and 3-conductor connections, the module supplies a constant current via

terminals IC + and IC - so that the potential drop occurring on the measuring cables is

compensated. It is imperative to wire the constant current cables directly to the resistance

thermometer/resistor.

Compensated measurements with 3- or 4-wire elements return a more precise result compared

to 2-wire measurements.

4-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and M- terminals.

When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable (connect IC + and M+ as

well as IC- and M- to the resistance thermometer).

Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ andSO and SE+ and cables IC - and M- and

AGND and SE- are connected directly on the resistance thermometer.

M+

M-

IC+

IC-

SE+

SE-

AGND

Figure 5-12 4-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an AI

IC+ Constant current line (positive)

IC- Constant current line (negative)

M+Measuring line (positive)

M-Measuring line (negative)

Analog modules

5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

212 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

3-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a 3-conductor connection to modules with 4 terminals per resistance thermometer, you

must set up a jumper between M- and IC- and SE- and AGND (see Figure).

The module compensates in this circuit for the effect of the line resistance between the module

and the resistance thermometer/resistor.

Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ and SO and SE+ are directly connected to

the resistance thermometer.

To get an accurate measurement, make sure that the connected cables M+, IC + and IC- and

SE+, SO and AGND are the same length and have the same cross-section.

M+

M-

IC+

IC-

SE+

SE-

AGND

Figure 5-13 3-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog input

IC+ Constant current line (positive)

IC- Constant current line (negative)

M+Measuring line (positive)

M-Measuring line (negative)

2-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

For 2-conductor connections, bridge the M+ and IC+, and the M- and IC- terminals of the module.

Note: Cable resistance is also measured.

M+

M-

IC+

IC-

Figure 5-14 2-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog input

Analog modules

5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 213

IC+ Constant current line (positive)

IC- Constant current line (negative)

M+Measuring line (positive)

M-Measuring line (negative)

Analog modules

5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

214 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.13 Connecting thermocouples

Thermocouple design

Thermocouples consist of a pair of thermal probes, and all necessary installation and

connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys

soldered or welded together at the ends.

There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the material used,

for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all thermocouples is the same,

irrespective of their type.

°C

(1) Measuring junction

(2) Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs

(3) Connecting point

(4) Compensating leads

(5) Reference junction

(6) Leads

(7) Measurement input

Figure 5-15 Thermocouple design

Operating principle of thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free ends of the

thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo e.m.f., occurs at the free ends. The

magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the difference between the temperature

at the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends, as well as on the material

combination used for the thermocouple.

Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends must be kept

at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine the temperature of the

measuring junction.

Analog modules

5.13 Connecting thermocouples

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 215

The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference junction

by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires are made of the same materials

as the thermocouple wires. The supply lines are made of copper.

Note

Make sure that the polarity is correct, otherwise significant measuring errors will occur.

Compensation of the reference junction temperature

There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference junction

temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in

temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.

You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the reference

junction to be.

The last column of the following table lists the feature you must set for the "Reference Junction"

parameter in STEP 7. The reference temperature value is a separate parameter in STEP 7.

Options for compensation of the reference junction temperature

Option Explanations Reference junction

No compensation When you want to acquire only the difference in tempera‐

ture between the measuring point and the reference junction

None

Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal tempera‐

ture of the module is used for comparison purposes.

Internal

External compensation with a compensat‐

ing box in leads of an individual thermo‐

couple

You have already acquired and compensated the reference

junction temperature using a compensating box, which you

have looped into an individual thermocouple.

Further processing at the module is not required.

None

External compensation with a resistance

thermometer to obtain the reference junc‐

tion temperature (recommended method)

You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a

resistance thermometer (pt 100) and have it calculated by

the module for any thermocouple.

RTD on Channel 0

External compensation with a resistance

thermometer when thermocouples with

the same reference junction are divided

amongst several modules

Use a resistance thermometer on a module that measures

the reference junction temperature. Read in the climatic

temperature value to the CPU and transfer the value to the

other modules using SFC55.

RTD on Channel 0

Constant reference junction temperature

(thermometer, ice bath)

If the reference junction temperature is constant and known,

you can specify this value in parameter assignment in STEP

Reference temper‐

ature value

Principle of operation of internal compensation

Internal compensation allows you to form the reference point at the terminals of the analog

input module. In this case, route the compensating lines directly to the analog module. The

internal temperature sensor measures the module's temperature and returns a compensation

voltage.

Note: internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.

Analog modules

5.13 Connecting thermocouples

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

216 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Principle of operation of external compensation with compensating box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of the

thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example.

The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction

temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connecting ends of the thermocouple's

compensating lines.

The resistance of the temperature-sensitive bridge changes as a function of the difference

between the actual reference temperature and calibrating temperature. This difference induces

a positive or negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermal voltage.

Note

The diagrams below do not show the connecting lines required for connecting the electrical

potentials of the analog input module and the sensors. This means that you must still read and

follow the instructions in the generally applicable information on connecting sensors.

Connection of thermocouples without compensation or using the reference temperature value

Wire the thermocouples either directly to the inputs of the module, or indirectly via

compensating lines. Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog

module independently of the other channels.

M+

M-

M+

M-

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)

(1) Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)

Figure 5-16 Connection of thermocouples without compensation or using the reference temperature

value to an isolated AI

Connecting the compensating box

The compensating box is looped in through the leads of each thermocouple. The compensating

box must be supplied on an isolated basis. The power supply module must provide adequate

noise filtering, for example, by means of grounded cable shielding.

Analog modules

5.13 Connecting thermocouples

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 217

Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of

the other channels. Each channel requires its own compensating box.

Note

Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0° C for analog input

modules.

Connecting thermocouples using resistance thermometers

Connect the resistance thermometer to channel 0 of the module. Make sure that you configure

the "RTD on Channel 0" reference junction in STEP 7 for each channel that has a thermocouple

connected to it.

If all thermocouples connected to the module's inputs share a common reference junction,

compensate the circuit as follows:

M+

M-

M+

M-

C+

C-

M+

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)

IC+: Constant current line (negative)

(1) Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)

(2) RTD on Channel 0

(3) Incoming line (Cu)

(4) Reference junction

Figure 5-17 Connection of thermocouples of the same type with external compensation by means of

a resistance thermometer, connected to channel 0

Analog modules

5.13 Connecting thermocouples

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

218 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs

Introduction

The analog output modules can be used to supply power to loads and actuators.

This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection

options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire analog signals. Form two twisted pairs of the

QV and S+, and M and S- signals. This reduces interference. Connect both ends of the analog

cable shield to ground.

If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current,

which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. To avoid this

situation, you should ground the shield only at one end of the cable.

Isolated analog output modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the

reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.

You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between

the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of an

equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make sure

that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.

Analog modules

5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 219

5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs

Connecting loads to a voltage output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a 4-conductor and a 2-conductor

connection.

Note

The cables required to connect the analog output module are not drawn in the figures shown

below.

In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section "Connecting

loads/actuators to analog outputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.

4-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output

You can use the 4-wire technique to achieve a high accuracy at the load by wiring the S- and

S+ sensor lines directly to the load. This results in direct measurement and correction of the

voltage at the load.

Faults or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead S- and

the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential difference (UCM) must not exceed

the permissible value. A negative influence on the accuracy of the analog signal is otherwise

inevitable.

+24 V

L+

S+

S-

MANA

0 V

MUISO

Figure 5-18 4-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog output

module

L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage

QV: Analog output voltage

S +: Sensing line (positive)

S -: Sensing line (negative)

Analog modules

5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

220 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

MANA: Reference potential of the analog circuit

M : Ground

UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground

(1) Chassis ground

2-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output

In the case of a 2-conductor connection, connect QV with S+ and MANA with S on the front

connector. However, this will not provide the accuracy of a 4-conductor connection.

Wire the loads to the QV terminals and to the reference point of measuring circuit MANA.

+24 V

L+

S+

S-

MANA

0 V

MUISO

Figure 5-19 2-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog output

module

L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage

QV: Analog output voltage

S +: Sensing line (positive)

S -: Sensing line (negative)

MANA: Reference potential of the analog circuit

M : Ground

UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground

(1) Chassis ground

See also

Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs (Page 219)

Analog modules

5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 221

5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs

Connecting loads to current outputs

Always connect loads to QI and to the reference point of analog circuit MANA of a current output.

Note

The cables required to connect the analog output module are not drawn in the figure shown

below.

In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section "Connecting

loads/actuators to analog outputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.

+24 V

L+

MANA

0 V

UISO

Figure 5-20 Connecting loads to a current output of an isolated AO

L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage

QI: Analog output current

MANA: Reference potential of the analog circuit

M : Ground

UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground

(1) Chassis ground

See also

Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs (Page 219)

Analog modules

5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

222 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

We distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages.

You only obtain programmable diagnostic messages if you have enabled the diagnostics using

the relevant parameters. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" tab in

STEP

The analog module always provides non-programmable diagnostic messages, irrespective of

the enable state of diagnostics functions.

Reactions to diagnostic messages in STEP 7

Actions initiated by diagnostic messages:

● The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the analog module, forwarded to

the CPU and can be read out by the user program.

● The error LED on the analog module is lit.

● If you have set "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" in

STEP 7

, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered

and OB 82 is called.

Reading diagnostic messages

You can read detailed diagnostic messages using SFCs in the user program (refer to the

appendix "Diagnostic data of signal modules").

You can view the cause of the error in

STEP 7

in the module diagnostics (refer to the

online

help for STEP 7

Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

All analog input modules return the measured value 7FFFH as a reaction to errors, irrespective

of parameter settings. This measured value indicates either overflow, error, or a disabled

channel.

Diagnostics using the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some analog input modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal

fault) and EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have

been eliminated.

Refer to the specifications of the modules to find out which analog input modules have these

fault LEDs.

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input modules

with diagnostics capability.

Analog modules

5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 223

You can find out which diagnostic messages are possible with which modules in the Appendix

entitled "Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules".

Table 5-43 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

Diagnostic message LED Scope of diagnostics Programmable

Module error INTF/EXTF Module No

Internal error INTF Module No

External error EXTF Module No

Channel error INTF/EXTF Module No

External auxiliary voltage missing EXTF Module No

Front connector missing EXTF Module No

No module parameters INTF Module No

Incorrect parameters INTF Module No

Channel information available INTF/EXTF Module No

Measuring range module incorrect/missing INTF Module No

Thermocouple connection error EXTF Module No

STOP mode - Module No

EPROM error INTF Module No

RAM error INTF Module No

ADC/DAC error INTF Module No

Hardware interrupt lost INTF Module No

Configuration / programming error INTF Channel No

Short-circuit to M EXTF Channel Yes

Wire break EXTF Channel Yes

Reference channel error EXTF Channel Yes

Underflow EXTF Channel Yes

Overflow EXTF Channel Yes

User connection not wired EXTF Channel No

Open conductor in + direction EXTF Channel No

Open conductor in - direction EXTF Channel No

Run time calibration error EXTF Channel No

Underrange or overrange EXTF Channel No

Open conductor in the current source EXTF Channel No

User calibration does not correspond to the param‐

eter assignment

EXTF Channel No

Note

A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that

you must have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly in STEP 7.

Analog modules

5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

224 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Causes of errors and remedies for analog input modules

Table 5-44 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules, causes of errors and remedies

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Module error Any, the module has detected an error. -

Internal error Module has detected an error within the au‐

tomation system.

External error Module has detected an error outside of the

automation system.

Channel error Indicates that only certain channels are faul‐

External auxiliary voltage

missing

Load voltage to supply the 2-wire transduc‐

er is missing on terminals L+ and M.

Connect supply L+

Front connector missing Jumper between connections 1 and 2 in the

front connector is missing.

Install jumper

No module parameters Module requires information whether it

should operate with default system param‐

eters or with your parameters.

Message present after power on, until the CPU

has completed the transfer of parameters; config‐

ure the module as required.

Incorrect parameters A parameter or combination of parameters

is incorrect; impermissible measurement

range, for example.

Reassign parameters to the module

Channel information availa‐

ble

Channel error; module can provide addi‐

tional channel information.

Measuring range module

incorrect/missing

One or more measuring range modules is

missing or incorrectly inserted

Insert the measuring range modules on the mod‐

ule according to the parameter assignment of the

type of measurement and the measurement

range

STOP mode No parameters have been assigned to the

module and the first module cycle has not

been completed.

If a reboot of the CPU all the digitized analog val‐

ues are in the intermediate memory, this mes‐

sage is reset

EPROM error Module is defective Replace the module

RAM error

ADC/DAC error

Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, since

the previous interrupt was not acknowl‐

edged; possible configuration error.

Change the interrupt handling in the CPU

(change priority for interrupt OB; shorten interrupt

program).

Configuration / program‐

ming error

Illegal parameters transferred to module Check the measuring range module

Reassign parameters to the module

Short-circuit to M A short-circuit to the M potential has occur‐

red on the sensor supply of 2-wire trans‐

ducers.

Eliminate the short-circuit.

Wire break Resistance of transducer circuit too high Use a different type of transducer, or modify the

wiring, for example, using a larger conductor

cross-section.

Open circuit between module and sensor Connect the cable

Channel not connected (open) Disable channel ("Measuring type" parameter)

Wire the channel

Analog modules

5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 225

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Reference channel error The reference junction connected at chan‐

nel 0 is faulty due to a wire break, for exam‐

ple.

Check the connections

The reference temperature value transfer‐

red is not within the value range.

Reassign the parameters for the reference tem‐

perature

Underflow Input value below undershoot range; possi‐

ble cause of error: wrong measuring range

selected

Set another measuring range

With the measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA and

1 to 5 V, if necessary by polarity reversal of

sensor connection

Check the connections

Overflow Input value exceeds overshoot range Set another measuring range

Run time calibration error A wiring fault has occurred on a channel

during the calibration cycle

Eliminate the wiring fault (fault remains until the

next calibration; in other words, a maximum 6 mi‐

nutes or until there is a STOP-RUN transition of

the CPU).

Analog modules

5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

226 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.18 Interrupts of analog modules

Introduction

This section describes the interrupt reaction of analog modules. There are two types of

interrupt:

● Diagnostic interrupt

● Hardware interrupt

Note: certain analog modules do not support interrupts, or can only partially "handle" the

interrupts described below. For information on modules supporting interrupt functions, refer to

their specifications.

For detailed information on the OBs and SFCs mentioned below, refer to the

STEP 7 Online

Help

Enabling interrupts

The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter

assignment. Interrupts are enabled in STEP 7.

Special feature: The module is inserted in ER-1/ER-2

Note

If you use the analog module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for the input of all

the interrupts to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.

Diagnostic interrupt

When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, incoming error events (initial occurrence) and

outgoing error events (error is cleared) are reported by means of an interrupt.

The CPU interrupts user program execution, and executes diagnostic interrupt OB82.

In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic

information from the module.

The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is

exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Hardware interrupt with trigger "high and low limit exceeded"

Define a working range by setting a high and low limit. If the process signal (for example, the

temperature) leaves this working range, the module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided

the interrupt is enabled.

As a result, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and executes hardware interrupt

OB 40.

Analog modules

5.18 Interrupts of analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 227

In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable controller is required to

react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached.

When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Note

Note: the system does not generate a hardware interrupt if your limit setting exceeds the

overshoot or undershoot range.

Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of OB

40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in DWORD

8 of local data.

1 2 3 4

16 Bit-Nr.

1731 30 29 28 27 26

LD 81

LB 8 LB 9

25 24

LB 11

1 1

Figure 5-21 Start Information of OB 40: Which event has violated limits and triggered a hardware

interrupt

(1) Value exceeds high limit in channel 1

(2) Value exceeds high limit in channel 0

(3) Value exceeds low limit in channel 1

(4) Value exceeds low limit in channel 0

(5) Bit No.

Hardware interrupt triggered by "Reached end of scan cycle"

A hardware interrupt programmed to be triggered at the end of scan cycles allows you to

synchronize a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module.

A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all active channels of the

analog input module. The module processes the channels in succession. When all measured

values are successfully converted, the module reports the existence of new measurement data

at its channels to the CPU by means of an interrupt.

You can always use this interrupt to load the actual, converted analog values.

See also

Features (Page 229)

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Analog modules

5.18 Interrupts of analog modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

228 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

5.19.1 Features

Overview

The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit has the following features:

● 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement

● 4 inputs for resistance measurement

● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel

● Resolution 13 bits

● Analog section isolated from the CPU

● Maximum permitted common mode voltage between the channels or between the reference

potentials of the connected sensors and MANA 30 V AC

Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit

+5V

CH1

CH7

CH0

+5V

-5V

MV0+

MI0+

M0-

CH1

CH7

F_CON

MANA

Front connectors

monitoring

Suppressor circuit, current jumpering

Bus control

Bus S7-400

Figure 5-22 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 229

WARNING

The module can get damaged.

The shunt of an input channel can be destroyed if you inadvertently connect a voltage sensor

to the M- /MI+ terminals of a channel.

Make sure that the front connector is wired in accordance with the following connection

diagram.

Analog modules

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

230 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit

MANA

MV0+ MV0+

MV7+

MI7+

M7-

MV6+

MI6+

M6-

MV5+

MI5+

M5-

MV4+

MI4+

M4-

MV3 +

MI3 +

M3-

MV2+

MI2+

M2-

MV1+

MI1+

M1-

MI0+

M0-

M0+

M0-

M1+

M1-

M2+

M2-

M3 +

M3-

IC0+

IC0-

IC1+

IC1-

IC2+

IC2-

IC3 +

IC3-

M0-

MV1+

M1-

MV2+

M2-

MV3 +

M3-

MV4+

M4-

MV5+

M5-

MV6+

M6-

MV7+

M7-

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

CH0

CH2

CH4

CH6

ANA

Voltage

measurement

Current measurement Resistance

measurement

Word 0

Word 2

Word 0

Word 4

Word 6

Word 8

Word 10

Word 8

Word 12

Word 14

Figure 5-23 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 231

Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 500 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs 8

● For resistance-based sensor 4

Cable length

● shielded Maximum 200 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated load voltage L+ Not required

Constant measured current for resistance-based sen‐

sor

Typ. 1.67 mA

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels No

Permissible potential difference

● Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 30 V AC

● Between the inputs (UCM) 30 V AC

● Between MANA and Mintern (UISO) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Between bus and analog section 2120 V DC

● Between bus and chassis ground 500 V DC

● Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 V DC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 350 mA

Module power loss Typ. 1.8 W

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Integrating

Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per chan‐

nel)

(Not part of the response time)

● Configurable Yes

● Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz 60 / 50

● Integration time in ms 16.7 / 20

● Basic conversion time in ms 23 / 25

● Resolution (including overrange) 13 / 13 bit

Measured value smoothing Not possible

Basic execution time of the module in ms (all channels

enabled)

184 / 200

Noise suppression, error limits

Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%),

(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...

● Common mode interference (UCM < 30 V) > 100 dB

Analog modules

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

232 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Series-mode interference (peak value of fault

< rated value of input range)

> 40 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dB

Operational limit (throughout temperature range, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 1 V

– ± 10 V

– 1 to 5 V

± 1.0%

± 0.6%

± 0.7%

● Current input

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 1.0%

● Resistance measurement 0 to 500 Ω;

4-wire measurement (at around 600 Ω)

± 1.25%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 1 V

– ± 10 V

– 1 to 5 V

± 0.7%

± 0.4%

± 0.5%

● Current input

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 0.7%

● Resistance measurement 0 to 500 Ω; 4-wire

measurement (at around 600 Ω)

± 0.8%

Temperature error (relative to input range)

● in resistance measuring range ± 0.02 % / K

● In all other measuring ranges ± 0.007 % / K

Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0.05%

Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to

input range)

± 0.1%

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Substitute values can be connected No

Data for selecting a sensor

Input range (rated values) / input resistance

● Voltage ± 1 V / 200 kΩ

± 10 V / 200 kΩ

1 to 5 V / 200 kΩ

● Current ± 20 mA / 80 Ω

4 to 20 mA / 80 Ω

● Resistance 0 to 600 Ω; can be used up to 500 Ω

Permissible input current for current input (destruction

limit)

Constant 40 mA

Sensor connection

Analog modules

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 233

● For voltage measurement Possible

● For current measurement

– As 2-wire transducer

– As 4-wire transducer

Possible; with external measuring transducer

supply

Possible

● For resistance measurement

– With 2-wire connection

– With 3-wire connection

– With 4-wire connection

Possible; line resistance is also measured

Possible

Analog modules

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

234 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.19.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x13 Bit in STEP 7.

Parameters

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules

in the respective sections.

The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5-45 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Parameters Value range Default1Parameter

type

Scope

Measurement

● Measuring

method

Disabled U

4DMU

2DMU

R-4L

Voltage

Current (4-wire sensor)

Current (2-wire sensor)

Resistance (4-conductor connec‐

tion)

Static Channel

● Measuring

range

Refer to respective section for the measuring

ranges of the input channels that you can set.

± 10 V

● Interference

frequency

suppression

60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz

1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

See also

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Analog modules

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 235

5.19.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Measuring methods

You can set the measuring method at the input channels:

● Voltage measurement

● Current measurement

● Resistance measurement

You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7.

Circuit for resistance measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance with the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit:

Table 5-46 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Measuring type parameter Permissible

for channel n

Condition

Resistance

(4-conductor connection)

0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1 (1, 3,

5, 7).

Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the resistance

that is connected to channel n.

Unused channels

Unused channels can be left open. You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a

measuring environment with serious interference by short-circuiting the channels and

connecting to MANA. For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to

"deactivated". This reduces the module's cycle time.

Measuring ranges

Set the measuring ranges at the "measuring range" parameter in

STEP 7

Table 5-47 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Selected measuring method Measuring range Description

V: Voltage ±1 V

1 V to 5 V

±10 V

The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐

sentation of analog values for output channels" in the voltage

measuring range.

2DMU: Current

(2-wire transducer)

4 to 20 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐

sentation of analog values for output channels in the current

measuring range".

Analog modules

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

236 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Selected measuring method Measuring range Description

4DMU: Current

(4-wire transducer)

4 to 20 mA

± 20 mA

The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐

sentation of analog values for output channels in the current

measuring range".

R-4L: Resistance

(4-conductor connection)

600 Ω The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐

sentation of analog values for output channels in the resist‐

ance-type sensor range".

Default

The "voltage" measuring method and "± 10 V" measuring range are set by default at the

module. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without

configuring the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit in

STEP 7

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

5.20.1 Features

Overview

The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit has the following features:

● 8 inputs for current and voltage measurement

● 4 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement

● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel

● Resolution 14 bits

● Particularly suited to temperature measurement

● Temperature sensor types configurable

● Linearization of sensor characteristic curves

● Supply voltage: 24 V DC only required for connection of 2-wire transducers

● Analog section isolated from the CPU

● Maximum permitted common mode voltage between channels or between channel and

central grounding point 120 V AC

Note

"Wire break" diagnostics

The diagnosis "wire break" can be configured for "voltage" measurement for this module,

but is not evaluated by the module in that measurement type.

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 237

Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

24 V

- 15V

+ 5V

+ 15V

ENABLE

CH0

CH1

CH6

CH7

L+

OPTO RELAY

Measuring

range

module 0

Bus control

Measuring

range

module 3

MULTIPLEXER

Bus S7-400

Figure 5-24 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

238 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

M1+

M2-

M3-

M4-

M5-

M6-

M7-

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

L+

M0+

M0-

M1-

M2+

M3 +

M4+

M5+

M6+

M7+

M0+

M0-

IC0+

IC0-

M1+

M1-

IC1+

IC1-

M2+

M2-

IC2+

IC2-

M3 +

M3-

IC3 +

IC3-

CH0

CH2

CH4

CH6

Thermocouples

Voltage measurement-

Current measurement

Resistance measurement

Resistance thermometer

Word 0

Word 2

Word 4

Word 6

Word 8

Word 10

Word 12

Word 14

Figure 5-25 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 239

Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 500 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs 8

● For resistance-based sensor 4

Cable length

● Shielded Maximum 200 m

● In 80 mV - input range and for thermocouples Maximum 50 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC (only required for supply of 2-wire

transducers)

● Reverse polarity protection Yes

Supply voltage of the measuring transducers

● Supply current Maximum 50 mA

● Short-circuit proof Yes

Constant measured current for resistance-based sen‐

sor

Typ. 1.67 mA

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels No

● Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

● Between the inputs (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

● Between MANA and Mintern (UISO) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Between bus and L+/M 2120 V DC

● Between bus and analog section 2120 V DC

● Between bus and chassis ground 500 V DC

● Between analog section and L+/M 500 V DC

● Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 V DC

● Between L+/M and chassis ground 2120 V DC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 600 mA

● From load voltage L+ Maximum 200 mA (with 8 connected fully con‐

trolled 2-wire transducers)

Module power loss Typ. 3.5 W

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Integrating

Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per chan‐

nel)

(Not part of the response time)

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

240 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Configurable Yes

● Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz 60 / 50

● Integration time in ms 16.7 / 20

● Basic conversion time in ms 20.1 / 23.5

● Additional conversion time for resistance

measurement in ms

40.2 / 47

● Additional conversion time for wire-break

monitoring in ms

4.3 / 4.3

● Additional conversion time for resistance

measurement in ms

5.5 / 5.5

● Resolution (including overrange) 14 / 14 bit

● When smoothing is enabled 16 / 16 bit

Measured value smoothing Configurable in 4 stages

Basic execution time of the module in ms (all channels

enabled)

161 / 188

Noise suppression, error limits

Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%),

(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...

● Common mode interference (UCM < 120 Vss) > 100 dB

● Series-mode interference (peak value of fault <

rated value of input range)

> 40 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs > 70 dB

Operational limit (throughout temperature range, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 80 mV

– ± 250 mV

– ± 500 mV

– ± 1 V

– ± 2.5 V

– ± 5 V

– 1 to 5 V

– ± 10 V

± 0.38%

± 0.35%

● Current input

– 0 to 20 mA

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 0.35%

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 241

● Resistance measurement

– 0 to 48 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 150 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 300 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 5000 Ω; 4-wire measurement (around

6000 Ω)

– 0 to 300 Ω; 3-wire measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω; 3-wire measurement

– 0 to 5000 Ω; 3-wire measurement (around

6000 Ω)

± 0.35%

± 0.5%

● Thermocouples

– TC type B

– TC type R

– TC type s

– TC type T

– TC type E

– TC type J

– TC type K

– TC type U

– TC type L

– TC type N

± 14.8 K

± 9.4 K

± 10.6 K

± 2.2 K

± 4.0 K

± 5.2 K

± 7.6 K

± 3.5 K

± 5.1 K

± 5.5 K

● Resistance thermocouples 4-conductor standard

measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

Climatic measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

± 4.6 K

± 5.7 K

± 4.6 K

± 3.7 K

± 0.9 K

± 0.5 K

± 0.9 K

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

242 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Resistance thermocouples 3-conductor standard

measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

Climatic measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

± 5.2 K

± 8.2 K

± 6.5 K

± 5.2 K

± 1.3 K

± 0.7 K

± 1.3 K

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 80 mV

– ± 250 mV

– ± 500 mV

– ± 1 V

– ± 2.5 V

– ± 5 V

– 1 to 5 V

– ± 10 V

± 0.17%

± 0.15%

● Current input

– 0 to 20 mA

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 0.15%

● Resistance measurement

– 0 to 48 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 150 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 300 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 5000 Ω; 4-wire measurement (around

6000 Ω)

– 0 to 300 Ω; 3-wire measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω; 3-wire measurement

– 0 to 5000 Ω; 3-wire measurement (around

6000 Ω)

± 0.15%

± 0.3%

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 243

● Thermocouples

– TC type B

– TC type R

– TC type s

– TC type T

– TC type E

– TC type J

– TC type K

– TC type U

– TC type L

– TC type N

± 8.2 K

± 5.2 K

± 5.9 K

± 1.2 K

± 1.8 K

± 2.3 K

± 3.4 K

± 1.8 K

± 2.3 K

± 2.9 K

● Resistance thermocouples 4-conductor standard

measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

Climatic measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

± 2.0 K

± 2.5 K

± 2.0 K

± 1.6 K

± 0.4 K

± 0.2 K

± 0.4 K

● Resistance thermocouples 3-conductor standard

measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

Climatic measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

± 3.1 K

± 4.9 K

± 3.9 K

± 3.1 K

± 0.8 K

± 0.4 K

± 0.8 K

Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0.004 % / K

Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0.01%

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

244 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to

input range)

± 0.1%

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Substitute values can be connected No

Data for selecting a sensor

Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance

● Voltage ± 80 mV / 1 MΩ

± 250 mV / 1 MΩ

± 500 mV / 1 MΩ

± 1 V / 1 MΩ

± 2.5 V / 1 MΩ

± 5 V / 1 MΩ

1 to 5 V / 1 MΩ

± 10 V / 1 MΩ

● Current 0 to 20 mA / 50 Ω

± 20 mA / 50 Ω

4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω

● Resistance 0 to 48 Ω / 1 MΩ

0 to 150 Ω / 1 MΩ

0 to 300 Ω / 1 MΩ

0 to 600 Ω / 1 MΩ

0 to 6000 Ω / 1 MΩ

(can be used up to 5000 Ω)

● Thermocouples TC type B / 1 MΩ

TC type R / 1 MΩ

TC type S / 1 MΩ

TC type T / 1 MΩ

TC type E / 1 MΩ

TC type J / 1 MΩ

TC type K / 1 MΩ

TC type U / 1 MΩ

TC type L / 1 MΩ

TC type N / 1 MΩ

● Resistance thermometer Pt 100 / 1 MΩ

Pt 200 / 1 MΩ

Pt 500 / 1 MΩ

Pt 1000 / 1 MΩ

Ni 100 / 1 MΩ

Ni 1000 / 1 MΩ

Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction

limit)

Maximum 18 V continuous

75 V for 1 ms (cycle clock ratio 1 : 20)

Permissible input current for current input (destruction

limit)

40 mA continuous

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 245

Sensor connection

● For voltage measurement Possible

● For current measurement

– As 2-wire transducer

– As 4-wire transducer

Possible

● For resistance measurement

– With 2-wire connection

– With 3-wire connection

– With 4-wire connection

Possible; line resistance is also measured

Possible

● Load of 2-wire transducer Maximum 750 Ω

Characteristic curve linearization Configurable

● For thermocouples Type B, R, S, T, E, J, K, U, L, N

● For resistance thermometers Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000,

Ni 100, Ni 1000

Temperature compensation Yes, configurable

● Internal temperature compensation No

● External temperature compensation with

compensating box

Possible

● External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Possible

● Compensation for definable reference junction

temperature

Possible

Technical unit for temperature measurement Degrees Celsius

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

246 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.20.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range

modules on the module and in

STEP 7

Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel

to each type of sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method

and range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the respective

section.

For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the

corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431;

AI 8 x 14 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.

Parameters

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules

in the respective sections.

The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5-48 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Parameters Value range Default set‐

ting1

Parame‐

ter type

Scope

Diagnostics

● Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel

Measurement

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 247

Parameters Value range Default set‐

ting1

Parame‐

ter type

Scope

● Measuring method Deactiva‐

ted

Voltage

U Static Channel

4DMU Current (4-wire

sensor)

2DMU Current (2-wire

sensor)

R-4L Resistance (4-

conductor con‐

nection)

R-3L Resistance (3-

conductor con‐

nection)

RTD-4L Thermal resistor

(linear, 4-con‐

ductor connec‐

tion)

RTD-3L Thermal resistor

(linear, 3-con‐

ductor connec‐

tion)

TC-L Thermocouple

(linear)

● Measuring range For information on configura‐

ble measuring ranges of in‐

put channels, refer to the

chapter "Measuring methods

and measuring ranges of SM

431; AI 8 x 14 Bit".

± 10 V

● Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 0,00 oC Dynamic Module

● Interference frequency

suppression

60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz Static Channel

● Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Static Channel

● Reference junction None

RTD on Channel 0

Reference temperature val‐

ue dynamic

None

1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the

respective section.

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

248 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles, in the case of a step

response, after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on

the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

100

50 100 150 200

Signal variation in

percent

Step response for any analog input signal

Smoothing Low:

average:

high:

Module cycles

Figure 5-26 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

See also

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules (Page 196)

5.20.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Measuring methods

You can set the measuring method at the input channels:

● Voltage measurement

● Current measurement

● Resistance measurement

● Temperature measurement

You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the

"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 249

Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore

restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7,

as shown in the following table:

Table 5-49 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

(6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Measuring method,

channel n

Measuring method, channel n + 1

Deacti‐

vated

Voltage Current

4-DMU

Current

2-DMU

R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L

Disabled x x x x x

Voltage x x x

Current 4-wire trans‐

ducer

x x

Current 2-wire trans‐

ducer

x x

4-wire

resistor

3-wire

resistor

Four-wire thermal re‐

sistor

3-wire thermal

resistor

Thermocouples x x x

Example

If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring

method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

250 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Circuit for resistance measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the SM

431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:

Table 5-50 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Measuring type parameter Permissible for

channel n

Condition

Resistance

(4-conductor connection)

0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1

(1, 3, 5, 7).

Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the

resistance that is connected to channel n.

Resistance

(3-conductor connection)

0, 2, 4 or 6

Thermal resistance

(linear, 4-wire connection)

0, 2, 4 or 6

Thermal resistance

(linear, 3-wire connection)

0, 2, 4 or 6

Circuit for reference junction compensation for thermocouples

If you select "RTD on Channel 0" as a reference junction for reference junction compensation

for thermocouples, the following applies:

Table 5-51 Thermocouple with reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0

Measuring type parameter Permissible for

channel n

Condition

RTD on Channel 0 2 to 7 You must connect and configure on channel 0 a resistance thermom‐

eter with linearization, a 3 or 4-conductor connection in climatic

range. This means that channels 0 and 1 are assigned.

Reason: If channel 0 is to be used as the reference junction, a resist‐

ance-type sensor must be connected there to record absolute tem‐

peratures in the climatic range.

Unused channels

Unused channels can usually be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "A".

In measuring environments with strong interference, you can improve the module's immunity

to interference by short-circuiting the channels.

For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces

the module's cycle time.

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 251

Measuring ranges

Set the measuring ranges using the measuring range modules, and at the "measuring method"

parameter in

STEP 7

Table 5-52 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Selected measuring method Measuring range

(type of sensor)

Measuring range module

settings

Description

V: Voltage ± 80 mV

± 250 mV

± 500 mV

± 1 V

± 2.5 V

± 5 V

1 to 5 V

± 10 V

A The digitized analog values are lis‐

ted in the section "Representation

of analog values for analog input

channels" in the voltage measur‐

ing range.

2DMU: Current

(2-wire transducer)

4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with

current you must connect 24 V to

the L+ and M front connector ter‐

minals.

The digitized analog values are lis‐

ted in the section "Representation

of analog values for analog input

channels" in the current measur‐

ing range.

4DMU: Current

(4-wire transducer)

0 mA to 20 mA

4 mA to 20 mA

± 20 mA

C The digitized analog values are lis‐

ted in the section "Representation

of analog values for analog input

channels" in the current measur‐

ing range.

R-4L: Resistance

(4-conductor connection)

48 Ω

150 Ω

300 Ω

600 Ω

6000 Ω

A The digitized analog values are lis‐

ted in the section "Representation

of analog values for analog input

channels" in the resistance meas‐

uring range.

R-3L: Resistance

(3-conductor connection)

300 Ω

600 Ω

6000 Ω

Analog modules

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

252 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Selected measuring method Measuring range

(type of sensor)

Measuring range module

settings

Description

TCL: Thermocouple (linear)

(temperature measurement)

Type B

Type N

Type E

Type R

Type S

Type J

Type L

Type T

Type K

Type U

A The digitized analog values are lis‐

ted in the section "Representation

of analog values for analog input

channels" in the temperature

range.

RTD-4L: Thermal resistance

(linear, 4-wire connection)

(temperature measurement)

Pt 100 Climatic

Pt 200 Climatic

Pt 500 Climatic

Pt 1000 Climatic

Ni 100 Climatic

Ni 1000 Climatic

Pt 100 Standard

Pt 200 Standard

Pt 500 Standard

Pt 1000 Standard

Ni 100 Standard

Ni 1000 Standard

RTD-3L: Thermal resistance

(linear, 3-wire connection)

(temperature measurement)

Defaults

The module has the following default settings in

STEP 7

● Channels 0 to 7: "Voltage" measuring method ; "± 10 V" measuring range

You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without configuring the SM 431;

AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

5.21.1 Features

Overview

SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit has the following features:

● Rapid A/D change, therefore highly suited to highly dynamic processes

● 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement

● 4 inputs for resistance measurement

● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 253

● Resolution 14 bits

● Supply voltage: 24 V DC only required for connection of 2-wire transducers

● Analog section isolated from the CPU

● Maximum permitted common mode voltage between the channels or between the reference

potentials of the connected sensors and MANA 8 V AC

Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

CH0

CH1

CH6

CH7

+5V

- 15V

+ 5V

+ 15V

L+

ENABLE

MANA

Measuring

range

module 0

Measuring

range

module 3

MULTIPLEXER

Bus control

Bus S7-400

Figure 5-27 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

254 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

M1+

M2-

M3-

M4-

M5-

M6-

M7-

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

L+

M0+

M0-

M1-

M2+

M3 +

M4+

M5+

M6+

M7+

M0+

M0-

IC0+

IC0-

M1+

M1-

IC1+

IC1-

M2+

M2-

IC2+

IC2-

M3 +

M3-

IC3 +

IC3-

CH0

CH2

CH4

CH6

MANA

Voltage measurement

Current measurement

Resistance measurement

Word 0

Word 2

Word 4

Word 6

Word 8

Word 10

Word 12

Word 14

Figure 5-28 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 255

Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 500 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs

● For resistance-based sensor

Cable length

● Shielded

Maximum 200 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC (only required for supply of 2-wire

transducers)

● Reverse polarity protection Yes

Supply voltage of the measuring transducers

● Supply current Maximum 50 mA

● Short-circuit proof Yes

Constant measured current for resistance-based sen‐

sor

Typ. 1.67 mA

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels No

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between inputs and MANA (UCM)

8 V AC

● Between the inputs (UCM) 8 V AC

● Between MANA and Mintern (UISO) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Between bus and analog section 2120 V DC

● Between bus and chassis ground 500 V DC

● Between analog section and L+/M 500 V DC

● Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 V DC

● Between L+/M and chassis ground 2120 V DC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V)

Maximum 1000 mA

● From load voltage L+ Maximum 200 mA (with 8 connected fully con‐

trolled 2-wire transducers)

Module power loss Typ. 4.9 W

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Instantaneous value conversion

Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per chan‐

nel)

(Not part of the response time)

● Configurable Yes

● Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz None / 400 / 60 / 50

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

256 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Basic conversion time 52 µs

● Resolution (including overrange) 14 / 14 / 14

Measured value smoothing "None - strong" configurable

Time constant of the input filter 15 µs

Basic execution time of the module in ms (all channels

enabled)

0.420

Noise suppression, error limits

Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2 , ...

Filter 400 / 60 / 50 Hz configured

● Common mode interference (UCM < 11 Vss) > 80 dB

● Series-mode interference (peak value of fault <

rated value of input range)

> 40 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs > 70 dB

Operational limit (throughout temperature range, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 1 V

– ± 10 V

– 1 to 5 V

± 0.7%

± 0.9%

● Current input

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 0.8%

● Resistance measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω;

± 1.0%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 1 V

– ± 10 V

– 1 to 5 V

± 0.6%

± 0.75%

● Current input

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 0.7%

● Resistance measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω;

± 0.7%

Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0.03% / K

Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0.05%

Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to

input range)

± 0.2%

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Substitute values can be connected No

Data for selecting a sensor

Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 257

● Voltage ± 1 V / 100 kΩ

± 10 V / 100 kΩ

1 to 5 V / 100 kΩ

● Current ± 20 mA / 50 Ω

4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω

● Resistance 0 to 600 Ω / 10 MΩ

Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction

limit)

Maximum 18 V continuous;

75 V for 1 ms (cycle clock ratio 1 : 20)

Permissible input current for current input (destruction

limit)

40 mA continuous

Sensor connection

● For voltage measurement Possible

● For current measurement

– As 2-wire transducer

– As 4-wire transducer

Possible

● For resistance measurement

– With 2-wire connection

– With 3-wire connection

– With 4-wire connection

Possible; line resistance is also measured

Possible

● Load of 2-wire transducer Maximum 750 Ω

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

258 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.21.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Introduction

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range

modules on the module and in

STEP 7

Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel

to each type of sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method

and range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the respective

section.

For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the

corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431,

AI 8 x 14 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.

Parameters

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules

in the respective sections.

The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5-53 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

Parameters Value range Default1Parameter

type

Scope

Measurement

● Measuring

method

Disabled

Voltage

Static Channel

4DMU Current (4-wire

sensor)

2DMU Current (2-wire

sensor)

R-4L Resistance (4-con‐

ductor connection)

● Measuring range Refer to the respective section for

the measuring ranges of the input

channels that you can set.

± 10 V

● Noise

suppression

400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none 50 Hz

● Smoothing None

Strong

None

1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 259

Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the

respective section. You can only set strong smoothing for the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit.

The module cycle time is a constant, irrespective of how many channels are enabled. It

therefore has no effect on the filter settling time, which is defined by the parameter assignment

of interference frequency suppression and smoothing.

Filter settling time with strong smoothing

Table 5-54 Interference frequency suppression and filter settling time with smoothing

Noise suppression Smoothing Filter settling time in ms

None Strong -

50 Hz Strong 100

60 Hz Strong 83,333

400 Hz Strong 12,5

Step response with strong smoothing

The following figure illustrates the contents of the table above. It shows the filter settling time

after which, in the case of a step response, the smoothed analog value is applied to almost

100%, depending on the interference frequency suppression that has been set. The figure

applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

100

60 Hz:

50 Hz:

12030 15060

12,5 83,333 100

400 Hz:

Signal variation

in percent

Step response for any analog input signal

Noise suppression Filter settling time in ms

Figure 5-29 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0)

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

260 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

See also

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (Page 262)

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 261

5.21.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Measuring methods

You can set the measuring method at the input channels:

● Voltage measurement

● Current measurement

● Resistance measurement

● Temperature measurement

You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the

"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore

restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7,

as shown in the following table:

Table 5-55 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

(6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Measuring method,

channel n

Measuring method, channel n + 1

Deacti‐

vated

Voltage Current

4-DMU

Current

2-DMU

R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L

Disabled x x x x x

Voltage x x x

Current 4-wire trans‐

ducer

x x

Current 2-wire trans‐

ducer

x x

4-conductor resistor x

3-conductor resistor x

4-conductor thermal

resistor

3-conductor thermal

resistor

Thermocouples x x x

Example

If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring

method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

262 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Circuit for resistance measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the SM

431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:

Table 5-56 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Measuring type parameter Permissible for

channel n

Condition

Resistance

(4-conductor connection)

0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1

(1, 3, 5, 7).

Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the

resistance that is connected to channel n.

Unused channels

Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "B". You can

improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious

interference by interconnecting M- and MANA.

Measuring ranges

Set the measuring ranges using the measuring range modules, and at the "measuring method"

parameter in

STEP 7

Table 5-57 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Selected measuring

method

Measuring range

(type of sensor)

Measuring range module set‐

tings

Description

V: Voltage ± 1 V A The digitized analog values are lis‐

ted in the section "Representation of

analog values for analog input chan‐

nels" in the voltage measuring

range.

1 to 5 V

± 10 V

2DMU: Current

(2-wire transducer)

4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with

current you must connect 24 V to the

L+ and M front connector terminals.

The digitized analog values are lis‐

ted in the section "Representation of

analog values for analog input chan‐

nels" in the current measuring range.

4DMU: Current

(4-wire transducer)

4 to 20 mA

± 20 mA

C The digitized analog values are lis‐

ted in the section "Representation of

analog values for analog input chan‐

nels" in the current measuring range.

R-4L: Resistance

(4-conductor connection)

600 Ω A The digitized analog values are lis‐

ted in the section "Representation of

analog values for analog input chan‐

nels" in the resistance measuring

range.

Analog modules

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 263

Defaults

The module has the following default settings in

STEP 7

● Channels 0 to 7: "Voltage" measuring method ; "± 10 V" measuring range

You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without configuring the SM 431;

AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

5.22.1 Features

Overview

The analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 bit has the following features:

● 16 inputs for current/voltage measurement

● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel

● Resolution 13 bits

● Non-isolated between analog section and bus

● Maximum permitted common mode voltage between the channels or between the reference

potentials of the connected sensors and central grounding point 2 V DC/AC

Analog modules

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

264 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 16 x 13 bit

Tr = Transducer = Measuring

transducer

*Voltage/current sensor and ground

must be connected to building ground

of the rack

Measuring range module

Multiplexer

Control and backplane bus connection

Figure 5-30 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 16 x 13 bit

Analog modules

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 265

Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 16 x 13 bit

M1+

M2-

M3-

M4-

M5-

M6-

M7-

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

L+

M0+

M0-

M1-

M2+

M3+

M4+

M5+

M6+

M7+

M8-

M9-

M8+

M9+

M10-

M11-

M10+

M11+

M12-

M13-

M12+

M13+

M14-

M15-

M14+

M15+

CH8

CH9

CH10

CH11

CH12

CH13

CH14

CH15

L+

Voltage measurement

Current measurement

Word 0

Word 2

Word 4

Word 6

Word 8

Word 10

Word 12

Word 14

Word 16

Word 18

Word 20

Word 22

Word 24

Word 26

Word 28

Word 30

Figure 5-31 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 16 x 13 bit

Analog modules

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

266 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 16 x 13 bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 500 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs

Shielded

Maximum 200 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC (only required for supply of 2-wire

transducers)

● Reverse polarity protection Yes

● Supply voltage of the measuring transducers

● Supply current Maximum 50 mA

● Short-circuit proof Yes

● Constant measured current for resistance-based

sensor

Typ. 1.67 mA

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus No

● Between channels No

● Between channels and load voltage L+ No

Permissible potential difference

● Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 2 V DC / 2 V ACSS

● Between the inputs (UCM) 2 V DC / 2 V ACSS

Insulation tested at

● Between bus and chassis ground 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)

● Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 100 mA

● From load voltage L+ (with 16 connected fully

controlled 2-wire transducers)

Maximum 400 mA

Module power loss Typ. 2 W

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Integrating

Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per chan‐

nel)

(Not part of the response time)

● Configurable Yes

● Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz 60 / 50

● Integration time in ms 50 / 60

● Basic conversion time in ms 55 / 65

● Resolution (including overrange) 13 bits

Measured value smoothing Not possible

Basic execution time of the module in ms (all channels

enabled)

880 / 1040

Noise suppression, error limits

Analog modules

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 267

Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2 , ...

● Common mode interference (UCM < 2 V) > 86 dB

● Series-mode interference (peak value of fault <

rated value of input range)

> 60 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dB

Operational limit (throughout temperature range, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 1 V

– ± 10 V

– 1 to 5 V

± 0.65%

± 1%

● Current input

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 0.65%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 1 V

– ± 10 V

– 1 to 5 V

± 0.25%

± 0.5%

● Current input

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 0.25%

Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0.01 % / K

Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0.05%

Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to

input range)

± 0.01%

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Substitute values can be connected No

Data for selecting a sensor

Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance

● Voltage ± 1 V / 10 MΩ

± 10 V / 100 MΩ

1 to 5 V / 100 MΩ

● Current ± 20 mA / 50 Ω

4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω

Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction

limit)

20 V continuous;

75 V for 1 ms (cycle clock ratio 1 : 20)

Permissible input current for current input (destruction

limit)

40 mA

Sensor connection

● For voltage measurement Possible

Analog modules

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

268 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● For current measurement

– As 2-wire transducer

– As 4-wire transducer

Possible

● Load of 2-wire transducer Maximum 750 Ω

Analog modules

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 269

5.22.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Introduction

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit by means of measuring range

modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two consecutive channels to each type of

sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method and range.

The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the respective section.

For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the

corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431;

AI 16 x 13 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.

Parameters

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules

in the respective sections.

The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5-58 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Parameters Value range Default1Parameter

type

Scope

Measurement

● Measuring

method

Disabled U Static Channel

U Voltage

4DMU Current (4-wire

sensor)

2DMU Current (2-wire

sensor)

● Measuring range For information on configurable

measuring ranges of input chan‐

nels, refer to the chapter "Meas‐

uring methods and measuring

ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit".

±10 V

● Noise

suppression

60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz

1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

See also

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (Page 288)

General information about diagnostic messages (Page 88)

Analog modules

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

270 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.22.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Measuring methods

You can set the measuring method at the input channels:

● Voltage measurement

● Current measurement

You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the

"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore

restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7, 8/9,

10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:

Table 5-59 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Measuring method, chan‐

nel n

Measuring method, channel n + 1

Disabled Voltage

±1 V

Voltage 1 to 5

Voltage ±10 V Current 4-

DMU

Current 2-

DMU

Disabled x x x x x x

Voltage ±1 V x x

Voltage 1 to 5 V x x x

Voltage ±10 V x x x

Current 4-wire transducer x x

Current 2-wire transducer x x

Example

If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring

method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

Unused channels

Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "B". You can

improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious

interference by interconnecting M- and MANA.

For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces

the module's cycle time.

Analog modules

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 271

Measuring ranges

You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and

the "Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5-60 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Selected measuring meth‐

Measuring range

(type of sensor)

Measuring range module

settings

Description

V: Voltage ±1 V A The digitized analog values are listed in

the section "Representation of analog

values for analog input channels" in the

voltage measuring range.

1 to 5 V

± 10 V

2DMU: Current (2-wire sen‐

sor)

4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with current

you must connect 24 V to the L+ and M

front connector terminals.

The digitized analog values are listed in

the section "Representation of analog

values for analog input channels" in the

current measuring range.

4DMU: Current (4-wire sen‐

sor)

4 to 20 mA

± 20 mA

C The digitized analog values are listed in

the section "Representation of analog

values for analog input channels" in the

current measuring range.

Default

The module has the following default settings in

STEP 7

● Measuring method "voltage"

● Measuring range "± 10 V".

You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without configuring

the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit in

STEP 7

See also

Representation of analog values of analog input channels (Page 169)

Analog modules

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

272 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

5.23.1 Features

Overview

The analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit has the following features:

● 16 inputs for voltage measurement, current measurement and temperature measurement

with thermocouples (TC)

● 8 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement with resistance thermometers (RTD)

● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel

● Resolution 16 bits

● Configurable diagnostics

● Configurable diagnostic interrupt

● Configurable limit alarm

● Configurable end-of-cycle interrupt

● Analog section isolated from the CPU

● Maximum permitted common mode voltage between channels or between channel and

central grounding point 120 V AC

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 273

Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

CH0

CH1

+ 15 V

+ 5 V

0 V

-15 V

+ 5 V

0 V

L+

PGA

CH14

CH15

Meas. range

module 0

Meas. range

module 7

Diagnostics

L+ loop

Multiplexer

Opto relay

Signal

jumper-

ing

const

Bus control

Bus S7-400

Figure 5-32 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

274 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

M1+

M2-

M3-

M4-

M5-

M6-

M7-

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

L+

M0+

M0-

M1-

M2+

M3 +

M4+

M5+

M6+

M7+

M0+

M0-

IC0+

IC0-

M1+

M1-

IC1+

IC1-

M2+

M2-

IC2+

IC2-

M3 +

M3-

IC3 +

IC3-

CH0

CH2

CH4

CH6

M8-

M9-

M8+

M9+

M10-

M11-

M10+

M11+

M12-

M13-

M12+

M13+

M14-

M15-

M14+

M15+

CH8

CH9

CH10

CH11

CH12

CH13

CH14

CH15

M4+

M4-

IC4+

IC4-

M5+

M5-

IC5+

IC5-

M6+

M6-

IC6+

IC6-

M7+

M7-

IC7+

IC7-

CH8

CH10

CH12

CH14

INTF

EXTF

Word 0

Thermocouples

Voltage measurement

Current measurement

Resistance measurement

Resistance thermometer

Word 2

Word 0

Word 4

Word 6

Word 8

Word 10

Word 12

Word 14

Word 16

Word 18

Word 20

Word 22

Word 24

Word 26

Word 28

Word 30

Word 28

Figure 5-33 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 275

Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 500 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs

● For resistance-based sensor

Cable length

Shielded with input range ≦ 80 mV and with thermo‐

couples

Maximum 200 m Maximum 50 m

Voltage, current and potential

Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC (only required for supply of 2-wire

transducers)

● Reverse polarity protection Yes

Supply voltage of the measuring transducers

● Supply current Maximum 50 mA

● Short-circuit proof Yes

Constant measured current for resistance-based sen‐

sor

Typ. 1.67 mA

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus

● Between channels

● Between channels and load voltage L+

Yes

Permissible potential difference

● Between inputs and MANA (UCM)

60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

● Between the inputs (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

● Between MANA and Mintern (UISO) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Between bus and L+/M 2120 V DC

● Between bus and analog section 2120 V DC

● Between bus and chassis ground 500 V DC

● Between analog section and L+/M 500 V DC

● Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 V DC

● Between L+/M and chassis ground 2120 V DC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 700 mA

● From load voltage L+ (with 16 connected fully

controlled 2-wire transducers)

Maximum 400 mA

Module power loss Typ. 4.5 W

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Integrating

Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per chan‐

nel)

(Not part of the response time)

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

276 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Configurable Yes

● Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz 400 / 60 / 50

● Integration time in ms 2.5 / 16.7 / 20

● Basic conversion time in ms 6 / 20.1 / 23.5

● Additional conversion time for resistance

measurement with 3-wire connection in ms

12 / 40.2 / 47

● Additional conversion time for wire-break

monitoring in ms

4.3 / 4.3 / 4.3

● Additional conversion time for resistance

measurement in ms

5.5 / 5.5 / 5.5

● Resolution (including overrange) 16 / 16 / 16 bits

Measured value smoothing Configurable in 4 stages

Basic execution time of the module in ms (all channels

enabled)

96 / 322 / 376

Noise suppression, error limits

Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2 , ...

● Common mode interference (UCM < 120 Vss) > 100 dB

● Series-mode interference (peak value of fault <

rated value of input range)

> 40 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs > 70 dB

Operational limit (throughout temperature range, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 25 mV

– ± 50 mV

– ± 80 mV

– ± 250 mV

– ± 500 mV

– ± 1 V

– ± 2.5 V

– ± 5 V

– 1 to 5 V

– ± 10 V

± 0.35%

± 0.32%

± 0.31%

± 0.3%

● Current input

– 0 to 20 mA

– ± 5 mA

– ± 10 mA

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 0.3%

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 277

● Resistance measurement

– 0 to 48 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 150 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 300 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 5000 Ω; 4-wire measurement (around

6000 Ω)

– 0 to 300 Ω; 3-wire measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω; 3-wire measurement

– 0 to 5000 Ω; 3-wire measurement (around

6000 Ω)

± 0.3%

± 0.4%

● Thermocouples

– TC type B

– TC type R

– TC type s

– TC type T

– TC type E

– TC type J

– TC type K

– TC type U

– TC type L

– TC type N

± 11.5 K

± 7.3 K

± 8.3 K

± 1.7 K

± 3.2 K

± 4.3 K

± 6.2 K

± 2.8 K

± 4.2 K

± 4.4 K

● Resistance thermocouples 4-conductor standard

measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

Climatic measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

± 3.1 K

± 4.9 K

± 3.9 K

± 3.1 K

± 0.8 K

± 0.4 K

± 0.8 K

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

278 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Resistance thermocouples 3-conductor standard

measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

Climatic measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

± 4.2 K

± 6.5 K

± 5.2 K

± 4.2 K

± 1.0 K

± 0.5 K

± 1.0 K

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to input range)

● Voltage input

– ± 25 mV

– ± 50 mV

– ± 80 mV

– ± 250 mV

– ± 500 mV

– ± 1 V

– ± 2.5 V

– ± 5 V

– 1 to 5 V

– ± 10 V

± 0.23%

± 0.19%

± 0.17%

± 0.15%

● Current input

– 0 to 20 mA

– ± 5 mA

– ± 10 mA

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

± 0.15%

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 279

● Resistance measurement

– 0 to 48 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 150 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 300 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω; 4-wire measurement

– 0 to 5000 Ω; 4-wire measurement (around

6000 Ω)

– 0 to 300 Ω; 3-wire measurement

– 0 to 600 Ω; 3-wire measurement

– 0 to 5000 Ω; 3-wire measurement (around

6000 Ω)

± 0.15%

± 0.3%

● Thermocouples

– TC type B

– TC type R

– TC type s

– TC type T

– TC type E

– TC type J

– TC type K

– TC type U

– TC type L

– TC type N

± 7.6 K

± 4.8 K

± 5.4 K

± 1.1 K

± 1.8 K

± 2.3 K

± 3.4 K

± 1.7 K

± 2.3 K

± 2.6 K

● Resistance thermocouples 4-conductor standard

measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

Climatic measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

± 1.6 K

± 2.5 K

± 2.0 K

± 1.6 K

± 0.4 K

± 0.2 K

± 0.4 K

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

280 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● Resistance thermocouples 3-conductor standard

measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000´

Climatic measuring range

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

± 3.1 K

± 4.9 K

± 3.9 K

± 3.1 K

± 0.8 K

± 0.4 K

± 0.8 K

Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0.004 % / K

Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0.01%

Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to

input range)

± 0.1%

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Hardware interrupt Configurable

● Limit alarm Configurable

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions

● Group fault display

– For internal fault

– For external fault

Red LED (INTF)

Red LED (EXTF)

● Diagnostic information can be read out Yes

Substitute values can be connected No

Data for selecting a sensor

Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance

● Voltage ± 25 mV / 1 MΩ

± 50 mV / 1 MΩ

± 80 mV / 1 MΩ

± 250 mV / 1 MΩ

± 500 mV / 1 MΩ

± 1 V / 1 MΩ

± 2.5 V / 1 MΩ

± 5 V / 1 MΩ

1 to 5 V / 1 MΩ

± 10 V / 1 MΩ

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 281

● Current 0 to 20 mA / 50 Ω

± 5 mA / 50 Ω

± 10 mA / 50 Ω

± 20 mA / 50 Ω

4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω

● Resistance 0 to 48 Ω / 1 MΩ

0 to 150 Ω / 1 MΩ

0 to 300 Ω / 1 MΩ

0 to 600 Ω / 1 MΩ

0 to 6000 Ω / 1 MΩ (can be used up to 5000

Ω)

● Thermocouples TC type B / 1 MΩ

TC type R / 1 MΩ

TC type S / 1 MΩ

TC type T / 1 MΩ

TC type E / 1 MΩ

TC type J / 1 MΩ

TC type K / 1 MΩ

TC type U / 1 MΩ

TC type L / 1 MΩ

TC type N / 1 MΩ

● Resistance thermometer Pt 100 / 1 MΩ

Pt 200 / 1 MΩ

Pt 500 / 1 MΩ

Pt 1000 / 1 MΩ

Ni 100 / 1 MΩ

Ni 1000 / 1 MΩ

Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction

limit)

Maximum 18 V continuous;

75 V for 1 ms (cycle clock ratio 1 : 20)

Permissible input current for current input (destruction

limit)

40 mA

Sensor connection

● For voltage measurement Possible

● For current measurement

– As 2-wire transducer

– As 4-wire transducer

Possible

● For resistance measurement

– With 2-wire connection

–

– With 3-wire connection

– With 4-wire connection

Possible;

line resistance is also measured

Possible

● Load of 2-wire transducer Maximum 750 Ω

Characteristic curve linearization Configurable

● For thermocouples Type B, R, S, T, E, J, K, U, L, N

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

282 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● For resistance thermometers Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni

1000

Temperature compensation Yes, configurable

● Internal temperature compensation No

● External temperature compensation with

compensating box

Possible

● External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Possible

● Compensation for definable reference junction

temperature

Possible

Technical unit for temperature measurement Degrees Celsius

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 283

5.23.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit by means of measuring range

modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel

to each type of sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method

and range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the respective

section.

For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the

corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431;

AI 16 x 16 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.

Parameters

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules

in the respective sections.

The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5-61 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1

● Hardware interrupt1

Yes/no

Dynamic Module

● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module

Hardware interrupt trigger

● End of scan cycle reached at input Yes/no No Static Channel

● High limit

● Low limit

32511 to - 32512

-32512 to 32511

- Dynamic Channel

Diagnostics

● Wire break

● Reference channel error

● Underflow

● Overflow

● Short-circuit to M

Yes/no

Static Channel

Measurement

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

284 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

● Measuring method Disabled U Static Channel

U Voltage

4DMU Current

(4-wire transducer)

2DMU Current

(2-wire transducer)

R-4L Resistance

(4-conductor connec‐

tion)

R-3L Resistance

(3-conductor connec‐

tion)

RTD-4L Thermal resistance

(linear, 4-wire connec‐

tion)

RTD-3L Thermal resistance (lin‐

ear,

3-conductor connection)

TC-L Thermocouple (linear)

● Measuring range For information on configurable meas‐

uring ranges of input channels, refer to

the section "Measuring methods and

measuring ranges of SM 431; Ai 16x16

Bit".

±10 V

● Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 0,00 oC Dynamic Module

● Noise suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz

● Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None

● Reference junction None

RTD on Channel 0

Reference temperature value

None

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in

ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

A point to note about channels for hardware interrupts with the end of scan cycle trigger

You can configure hardware interrupts for the end of scan cycle for one of the 16 channels

because the module can only trigger these interrupts on one channel.

Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the

respective section.

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 285

The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles, in the case of a step

response, after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on

the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

100

60 8020 10040

Signal variation in

percent

Step response for any analog input signal

Smoothing Low:

average:

high:

Module cycles

Figure 5-34 Step response of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Displaying parameter assignment errors

The SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the

displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.

Table 5-62 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Incorrect parameter assign‐

ment

Possible display Explanation

Of the module ● Module error

● Internal error

● Incorrect parameters

You will find explanations of the di‐

agnostics information in the re‐

spective tables.

Affecting certain channels ● Module error

● Internal error

● Channel error

● Incorrect parameters

● Channel information available

● Channel error vector

● Channel parameter

assignment error

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

286 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

See also

Parameters of analog input modules (Page 201)

General information about diagnostic messages (Page 88)

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 287

5.23.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Measuring methods

You can set the measuring method at the input channels:

● Voltage measurement

● Current measurement

● Resistance measurement

● Temperature measurement

You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the

"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore

restrictions as regards to the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7,

8/9, 10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:

Table 5-63 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Measuring method, channel

Measuring method channel n+1

deacti‐

vated

Voltage Current

4-DMU

Current

2-DMU

R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L

Disabled x x x x x

Voltage x x x

Current 4-wire transducer x x

Current 2-wire transducer x x

4-conductor resistor x

3-conductor resistor x

Four-wire thermal resistor x

3-wire thermal

resistor

Thermocouples x x x

Example

If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring

method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

288 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Circuit for resistance and temperature measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the SM

431; AI 16 x 16 Bit:

Table 5-64 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Measuring type parameter Permissible for

channel n

Condition

Resistance

(4-conductor connection)

0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12

or 14

You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels

n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15).

Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the

resistance that is connected to channel n.

Resistance

(3-conductor connection)

0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12

or 14

Thermal resistance

(linear, 4-wire connection)

0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12

or 14

Thermal resistance

(linear, 3-wire connection)

0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12

or 14

Thermocouple (linear) 0 to 15 You can select the reference junction. It is only advisable to

specify a reference junction with thermocouples.

Circuit for reference junction compensation for thermocouples

If you select "RTD on Channel 0" as a reference junction for reference junction compensation

for thermocouples, the following applies:

Table 5-65 Reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Reference junction parameters Permissible for channel n Condition

RTD on Channel 0 2 to 15 You must connect and configure on channel 0 a

resistance thermometer with linearization, a 3- or

4-conductor connection in climatic range. This

means that channels 0 and 1 are assigned.

Reason: If channel 0 is to be used as the refer‐

ence junction, a resistance-type sensor must be

connected there to record absolute temperatures

in the climatic range.

Unused channels

Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "A". You can

improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious

interference by short-circuiting the channels.

For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces

the module's cycle time.

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 289

Measuring ranges

You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and

the "Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5-66 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Selected measuring method Measuring range

(type of sensor)

Measuring range module set‐

tings

Description

V: Voltage ± 25 mV

± 50 mV

± 80 mV

± 250 mV

± 500 mV

± 1 V

± 2.5 V

± 5 V

1 to 5 V

± 10 V

A The digitized analog values

are listed in the section "Rep‐

resentation of analog values

for analog input channels" in

the voltage measuring range.

2DMU: Current (2-wire sen‐

sor)

4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers

with current you must con‐

nect 24 V to the L+ and M

front connector terminals.

The digitized analog values

are listed in the section "Rep‐

resentation of analog values

for analog input channels" in

the current measuring range.

4DMU: Current (4-wire sen‐

sor)

± 5 mA

± 10 mA

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

± 20 mA

C The digitized analog values

are listed in the section "Rep‐

resentation of analog values

for analog input channels" in

the current measuring range.

R-3L: Resistance

(3-conductor connection)

300 Ω

600 Ω

6000 Ω

(maximum 5000 Ω)

A The digitized analog values

are listed in the section "Rep‐

resentation of analog values

for analog input channels" in

the resistance measuring

range.

R-4L: Resistance

(4-conductor connection)

48 Ω

150 Ω

300 Ω

600 Ω

6000 Ω

(maximum 5000 Ω)

TC-L: Thermocouple (linear)

(Temperature measurement)

Type B

Type N

Type E

Type R

Type S

Type J

Type L

Type T

Type K

Type U

A The digitized analog values

are listed in the section "Rep‐

resentation of analog values

for analog input channels" in

the temperature range.

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

290 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Selected measuring method Measuring range

(type of sensor)

Measuring range module set‐

tings

Description

RTD-3L: Thermal resistance

(linear, 3-conductor connec‐

tion) (temperature measure‐

ment)

Pt 100 Climatic

Pt 200 Climatic

Pt 500 Climatic

Pt 1000 Climatic

Ni 100 Climatic

Ni 1000 Climatic

Pt 100 Standard

Pt 200 Standard

Pt 500 Standard

Pt 1000 Standard

Ni 100 Standard

Ni 1000 Standard

A The digitized analog values

are listed in the section "Rep‐

resentation of analog values

for analog input channels" in

the temperature range.

RTD-4L: Thermal resistance

(linear, 4-conductor connec‐

tion) (temperature measure‐

ment)

Default

The "voltage" measuring method and "± 10 V" measuring range are set by default in STEP 7.

You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without configuring

the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.

Wire break monitoring

The wire break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (TC, RTD) or

resistance measurements. Always configure the wire break check in these cases as this

ensures that in the event of a wire break the measured value provided by the module accepts

the data for overrun 7FFFH.

Special characteristics of the wire break check for the voltage measurement methods

In some transducers, incorrect measured values may occur due to the fact that the wire break

check is enabled. If so, disable the wire break check.

Reason: Some transducers try to correct the test current and in doing so corrupt the setpoint

value they provide.

Points to note about the wire break check when current sensors are connected

A wire break check of current sensors is not possible for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit except in

life-zero areas. You can therefore only configure the wire break check for the "Current (4-wire

transducer)" measuring method and the "4 to 20 mA" measuring range.

Checking for reference channel errors when connecting thermocouples

If you have connected a thermocouple, you can then enable the "Reference channel error"

diagnostics if you have configured an "RTD on Channel 0" or "Reference Temperature Value"

reference junction.

Analog modules

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 291

Points to note about checking for "Underflow" with some measuring methods and measuring ranges

There is now underflow in life-zero areas. A value that is too low or is negative is interpreted

as a wire break. You can therefore not configure the underflow check for the SM 431; AI 16 x

16 Bit for the following measuring methods and ranges:

Table 5-67 Points to note when checking for "Underflow"

Measuring method Measuring range

Voltage 1 to 5 V

Current (4-wire sensor) 4 to 20 mA

Current (2-wire sensor) 4 to 20 mA

Points to note about the "Short-circuit to M" diagnostics

You can only configure the check for "Short-circuit to M" for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit for the

"Current (2-wire transducer)" measuring method.

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

(6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

5.24.1 Features

Overview

The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit has the following features:

● 8 differential inputs for resistance thermometer

● Resistance thermometer configurable

● Linearization of characteristic curves of the resistance thermometer

● Resolution 16 bits

● Update rate 25 ms for 8 channels

● Configurable diagnostics

● Configurable diagnostic interrupt

● Configurable limit alarm

● Analog section isolated from CPU

● The maximum permitted common mode voltage between channels and central grounding

point is 120 V AC

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

292 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Calibration software

The calibration software is only available over the Internet. You will find the latest version of

the calibration software under entry ID 12443337.

Following the installation of this software, you can specify user-specific calibration values for

each channel and each input range. Further information can be found under ID 12436891 on

the Customer Support FAQ page.

Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

SO+0

SE+0

SE-0

AGND

SO+7

SE+7

SE-7

AGND

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

Electrical

isolation

A/Dconverter

Backplane

bus

interface

Internal

power supply

Bus S7-400

Figure 5-35 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 293

Note

An external protective network is required for the signal lines in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5

(12 V Blitzductor, model CT919-506, connected in series with all inputs as recommended by

the manufacturer).

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

294 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

SO0 CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

SE+0

SE-0

AGND

INTF

EXTF

SO1

SE+1

SE-1

AGND

SO2

SE+2

SE-2

AGND

SO3

SE+3

SE-3

AGND

SO4

SE+4

SE-4

AGND

SO5

SE+5

SE-5

AGND

SO6

SE+6

SE-6

AGND

SO7

SE+7

SE-7

AGND

Word 0

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

Word 7

Figure 5-36 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 295

Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 650 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs 8

Cable length

● Shielded

Maximum 200 m

Voltage, current and potential

Constant current for resistance-based sensor Typ. 1 mA

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus

● Between channels

Yes

Permissible potential difference

Between MANA and Mintern (UISO) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at 1500 V DC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 650 mA

Module power loss Typ. 3.3 W

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Integrating

Integration time/conversion time/resolution

● Configurable Yes

● Basic conversion time

(all channels enabled)

8 ms/23 ms/25 ms

Additional conversion time / repeat rate

● Wire-break monitoring 110 ms/4 s

● 3-wire compensation 110 ms/390 s

● Internal self-calibration

No interference frequency suppression

50/60 Hz

50 ms/110 s

● Resolution, including sign 210 ms/390 s

16 bits

● Interference voltage suppression for interference

frequency f1 in Hz

None/50/60

Measured value smoothing Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages

Basic response time of the module (all channels ena‐

bled)

8 ms/23 ms/25 ms

Noise suppression, error limits

Noise suppression for f = n (fl ± 1%), (f1 = interf. freq.) n = 1, 2, ...

● Common mode interference (Ucm < 120 V) > 100 dB

● Series-mode interference (peak value of

interference < rated value of input range)

> 50 dB

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

296 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Crosstalk between the inputs > 70 dB

Operational limit (throughout temperature range, relative to input range)

● RTD input

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

RTD-4L RTD-3L

±1.8 °C ± 3.4 °C

± 0.8 °C ± 1.7 °C

± 0.4 °C ± 0.7 °C

± 0.3 °C ± 0.4 °C

± 1.5 °C ± 2.1 °C

± 0.2 °C ± 0.3 °C

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to input range)

● RTD input

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

RTD-4L RTD-3L

± 0.5 °C ± 1.0 °C

± 0.3 °C ± 0.5 °C

± 0.3 °C ± 0.4 °C

± 0.2 °C ± 0.2 °C

± 0.3 °C ± 0.6 °C

± 0.2 °C ± 0.2 °C

Linearity error (relative to input range)

Additional fault

● RTD input

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

RTD-4L RTD-3L

± 0.2 °C ± 0.3 °C

± 0.2 °C ± 0.2 °C

± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C

± 0.1 °C ± 0.2 °C

± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C

Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to

input range)

Additional fault

● RTD input

– Pt 100

– Pt 200

– Pt 500

– Pt 1000

– Ni 100

– Ni 1000

RTD-4L RTD-3L

± 0.2 °C ± 0.3 °C

± 0.2 °C ± 0.2 °C

± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C

± 0.1 °C ± 0.2 °C

± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Hardware interrupt Configurable

● Hardware interrupt when limit value exceeded Configurable

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 297

● Group fault display

– For internal fault

– For external fault

– Diagnostic information can be read out

Red LED (INTF)

Red LED (EXTF)

Possible

Data for selecting a sensor

Input range (rated values) / input resistance

● Resistance thermometer Pt 100/> 10M

Pt 200/> 10M

Pt 500/> 10M

Pt 1000/> 10M

Ni 100/> 10M

Ni 1000/> 10M

Maximum input voltage for voltage input

(destruction limit)

35 V continuous;

75 V for max. 1 s

(duty factor 1:20)

Connection of encoder

● For resistance measurement with 3-wire connection Possible

(max. permissible line resistance 10 Ohm)

● With 4-wire connection Possible

Characteristic curve linearization Configurable

For RTD resistance temperature detection Pt100...1000,

0.00385 Alpha to

DIN IEC 751

Ni 100...1000,

0.00618 Alpha to

DIN 43760

1 Measuring range

● PT100, PT200 -200 °C to +850 °C

● PT 500 -200 °C to +800 °C

● PT 1000 -200 °C to +240 °C

● Ni 100 -60 °C to +250 °C

● Ni 1000 -60 °C to +130 °C

User data in engineering format Degrees C/

Degrees F

1 7KF10 does not support all measuring ranges for S7.

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

298 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.24.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the operating mode of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit in STEP 7.

Parameters

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules

in the respective sections.

The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5-68 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1

● Hardware interrupt1

Yes/no

Dynamic Module

● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module

Trigger for hardware interrupt3) - Dynamic Channel

● High limit

● Low limit

32767 to - 32768

- 32768 to 32767

Diagnostics

● Wire break

● Underflow

● Overflow

Yes/no

Static Channel

Measurement

● Measuring method Disabled RTD-3L

RTD-4L Thermal resistance

(linear, 4-conductor con‐

nection)

RTD-3L Thermal resistance

(linear, 3-conductor con‐

nection)

● Measuring range Refer to the respective section for the

measuring ranges of the input channels

that you can set.

Pt 100

Standard

● Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit Degrees

Celsius

Static Module

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 299

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

● Temperature coefficient for

temperature measurement

with thermal resistance (RTD)

For platinum (Pt)

0.00385 Ω/Ω/ °C

0.003916 Ω/Ω/ °C

0.003902 Ω/Ω/ °C

0.003920 Ω/Ω/ °C

For nickel (Ni)

0.00618 Ω/Ω/ °C

0.00672 Ω/Ω/ °C

0,00385 Static Channel

● Noise suppression 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none 60 Hz

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Static Channel

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in

ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

3 The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor.

Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the

respective section.

The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles, in the case of a step

response, after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on

the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

100

60 8020 10040

Signal variation in

percent

Step response for any analog input signal

Smoothing Low:

average:

high:

Module cycles

Figure 5-37 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

300 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Displaying parameter assignment errors

The SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit is capable of diagnostics. Below you will find an overview of

the displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.

Table 5-69 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Incorrect parameter as‐

signment

Possible display Explanation

Of the module ● Module error

● Internal error

● Incorrect parameters

● No module parameters

You will find explanations of

the diagnostics information in

the respective tables.

Affecting certain channels ● Module error

● Internal error

● Channel error

● Incorrect parameters

● Channel information available

● Channel error vector

● Channel parameter assignment error

● User calibration does not correspond

to the parameter assignment

See also

Parameters of analog input modules (Page 201)

Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules (Page 196)

General information about diagnostic messages (Page 88)

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 301

5.24.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Measuring methods

You can set the temperature measurement as the measuring method for the input channels.

Unused channels

For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces

the module's cycle time.

Measuring ranges

Set the measuring ranges by means of the "Measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5-70 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Selected measuring method Measuring range Description

RTD-3L: Thermal resistance

(linear, 3-conductor connec‐

tion)

(temperature measurement)

Pt 100 Standard

Pt 200 Standard

Pt 500 Standard

Pt 1000 Standard

Ni 100 Standard

Ni 1000 Standard

The digitized analog values are listed in the

section "Analog Values of the Analog Input

Channels" in the temperature range.

RTD-4L: Thermal resistance

(linear, 4-conductor connec‐

tion)

(temperature measurement)

Default

The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are "Thermal resistor (linear, 3-conductor

connection)" for the measuring method and "Pt 100 Standard" for the measuring range. You

can use this measuring method with this measuring range without configuring the SM 431; AI

8 x RTD x 16 Bit with STEP 7.

See also

Representation of analog values of analog input channels (Page 169)

Analog modules

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

302 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

5.25.1 Features

Overview

The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit has the following features:

● 8 isolated differential inputs for voltage/current/ temperature measurement

● 26 measuring range settings

● Linearization of characteristic curves of the thermocouple

● Resolution 16 bits

● Configurable diagnostics

● Configurable diagnostic interrupt

● Configurable limit alarm

● Analog section isolated from CPU

● Maximum permitted common mode voltage between channels or between channel and

central grounding point 120 V AC

● Field connection (6ES7431-7K00-6AA0) with internal reference temperature (included in

scope of delivery)

Calibration software

The calibration software is only available over the Internet. You will find the latest version of

the calibration software under entry ID 12443337.

Following the installation of this software, you can specify user-specific calibration values for

each channel and each input range. Further information can be found under ID 12436891 on

the Customer Support FAQ page.

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 303

Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

M0+

M0-

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

CH0

A/Dconverter

Internal

supply

Backplane

bus interface Bus S7-400

Figure 5-38 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Note

An external protective network for the signal lines is required in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5

(12 V Blitzductor, model CT919-506, connected in series with all inputs as recommended by

the manufacturer).

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

304 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

R0 CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

M0+

M0-

INTF

EXTF

M1+

M1-

M2+

M2-

M3 +

M3-

M4+

M4-

M5+

M5-

M6+

M6-

M7+

M7-

M0+

M0-

M1+

M1-

M2+

M2-

M3 +

M3-

M4+

M4-

M5+

M5-

M6+

M6-

M7+

M7-

6ES7431-7KF00-6AA06ES7492-1AL00-0AA0

Optional connector

(screw-type)

Connector with

temperature reference

Thermocouples

Voltage measurement

Current measurement

Word 0

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

Word 7

Figure 5-39 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 305

Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 650 g

Module-specific data

Number of inputs 8

Cable length

● Shielded

200 m

Voltage, current and potential

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels Yes

In groups of 1

Permissible potential difference

● between the inputs (UCM)60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

● Between MANA and Mintern (UISO)60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at 1500 V DC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V)

max. 1200 mA

Module power loss typical 4.6 W

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Integrating

Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per chan‐

nel)

● Configurable Yes

● Integration time in ms 2.5 16.7 20 100

● Basic conversion time in ms 10 16.7 20 100

● Resolution, including sign 16 bits

● Interference voltage suppression

● for interfering frequency f1 in Hz

400 60 50 10

● Measured value smoothing Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages

● Basic response time of the module (all channels

enabled)

40 67 80 400

Noise suppression, error limits

Noise suppression for f = nx(fl ± 1%), (f1 = interfering frequency) n = 1, 2, ...

● Common mode interference (Ucm < 120 V)

Current, thermocouple and voltage ranges < 2.5 V > 120 dB

Voltage ranges ≥2.5 V > 95 dB

Crosstalk between inputs (Ucm < 120 V)

Current, thermocouple and voltage ranges ≥ 2.5 V > 120 dB

Voltage range ≥ 2.5 V > 95 dB

● Series-mode interference (peak value of

interference < rated value of input range)

> 80 dB

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

306 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Operational limit (throughout temperature range, relative to input range)

● Voltage input ± 0.30 %

● Current input ± 0.50 %

● Temperature error (relative to input range)2

Over the temperature range of:

Type U

-100 °C to 600 °C

± 3.6 °C

Type L

0 °C to 900 °C

± 2.9 °C

Type T

-100 °C to 400 °C

± 2.1 °C

Type J

-100 °C to 1200 °C

± 5.0 °C

Type E

-100 °C to 1000 °C

± 4.6 °C

Type K

0 °C to 1372 °C

± 3.8 °C

Type N

0 °C to 1300 °C

± 5.7 °C

Type S

200 °C to 1769 °C

± 5.3 °C

Type R

200 °C to 1769 °C

± 6.7 °C

Type B

400 °C to 1820 °C

± 7.3 °C

Noise suppression, error limits (continuation)

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to input range)

● Input voltage ± 0.10 %

● Input current ± 0.17%

● Temperature error (relative to input range)2 Over temperature range of:

Type U

-100 °C to 600 °C

± 1.2 °C

Type L

0 °C to 900 °C

± 1.0 °C

Type T

-100 °C to 400 °C

± 0.7 °C

Type J

-100 °C to 1200 °C

± 1.7 °C

Type E

-100 °C to 1000 °C

± 1.5 °C

Type K

0 °C to 1372 °C

± 1.3 °C

Type N

0 °C to 1300 °C

± 1.9 °C

Type S

200 °C to 1769 °C

± 1.8 °C

Type R

200 °C to 1769 °C

± 2.2 °C

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 307

Type B

400 °C to 1820 °C

± 2.2 °C

Linearity error (relative to input range) Additional error

± 0.05%

Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to

input range)

Additional error

± 0.05%

Connection for compensation of cold connection point 6ES7431-7KF00-

6AA0

Operational limit

● Internal temperature compensation error Additional error

± 2.0%

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Hardware interrupt Configurable

● Hardware interrupt when limit value exceeded Configurable

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

● Group fault display Configurable

For internal fault Red LED (INTF)

For external fault Red LED (EXTF)

Diagnostic information can be read out Possible

Monitoring for

● wire break

Data for selecting a sensor

Input range (rated values) / input resistance

● Voltage ± 25 mV > 2 MΩ

± 50 mV > 2 MΩ

± 80 mV > 2 MΩ

± 100 mV > 2 MΩ

± 250 mV > 2 MΩ

± 500 mV > 2 MΩ

± 1 V > 2 MΩ

± 2.5 V > 2 MΩ

± 5 V > 2 MΩ

+ 1 to 5 V > 2 MΩ

± 10 V > 2 MΩ

● Current ± 20 mA 50 Ω

+ 4 to 20 mA 50 Ω

± 10 mA 50 Ω

± 5 mA 50 Ω

± 3,2 mA 50 Ω

● Thermocouple Types B, N, > 2 MΩ

E, R, S, J, L,

T, K, U

Maximum input voltage

for voltage input (destruction limit)

35 V continuous;

75 V for max. 1 s

(duty factor 1:20)

Maximum input current for current input (destruction

limit)

32 mA

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

308 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Connection of encoder

● at measuring voltage Possible

● for current measurement as 4-wire transducer Possible

Characteristic curve linearization

● For thermocouples Types B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U

Temperature compensation Yes, configurable

● Internal temperature compensation Possible

User data in engineering format Degrees C/ degrees F

1 The 6ES7431-7KFOO-0AB0 does not support the values defined for S7 for the overreaches and sub-

ranges of thermocouples. Depending on the situation, underflow (32768) or overflow (327767) is dis‐

played when the module reaches the end of the thermocouple operating range defined for S7.

2 Operation of thermocouples above the specified temperatures is possible.

The specified accuracy is at the lower end of the range and is better at higher temperatures.

The accuracy of the thermocouple module at temperatures other than those specified can be calculated

using the limit values for the accuracy of input voltage and emf/°C of the thermocouple at the required

temperature.

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 309

5.25.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the operating mode of the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit in STEP 7.

Parameters

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules

in the respective sections.

The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5-71 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

Enable

● Diagnostic interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Hardware interrupt1Yes/no No Dynamic

● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static

Trigger for hardware interrupt3)

● High limit 32767 to - 32768 - Dynamic Channel

● Low limit - 32768 to 32767 -

Diagnostics

● Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel

● Reference channel error Yes/no No

● Underflow Yes/no No

● Overflow Yes/no No

Measurement

● Measuring method Disabled TC-L Static Channel

U Voltage

4DMU Current

(4-wire transduc‐

er)

TC-L Thermocouple

(linear)

● Measuring range For information on configurable

measuring ranges of input chan‐

nels, refer to the section "Measur‐

ing methods and measuring rang‐

es of SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit".

Type J

● Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC

-327.68 to 327.67 oC

100 oC Dynamic Module

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

310 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Parameters Value range Default2Parameter

type

Scope

● Temperature unit4Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahren‐

heit

Degrees Celsius Static Module

● Noise suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 60 Hz

● Smoothing None, weak, medium, strong None

● Reference junction (reference

to the cold junction)

None

Internal

Reference temperature value dy‐

namic

Internal Static Module

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in

ER-1/ER-2.

2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

3 The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor.

4 Valid for the format of the output temperature and the dynamic reference temperature

Measured value smoothing

For generally valid information on analog value smoothing, refer to the section "Conversion

and cycle and response times of analog modules".

The cycle time of the module is a constant in the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit that is not dependent

on the number of channels that are enabled. It therefore has no effect on the step response,

which is defined by the parameter assignment of interference frequency suppression and

smoothing.

Step response

Table 5-72 How response times depend on the configured interference frequency suppression and smoothing of the SM

431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Interference frequency sup‐

pression in Hz

Response time in ms with configured smoothing:

None Weak Medium Strong

10 100 200 1600 3200

50 20 40 320 640

60 16,7 33,3 267 533

400 10 20 160 320

The following figures illustrate the contents of table above. They show the response time

required for a step response before the smoothed analog value is almost applied to 100%.

The figures apply to every change of signal at an analog input.

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 311

Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 10 Hz

100

800

100

200

1600 3200

2400

Signal variation in

percent

Step response for any analog input signal

Smoothing

None:

Low:

average:

high:

Response time in ms

Figure 5-40 Step response at 10 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 50 Hz

100

016080 240 320 400 480 560 64040

Signal variation in

percent

Step response for any analog input signal

Smoothing

None:

Low:

average:

high:

Response time in ms

Figure 5-41 Step response at 50 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

312 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 60 Hz

100

016080 240 320 400 480 560 640

16,7 267 533

33,3

Signal variation in

percent

Step response for any analog input signal

Smoothing

None:

Low:

average:

high:

Response time in ms

Figure 5-42 Step response at 60 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 400 Hz

100

016080 240 320 400 480 560 640

Signal variation in

percent

Step response for any analog input signal

Smoothing

None:

Low:

average:

high:

Response time in ms

Figure 5-43 Step response at 400 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 313

Displaying parameter assignment errors

The SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the

displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.

Table 5-73 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Incorrect parameter as‐

signment

Possible display Explanation

Of the module ● Module error

● Internal error

● Incorrect parameters

● No module parameters

You will find explanations of

the diagnostics information in

the respective tables.

Affecting certain channels ● Module error

● Internal error

● Channel error

● Incorrect parameters

● Channel information available

● Channel error vector

● Channel parameter assignment error

● User calibration does not correspond

to the parameter assignment

See also

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules (Page 196)

General information about diagnostic messages (Page 88)

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

314 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.25.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Measuring methods

You can set the measuring method at the input channels:

● Voltage measurement

● Current measurement

● Temperature measurement

You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels

For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces

the module's cycle time.

Measuring ranges

Set the measuring ranges by means of the "Measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5-74 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Selected measuring method Measuring range Description

V: Voltage ±25 mV

±50 mV

±80 mV

±100 mV

±250 mV

±500 mV

±1 V

±2.5 V

±5 V

±10 V

from 1 to 5 V

The digitized analog values are listed in the sec‐

tion "Representation of analog values for analog

input channels" in the voltage measuring range.

4DMU: Current (4-wire sensor) ±3.2 mA

±5 mA

±10 mA

±20 mA

from 0 to 20 mA

from 4 to 20 mA

The digitized analog values are listed in the sec‐

tion "Representation of analog values for analog

input channels" in the current measuring range.

TC-L: Thermocouple (linear)

(Temperature measurement)

Type B

Type N

Type E

Type R

Type S

Type J

Type L

Type T

Type K

Type U

The digitized analog values are listed in the sec‐

tion "Representation of analog values for analog

input channels" in the temperature range.

Analog modules

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 315

Default

The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are "Thermocouple (linear)" for the measuring

method and "Type J" for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring

method and measuring range without configuring the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

5.26.1 Features

Overview

SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit has the following properties:

● 8 outputs

● the output can be selected for each channel as

– Voltage output

– current output

● Resolution 13 bits

● Analog section potential-free relative to CPU and load voltage

● Maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels or between channels

and MANA 3 V DC

Analog modules

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

316 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Block diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

24 V

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

CH0

L+/M

Bus control

Bus S7-400

Analog supply

Figure 5-44 Block diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 317

Connection diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

S0-

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

L+

QV0

S0+

QI0

QI1

QI2

QI3

CH0

CH2

CH3

QI4

QI5

QI6

QI7

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

L+

MANA

S1-

QV1

S1 +

S2-

QV2

S2+

S3-

QV3

S3 +

S4-

QV4

S4+

S5-

QV5

S5+

S6-

QV6

S6+

S7-

QV7

S7+

CH1

MANA

Voltage output Current output

Word 0

Word 2

Word 4

Word 6

Word 8

Word 10

Word 12

Word 14

Word 0

Word 2

Word 4

Word 6

Word 8

Word 10

Word 12

Word 14

Figure 5-45 Connection diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

318 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Technical specifications of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210

Weight ca. 650 g

Module-specific data

Number of outputs 8

Cable length

● Shielded

Maximum 200 m

Voltage, current and potential

Supply voltage of electronics L+ 24 V DC

Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC

● Reverse polarity protection Yes

Electrical isolation

● Between channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between channels No

● Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes

Permissible potential difference

● between the outputs (UCM) 3 V DC

● between S- and MANA (UCM) 3 V DC

● Between MANA and Mintern (UISO) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)

Insulation tested at

● Between bus and L+/M 2120 V DC

● Between bus and analog section 2120 V DC

● Between bus and chassis ground 500 V DC

● Between analog section and L+/M 500 V DC

● Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 V DC

● Between L+/M and chassis ground 2120 V DC

Current consumption

● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 150 mA

● Supply and load voltage L+ (at rated load) Maximum 400 mA

● Supply and load voltage L + (no load) Maximum 200 mA

Module power loss typ. 9 W

Formation of analog values

Resolution (including overrange) 13 bits

Conversion time (per channel)

● in the ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA 420 µs

● in all ranges 300 µs

Basic execution time of the module (all channels enabled)

● in the ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA 3.36 ms

● in all other ranges 2.4 ms

Settling time

● for resistive load 0.1 ms

Analog modules

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 319

● for capacitive load 3.5 ms

● for inductive load 0.5 ms

Noise suppression, error limits

Noise suppression for f = n (f1 ± 1%), (f1 = interfering frequency) n= 1.2 ...

● Common mode interference (UCM < AC 3 Vss / 50

Hz)

> 60 dB

Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, relative to output range)

● Voltage output

– ± 10 V

– 0 to 10 V

– 1 to 5 V

± 0.5%

● current output

– ± 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mV

± 1%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to output range)

● Voltage output

– ± 10 V

– 0 to 10 V

– 1 to 5 V

± 0.5%

● current output

– ± 20 mA

– 0 to 20 mA

± 0.5%

Temperature error (relative to output range) ± 0.02 % / K

Linearity error (relative to output range) ± 0.05%

Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25 °C, relating to

output range)

± 0.05%

Output ripple; bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz (relative to output

range)

± 0.05%

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Substitute values can be connected No

Data for selecting an actuator

Output range (nominal values)

● Voltage ± 10 V0 to 10 V1 to 5 V

● Current ± 20 mA

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Load impedance (in rated range of output)

● at voltage outputs

– capacitive load

min. 1 kΩ

max. 1 µF

Analog modules

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

320 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● at current outputs

– inductive load

max. 500 Ω

600 Ω at reduced UCM to < 1 V

max. 1 mH

Voltage output

● Short-circuit protection Yes

● Short-circuit-current Maximum 30 mA

current output

● No-load voltage max. 19 V

Destruction limit against externally applied voltages / currents

● Voltage at the outputs against MANA max. 20 V continuous

75 V for1 ms (duty cycle 1:20

● Current max. 40 mA continuous

Connection of actuators

● for voltage output

– 2-wire connection

– 4-wire connection (measurement cable)

possible, without compensation of line resis‐

tances

Possible

● for current output

– 2-wire connection

Possible

Analog modules

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 321

5.26.2 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Parameters

You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules

in the respective sections.

For an overview of configurable parameters and defaults, refer to the "Parameters of analog

output modules" table.

Assigning parameters to channels

The parameters can be set separately at each output channel of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit. You

can thus assign individual parameters to each output channel.

See also

General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)

Analog modules

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

322 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

5.26.3 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Configuration of analog output circuits

You can configure the outputs for operation as voltage or current outputs, or disable these.

You configure the output circuits at the "output type" parameter in

STEP 7

Unused channels

To make sure that unused output channels of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit are de-energized, set the

"Output type" parameter to "deactivated" and leave the terminal open.

Output ranges

You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in

STEP 7

Table 5-75 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Selected type of output Output range Description

Voltage 1 V to 5 V

0 V to 10 V

± 10 V

The digitized analog values are listed in

the section "Representation of analog

values for analog output channels" in

the voltage or current output range.

Current 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

± 20 mA

Default

The output type "Voltage" and output range "± 10 V" are set by default at the module. You can

always use this combination of output type and range without having to program the SM 432;

AO 8 x 13 Bit in

STEP 7

Analog modules

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 323

Analog modules

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

324 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Interface modules 6

6.1 Common features of the interface modules

Function

Interface modules (a send IM and a receive IM) are required if one or more expansion racks

(ER) are to be connected to a central rack (CR). This configuration is described in the

Installation manual

Configuration

Interface modules must always be used together. The send modules (send IMs) are inserted

in the CR, whilst the corresponding receive modules (receive IMs) are plugged into the series-

connected ER.

Table 6-1 Interface modules of the S7-400

Partner Areas of application

IM 460-0

IM 461-0

Send IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus

Receive IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus

IM 460-1

IM 461-1

Send IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus

Receive IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus

IM 460-3

IM 461-3

Send IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus

Receive IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus

IM 460-4

IM 461-4

Send IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus

Receive IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus

Overview of the connections

Note the rules for connections in the section after next.

Table 6-2 Overview of the connections

Local connection Remote connection

Send IM 460-0 460-1 460-3 460-4

Receive IM 461-0 461-1 461-3 461-4

Max. number of connectable EMs per line 4 1 4 4

Max. distance 5 m 1.5 m 102.25 m 605 m

V transfer No Yes No No

Max. current transfer per interface - 5 A - -

Communication bus transmission Yes No Yes No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 325

Connection possibilities for central racks and expansion racks

IM 460-0

IM 460-1

IM 460-3

IM 461-0 IM 461-0

IM 461-1

IM 461-3 IM 461-3

IM 460-4

IM 461-4 IM 461-4

Central controller

Expansion without 5-V transmission at local range

Expansion device EC 1 Expansion device EC 4

Expansion with 5-V transmission in local range

Expansion device EC 1

Line length max. 5 m

Line length max. 1.5 m

Expansion device EC 1 Expansion device EC 4

Expansion in plant-wide field environment

Line length max. 102.25 m

Expansion device EC 1 Expansion device EC 4

Line length max. 605 m

Interface modules

6.1 Common features of the interface modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

326 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Rules for connection

When you connect a central rack to expansion racks, you must observe the following rules:

● You can connect up to 21 ERs of the S7-400 to one CR.

● The ERs are assigned numbers to identify them. The rack number must be set on the coding

switch of the receive IM. Any rack number between 1 and 21 may be assigned. Numbers

must not be duplicated.

● You may insert up to six send IMs in one CR. However, only two send IMs with 5 V transfer

are allowed in one CR.

● Each line connected to the interface of a send IM can comprise up to four ERs (without 5

V transfer) or one ER (with 5 V transfer).

● The exchange of data via the communication bus is limited to 7 racks, meaning the CR and

ER numbers 1 to 6.

● The maximum (total) cable lengths specified for the type of connection must not be

exceeded.

Table 6-3 Cable for different connections

Connection type Maximum (total) line

length

Local connection with 5 V transfer via IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 1.5 m

Local connection without 5 V transfer via IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 5 m

Remote connection via IM 460-3 and IM 461-3 102.25 m

Remote connection via IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 605 m

Terminator

The bus must be terminated in the last EU of a line. To do this, plug in the appropriate terminator

in the lower front connector of the receive IM in the last EU of the line. Unused front connectors

in a send IM do not have to be terminated. The IM 461-1 does not require a terminator.

Table 6-4 Terminators for the Receive IMs

Receive IM Terminator

IM 461-0 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0

IM 461-3 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0

IM 461-4 6ES7461-4AA00-7AA0

The following figure shows you a typical configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and

terminators.

Interface modules

6.1 Common features of the interface modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 327

Figure 6-1 Example: Configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and terminators

(1) Receive IM

(2) Terminator

(3) Receive IM

(4) Send IM

(5) CR

Interface modules

6.1 Common features of the interface modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

328 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Cables

Precut cables are available in different fixed lengths for connecting the individual interface

modules. (See Appendix "Accessories and spare parts").

Table 6-5 Cables for interface modules

Interface modules Cables

IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

IM 460-3 and IM 461-3

6ES7468-1... (P bus and communication bus are transferred)

IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 6ES7468-3... (P bus is transferred; mounting rack is supplied with

current via the IM)

IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 6ES7468-1...

Installation and removal of the modules during operation

Please read the following warning on the insertion and removal of the interface modules and

associated cables.

CAUTION

Data may be lost or corrupted.

Removing or inserting the interface modules and/or their associated cables under voltage

can result in the loss or corruption of data.

Switch off the power supply modules to the CR and ERs you are working on before you carry

out any changes.

Interface modules

6.1 Common features of the interface modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 329

6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0

(6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)

Function

The interface module pair IM 460-0 (send IM) and IM 461-0 (receive IM) are used for a local

link.

Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

EXTF

IM 460-0

INTF

EXTF

INTF

EXTF

IM 461-0

OUT

EXTF

460-XXXXX-XXXX 461-XXXXX-XXXX

IM 461-0

IM 460-0

/('V',3VZLWFK8QGHUFRYHU3RUW&&RQQHFWRU;3RUW&'RQRWSOXJWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWRU&RQQHFWRU;

Figure 6-2 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

Interface modules

6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

330 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

Table 6-6 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

LEDs Meaning

EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator missing

or broken cable)

C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct.

C1 LED (flashing

green)

An EU in the line is not ready for operation because:

● The power supply module is not switched on

● A module has not yet completed the initialization process

C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector X2, connection 2) is correct.

C2 LED (flashing

green)

An EU in the line is not ready for operation because:

● The power supply module is not switched on

● A module has not yet completed the initialization process

Front connectors

X1 and X2

Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2

X1 = upper front connector; X2 = lower front connector

The LEDs EXTF, C1 and C2 do not light up if the terminator is not inserted or the line is

interrupted when in POWER ON mode. In this case the IM 460 identifies an unoccupied

interface.

Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

Table 6-7 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

LEDs Meaning

INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.

Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.

EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator

is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process).

DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.

Front connector

Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.

Front connector X2 Lower connector (output) for the cable to the next interface module or for the

terminator.

Parameter assignment for the mounting rack number

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting

rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.

Interface modules

6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 331

Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make the change

to the position (Output voltage 0 V).

2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.

3. Switch the power supply module on again.

Specifications of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

Maximum line length (total) 5 m

Abmessungen B x H x T (mm) 25 x 290 x 280

Weight

● IM 460-0

● IM 461-0

600 g

610 g

Current consumption from the

S7-400 bus 5 VDC

● IM 460-0 Typ. 130 mA

Max. 140 mA

● IM 461-0 Typ. 260 mA

Max. 290 mA

Power loss

● IM 460-0 Typ. 650 mW

Max. 700 mW

● IM 461-0 Typ. 1300 mW

Max. 1450 mW

Terminator 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0

Backup current None

Interface modules

6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

332 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1

(6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

Function

The interface module pair IM 460-1 (send IM) and IM 461-1 (receive IM) are used for a local

link (up to a maximum 1.5 m in total). A 5 V supply voltage is also transferred with these

interface modules. Please particularly remember the following points:

● The current requirements of the module plugged into the ER must not exceed 5 V/5 A.

● You can only connect one ER per line.

● The modules in this mounting rack are not supplied with 24 V and are not backed up.

● The communication bus is not transferred with the interface module pair IM 460-1 and IM

461-1.

● You must not use a power supply module in the ER.

Note

If you connect an ER via a local link with 5 V transmission, ungrounded operation is

prescribed for the ER (see Installation Manual).

Interface modules

6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 333

Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-1 and IM 461-1

IM 461-1

EXTF

IM 460-1

INTF

EXTF

INTF

EXTF

DC 5 V DC 5 V

IM 460-1

460-XXXXX-XXXX 461-XXXXX-XXXX

LEDs ',3VZLWFK8QGHUFRYHU3RUW&&RQQHFWRU;3RUW&'RQRWSOXJWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWRU&RQQHFWRU;

Figure 6-3 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-1 and IM 461-1

Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

Table 6-8 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

LEDs Meaning

EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (broken cable)

C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct.

C1 LED (flashing

green)

A module has not yet completed the initialization process.

Interface modules

6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

334 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

LEDs Meaning

C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector X2, connection 2) is correct.

C2 LED (flashing

green)

A module has not yet completed the initialization process.

Front connectors

X1 and X2

Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2

X1 = upper front connector; X2 = lower front connector

The LEDs EXTF, C1 and C2 do not light up if the line is interrupted when in POWER ON mode.

In this case the IM 460 identifies an unoccupied interface.

Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

Table 6-9 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

LEDs Meaning

INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.

Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.

EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if a module has

not yet completed the initialization process but not when the CC is switched off)

5 VDC (green) Power supply in the ER is correct.

DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.

Front connector

Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.

CAUTION

Modules can be damaged.

If you want to connect an ER via the IM 461-1 interface module and use a power supply

module in this ER, you might damage the modules.

Do not use a power supply module in an ER that you want to connect to the CR via the IM

461-1 interface module.

Parameter assignment for the mounting rack number

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting

rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.

Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the power supply module in the CR to the position (Output voltage 0 V).

2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.

3. Switch the power supply module on again.

Interface modules

6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 335

Specifications of the IM 460-1 and IM 461-1

Maximum line length (total) 1.5 m

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 280

Weight

● IM 460-1

● IM 461-1

600 g

610 g

Current consumption from the S7-400

bus 5 VDC

● IM 460-1

● IM 461-1

Typ. 50 mA, max. 85 mA

Typ. 100 mA, max. 120 mA

Power loss

● IM 460-1

● IM 461-1

Typ. 250 mW, max. 425 mW

Typ. 500 mW, max. 600 mW

Power supply for ER V/5 A per line

Backup current None

Interface modules

6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

336 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3

(6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)

Function

The interface module pair IM 460-3 (send IM) and IM 461-3 (receive IM) are used for a remote

link of up to a maximum 102.25 m (exactly: 100 m plus inputs/outputs of 0.75 m in the line).

Position of operator control and display elements

EXTF

IM 460-3

INTF

EXTF

INTF

EXTF

IM 461-3

OUT

IM 460-3 IM 461-3

461-XXXXX-XXXX460-XXXXX-XXXX

LEDs

DIP switch

Under cover

Interface C1

Connector X1:

Interface C2

Connector X2:

Figure 6-4 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-3 and IM 461-3

Interface modules

6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 337

Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

Table 6-10 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

LEDs Meaning

EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Strand 1 or strand 2 fault (cable break)

C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct.

C1 LED (flashing

green)

An EU in the line is not ready for operation because:

● The power supply module is not switched on

● A module has not yet completed the initialization process

C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector X2, connection 2) is correct.

C2 LED (flashing

green)

An EU in the line is not ready for operation because:

● The power supply module is not switched on

● A module has not yet completed the initialization process

The LEDs EXTF, C1 and C2 do not light up if the terminator is not inserted or the line is

interrupted when in POWER ON mode. In this case the IM 460 identifies an unoccupied

interface.

Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

Table 6-11 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

LEDs Meaning

INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.

Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.

EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator

is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process,

or if the CC is switched off)

DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.

Front connector X1 Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.

Front connector X2 Lower connector (output) for the cable to the next interface module or for the

terminator.

Parameter assignment

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting

rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.

If required, you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using

STEP 7.

The default setting for the distance is 100 m.

Interface modules

6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

338 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length (the sum of

all the cables per line) as this will accelerate data transmission.

Note

The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line.

Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make the change

to the position (Output voltage 0 V).

2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.

3. Switch the power supply module on again.

Specifications of the IM 460-3 and IM 461-3

Maximum line length (total) 102.25 m

Abmessungen B x H x T (mm) 25 x 290 x 280

Weight

● IM 460-3 630 g

● IM 461-3 620 g

Current consumption from the S7-400 bus 5 VDC

● IM 460-3 Typ. 1350 mA

Max. 1550 mA

● IM 461-3 Typ. 590 mA

Max. 620 mA

Power loss

● IM 460-3 Typ. 6750 mW

Max. 7750 mW

● IM 461-3 Typ. 2950 mW

Max. 3100 mW

Terminator 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0

Backup current None

Interface modules

6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 339

6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4;

(6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

Function

The interface module pair IM 460-4 (send IM) and IM 461-4 (receive IM) are used for a remote

link of up to a maximum 605 m (exactly: 600 m plus inputs/outputs of 1.5 m in the line).

Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4

EXTF

IM 460-4

INTF

EXTF

INTF

EXTF

IM 461-4

OUT

IM 460-4

460-XXXXX-XXXX 461-XXXXX-XXXX

IM 461-4

LEDs

DIP switch

Under cover

Interface C1

Connector X1:

Interface C2

Connector X2:

Figure 6-5 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4

Interface modules

6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

340 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

Table 6-12 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

LEDs Meaning

EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator missing

or broken cable)

C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct.

C1 LED (flashing

green)

An EU in the line is not ready for operation because:

● The power supply module is not switched on

● A module has not yet completed the initialization process

C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector X2, connection 2) is correct.

C2 LED (flashing

green)

An EU in the line is not ready for operation because:

● The power supply module is not switched on

● A module has not yet completed the initialization process

The LEDs EXTF, C1 and C2 do not light up if the terminator is not inserted or the line is

interrupted when in POWER ON mode. In this case the IM 460 identifies an unoccupied

interface.

Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

Table 6-13 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

LEDs Meaning

INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.

Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.

EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator

is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process,

or if the CC is switched off)

DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.

Front connector X1 Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.

Front connector X2 Lower connector (output) for the cable to the next interface module or for the

terminator.

Parameter assignment

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting

rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.

If required, you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using

STEP 7.

The default setting for the distance is 600 m.

Interface modules

6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 341

Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length (the sum of

all the cables per line) as this will accelerate data transmission.

Note

The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line.

Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make the change

to the position (Output voltage 0 V).

2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.

3. Switch the power supply module on again.

Specifications of the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4

Maximum line length (total) 605 m

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 280

Weight

● IM 460-4 630 g

● IM 461-4 620 g

Current consumption from the S7-400 bus 5 VDC

● IM 460-4 Typ. 1350 mA

Max. 1550 mA

● IM 461-4 Typ. 590 mA

Max. 620 mA

Power loss

● IM 460-4 Typ. 6750 mW

Max. 7750 mW

● IM 461-4 Typ. 2950 mW

Max. 3100 mW

Terminator 6ES7461-4AA00-7AA0

Backup current None

Compatibility

You cannot use the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 interface modules with CPUs that have the following

order numbers:

● 6ES7412-1XF00-0AB0

● 6ES7413-1XG00-0AB0

● 6ES7413-2XG00-0AB0

● 6ES7414-1XG00-0AB0

Interface modules

6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

342 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

● 6ES7414-2XG00-0AB0

● 6ES7416-1XJ00-0AB0

Interface modules

6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 343

Interface modules

6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

344 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

S5 interface IM 463-2 7

7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400

Order number

6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0

Area of application

The IM 463-2 interface module is used for distributed connection of S5 expansion units to an

S7-400. You can use the IM 463-2 in the CR of the S7-400. You can use an IM 314 in the S5

expansion unit.

This allows you to connect the following S5 expansion units to an S7-400:

● EG 183U with IM 314 in slot 3

● EG 185U with IM 314 in slot 3

● EG 186U with IM 314 in slot 3

● ER 701-2 with IM 314 in slot 7

● ER 701-3 with IM 314 in slot 7

Accordingly, you can use all digital and analog I/O modules suitable for these EUs or ERs.

Basic requirement

If you connect an S5 expansion unit to a CR of the S7-400 via an IM 463-2, the SIMATIC S5

basic requirements concerning EMC, ambient conditions, etc., apply for the overall system.

Note

In environments contaminated by radiated noise, you must apply the type 721 cable shield

(see

Installation manual

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 345

Mounting and removing the FM 463-2

Please read the following warning on the mounting and removal of the IM 463-2 and associated

cables.

CAUTION

Data may be lost or corrupted.

Removing or inserting the IM 463-2 and/or their associated cables under voltage can result

in the loss or corruption of data.

Switch off the power supply modules to the central rack you are working on before you carry

out any changes.

Expanding the distributed connection

You can also centrally expand the EUs connected in a distributed configuration via an IM 463-2.

The following table lists the S5 interface modules that you can use for this purpose.

Table 7-1 S5 interface modules

Module Order number

IM 300 6ES5 300-5CA11

6ES5 300-3AB11

6ES5 300-5LB11

IM 306 6ES5306-7LA11

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

346 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units

Introduction

When you connect S5 expansion units to an S7-400 via the IM 463-2, there are rules to observe

with regard to cable length, maximum expansion, use of a terminating connector and

permissible potential differences.

Cable length

The maximum cable length per IM 463-2 from the CR of the S7-400 to the last S5 expansion

unit is 600 m. You set the actual cable length at the IM 463-2.

Maximum configuration

You can use up to four IM 463-2s in one S7-400 CR.

At each IM 463-2 interface (C1 and C2), you can connect up to four S5 expansion units in a

distributed configuration.

You can connect further EUs centrally to the EUs connected in the distributed configuration.

Addressing of the S5 modules

All S5 address areas are available (P, Q, IM3, IM4)

Note

Note that every S5 address can only be used once, even across different lines.

Terminator

You must terminate the IM 314 of the last EU in each line with the 6ES5760-1AA11 terminating

connector.

Permissible potential differences

For the safe functioning of the distributed configuration, you must ensure that the potential

difference between two devices is not more than 7 V. Use an equipotential bonding conductor.

See also

Operator controls and indicators (Page 348)

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 347

7.3 Operator controls and indicators

Introduction

All controls and indicators on the IM 463-2 are arranged on the front plate. The following figure

shows the arrangement of the controls and indicators.

IM 463-2

EXTF

OFF

463-2AA..-....

LEDs EXTF, C1, C 2

Interface Selector Switch Interface selector switch

Cable Length Selector Selector Cable length selector switch

X1 connector

Interface C1

X2 connector

Interface C2

Figure 7-1 Layout of the controls and indicators of the IM 463-2

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.3 Operator controls and indicators

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

348 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

LEDs

Table 7-2 LEDs of the IM 463-2

LED Meaning

EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 has a fault

(power supply failed in the EU; terminating connector missing; wire break, or inter‐

face selector switch wrongly set).

C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct.

C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector X2, connection 2) is correct.

Front connectors

X1 and X2

Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2

X1 = upper front connector; X2 = lower front connector

Interface selector switch

Table 7-3 Switch position: Interface selector of the IM 463-2

Switch setting Meaning

C1 ON You use only interface C1.

C2 ON You use only interface C2.

C1, C2 ON You use both interfaces.

C1, C2 OFF You use neither of the two interfaces.

You do not want to operate an S5 EU at present.

Cable length selector switch

Table 7-4 Switch position: Cable length selector of the IM 463-2

Switch setting Meaning

100 Cable length 1 to 100 m

250 Cable length 100 to 250 m

450 Cable length 250 to 450 m

600 Cable length 450 to 600 m

WARNING

Danger of data loss.

Changing the setting of the interface selector switch and the cable length selector switch in

RUN mode can result in loss of data.

Change the settings of these switches only in STOP mode of the CPU.

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.3 Operator controls and indicators

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 349

7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2

Overview

To install an IM 463-2 in a CR of the S7-400, proceed in the same way as when installing other

S7-400 modules (see

Installation manual

To connect an IM 463-2, follow the steps outlined below:

1. Prepare the cable

2. Plug in the cable

3. Select the interface

4. Select the cable length

Prepare the cable

You can use the cable 721. However, you must change the connector housing on the

connection side of the IM 463-2.

Two connector housings are enclosed with every IM 463-2. You can prepare a cable for an

IM 463-2 using one of these connector housings and a 721 cable (see

Catalog ST 54.1

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove one connector housing on the 721 cable.

2. Open one of the connector housings enclosed with the IM 463-2.

3. Attach this connector housing to the 721 cable.

4. Close the connector housing.

Plug in the cable

To plug in the cable, follow the steps outlined below:

1. Open the cover of the IM 463-2.

2. Plug the new connector of the cable into one of the connectors of the IM 463-2.

Interface C1 corresponds to the upper connector;

Interface C2 corresponds to the lower connector.

3. Screw the connector of the cable onto the connector of the IM 463-2.

4. Close the cover.

Select the interface

You select the interface with the selector switch on the front plate. Set the interface(s) here

that you want to use. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in STOP mode.

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

350 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Select the cable length

You select the cable length with the selector switch on the front plate. Set the range

corresponding to the line length. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in

STOP mode.

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 351

7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314

Introduction

To operate the IM 463-2, you must set on the IM 314 the S5 expansion unit used and the

address area of the S5 I/O modules.

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

352 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Setting the S5 expansion unit

You set the S5 expansion unit in which you want to use the IM 314 using jumpers BR1, BR2,

and BR3 on the IM 314. The following figure shows where these jumpers are located on the

IM 314 and which setting corresponds to which expansion unit.

Table 7-5 Settings of the IM 314 using expansion units

BR 1

4 3 2 1 S1 off

BR 2

4 3 2 1

BR 3

4 3 2 1

Used in EU 185U, EU 186U

BR 1

S1 off

BR 3

BR 2

4 3 2 1

Used in EU 183 U

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 353

BR 1

BR 2

S1 off

BR 3

4 3 2 1

Used in ER 701-2, ER 701-3

Setting the address area

The address area of the S5 I/O modules is set on the IM 314. This setting applies only for the

digital and analog I/O modules.

The address areas P, Q, IM3, and IM4 are available. Set the switch to the relevant position to

address the digital and analog I/O modules in these areas.

Table 7-6 Settings address areas on the IM 314

I/O area address Switch position

O = OFF, 1 = ON The first two switches on the left are

not relevant.

OFF

P area: F000 - F0FF S1: 0000 *

Q area: F100 - F1FF 0001

IM3 area: FC00 - FCFF 1100

IM4 area: FD00 - FDFF 1101

* Factory state

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

354 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400

Example

You program S5 modules in

STEP 7

. Refer to the description in the

STEP 7

manual or the

online help

to learn how this is done.

The following figure shows a possible connection of CRs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM

314.

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 355

IM 312-3

IM 300-3

IM 314

IM 312-3

IM 300-3

IM 314

IM 312-5

IM 314

IM 312-3

IM 300-3

IM 314

IM 312-5

IM 300-5

IM 314

}

S7-400

IM 300-5

IM 463-2

S5- S5- S5-

S5-

Expansion

rack

Expansion

rack

Expansion

rack

Expansion

rack

Expansion

rack

Expansion

rack

Expansion

rack

Expansion

rack

Expansion

rack

Expansion

rack

Further EU 184U,

EU 187U (central)

Terminating connector 760-1AA11

All 721 connecting cables

Central

mounting rack

Terminating connector 760-1AA11

All 721 connecting cables

To further S5 expansion units (distributed)

(max. 4 per IM 463-2)

max. 600 m

Figure 7-2 Connection variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM 314

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

356 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable

Pin assignments of the 721 cable

Table 7-7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable

17 1

34 50

171

Connector Bundle ID sheath Identification foil Core color Connector

50-pin Contact 50-pin Contact

No. 16

Red

white 20

21 brown 21

4 green 4

5 yellow 5

18 gray 18

19 pink 19

2 blue 2

3 red 3

No. 17

green

white 24

25 brown 25

8 green 8

9 yellow 9

22 gray 22

23 pink 23

6 blue 6

7 red 7

No. 18

yellow

white 26

27 brown 27

10 green 10

11 yellow 11

42 gray 42

43 pink 43

44 blue 44

45 red 45

No. 19

brown

white 28

29 brown 29

12 green 12

13 yellow 13

46 gray 46

47 pink 47

30 blue 30

31 red 31

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 357

No. 20

black

white 34

35 brown 35

36 green 36

37 yellow 37

38 gray 38

39 pink 39

40 blue 40

41 red 41

No. 21

blue

white 48

49 brown 49

14 green 14

15 yellow 15

32 gray 32

33 pink 33

- Shield -

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

358 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314

Introduction

The IM 314 of the last expansion unit of each line is terminated with the 6ES5 760-1AA11

terminating connector.

Table 7-8 Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11

Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11

34 50

171

Plug connection 180-Ohm resistance or jumper Plug connection

28 8

29 9

26 6

27 7

46 4

47 5

44 2

45 3

42 24

43 25

38 1 22

39 23

34 1 20

35 21

36 1 18

37 19

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 359

Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11

40 1 12

41 13

48 2 10

49 11

15 30

16 31

1 100 Ω

2 200Ω

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

360 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0)

Specifications

Programming package

Associated programming package As of STEP 7 V 2.1

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25x290x280

Weight 360 g

Module-specific data

Number and type of interfaces 2 parallel, 2 symmetrical interfaces

Cable length:

from IM 463-2 to the last IM 314 (per interface)

Max. 600 m

Transmission speed 2 Mbps to 100 Kbps

Parameter sets of the signal modules Differential signal in accordance with RS 485

Front connectors 2 connectors, 50-pin male

Voltages, currents, electrical potentials

Supply voltage from S7-400 bus +5 V

Current consumption Typ. 1.2 A

Max. 1.32 A

Power loss Typ. 6 W

Max. 6.6 W

Backup current No

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 361

S5 interface IM 463-2

7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

362 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO 8

8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.1.1 Overview

Order numbers

IM 467 6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0 (RS 485)

IM 467 FO 6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0 (F0)

Application

PROFIBUS DP, standardized in accordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, enables rapid

communication in the field between programmable controllers, PCs and field devices. Field

devices are devices such as: ET 200 distributed I/O devices, drives, valve terminals,

switchgear and many others.

The IM 467/IM 467 FO interface module is meant to be used in an S7-400 programmable

controller. It permits the S7-400 to be connected to PROFIBUS DP.

Note

The PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467 and IM 467 FO is not a DP master in accordance

with DVP 1.

Design

● Designed for S7-400

● Can be operated without a fan

● A maximum of 4 IM 467/IM 467 FO can be used in the central rack. There are no slot rules.

● The IM 467/IM 467 FO and the CP 443-5 Extended cannot be used together.

● The transmission rate of 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps can be set in steps using software

● Configuration and programming are possible via PROFIBUS DP. You should not, however,

change the PROFIBUS DP parameters.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 363

● IM 467 with 9-pin sub D socket for connection to PROFIBUS DP (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0)

● IM 467 FO with fiber-optic cable for connection to PROFIBUS DP (6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0)

Figure 8-1 Configuration of the IM 467/467 FO

(1) LED

(2) Mode selector

(3) PROFIBUS-DP interface

9-pin sub D

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

364 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Communication services

The IM 467/IM 467 FO offers two communication services:

● PROFIBUS DP

The IM 467/IM 467 FO is a PROFIBUS DP master in accordance with EN 50 170. It is

configured entirely with STEP 7. It behaves in basically the same way as the integrated

PROFIBUS DP interfaces on the CPU modules (see the specifications of the IM 467/IM

467 FO for the differences).

DP communication does not require any function calls in the STEP 7 user program.

● S7 functions

The S7 functions guarantee optimal and easy communication in a SIMATIC S7/M7/C7

automation solution. The following S7 functions are enabled for the IM 467/IM 467 FO:

– Programming device functions via PROFIBUS DP

– Operator control and monitoring functions via PROFIBUS DP

Communication takes place without any additional configuration on the IM 467/IM 467 FO.

S7 functions can be used on their own or in parallel with the PROFIBUS DP protocol. If

they are used in parallel with DP communication, this affects the PROFIBUS DP bus cycle

time.

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 365

8.1.2 Indicators and the mode selector

LED

The LED strip on the front panel of the IM 467/IM 467 FO has the following four indicators:

INTF

EXTF

RUN

STOP

Figure 8-2 LEDs of the IM 467/467 FO

IM operating mode

The LEDs indicate the operating mode of the IM in accordance with the following table:

Table 8-1 Operating modes of the IM 467/467 FO

STOP LED (yel‐

low)

RUN LED

(green)

EXTF LED

(red)

INTF LED

(red)

CP Operating Mode

On Flashing Off Off Startup

Off On Off Off RUN

Flashing On Off Off STOPPING

On Off Off Off STOP

On Off Off On STOP with internal error (IM not configured,

for example)

Flashing Off Off Off Waiting for FW update (takes 10 sec. after

power up)

Flashing Off On On Waiting for FW update (IM currently contains

an incomplete FW version).

Off On On Off RUN and PROFIBUS DP bus fault

Off On Flashing Off RUN; but there are faults on the DP line (the

DP slave is not taking part in data transfer, or

the module in the DP slave is faulty, for exam‐

ple)

Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Module error / system error

Controlling the operating status

There are two ways to control the operating status of the IM 467/IM 467 FO:

● Mode selector

● By using the programming device/PC

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

366 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Mode selector

You can switch operating modes as follows using the mode selector:

● From STOP to RUN

All the configured communication services and S7 communication services are available

in RUN.

The IM operating mode can only be controlled from the programming device/PC when the

switch is in the RUN position.

● From RUN to STOP

The IM goes into STOP mode. Any existing S7 connections are cleared down, and the DP

slaves are no longer supplied.

Loadable firmware

The IM 467/IM 467 FO supports the updating of firmware (FW) by means of the FW loader.

The FW loader is a component of the NCM S7 configuration software for PROFIBUS DP.

Authorization is not required for this. After a FW update, the central rack must be switched off

and on again before normal operation can be resumed.

Note

You can find additional information on loading firmware in the

NCM S7 for PROFIBUS-DP

manual and in the readme file of the

NCM S7 for PROFIBUS-DP

configuration software.

An optical bus terminal (OBT) is required to load FW in the IM 467 FO.

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 367

8.2 Configuration

Introduction

The IM 467/IM 467 FO is configured with STEP 7. The configuration data are retained even

in the event of a power failure; a memory module is not required. Using the S7 functions it is

possible to program and configure remotely all the IM 467/IM 467 FO connected to the network

and all the CPUs connected via the SIMATIC S7-400 backplane bus.

SIMATIC STEP 7, version 5.00 or higher is required.

Module replacement without a programming device

The configuration data are stored in the load memory of the CPU. The non-volatile storage of

configuration data in the CPU is ensured by battery backup or EPROM module cards.

The IM 467/IM 467 FO can be replaced without the need to explicitly reload the configuration

data.

It is only possible to remove and insert the IM 467/IM 467 FO in a de-energized state.

Multiprocessor operation

The connected DP slaves can only be assigned to and processed by one CPU.

Configuration and diagnostics cannot be carried out simultaneously

When configuration is in progress, the IM 467/IM 467 FO cannot be diagnosed at the same

time via MPI.

Note

The transmission rates 3 Mbit/s and 6 Mbit/s are not approved for IM467-FO.

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

8.3.1 Connection options

Overview

There are two ways of connecting to PROFIBUS DP:

● Electrical connection via a bus connector

● Optical connection using a fiber-optic cable

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

368 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

8.3.2 Bus connector

Wiring

Only with 6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0.

The bus cable is connected to the IM 467 by means of this connector. (See the detailed

description in the section on networking in the

S7-400, Hardware and Installation manual

Figure 8-3 Connecting the bus connector to the IM 467

(1) Switch for bus terminator resistor

(2) PROFIBUS_DP bus line

(3) Bus connector

Maximum cable lengths for PROFIBUS DP

Transmission speed

in Kbps

9,6 19,2 93,75 187,5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000

Max. length of a bus

segment in m

1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 400 200 100 100 100

Max. number of bus

segments 1

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Max. length in m 10.000 10.000 10.000 10.000 4.000 2.000 1.000 1.000 1.000

1 Bus segments are interconnected with RS 485 repeaters

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 369

Connector pin assignment

The electrical interface used to connect to PROFIBUS DP (9-pin sub D socket) is specified in

the following table.

RUN

STOP

INTF

EXTF

Pin no. Signal name Profibus designation Assigned to

RS 485

RxD/TxD-P

RTS (AG)

M5V2

P5V2

BATT

RxDT/TxD-N

Protective earth

Data transfer line B

Control A

Data reference potential

Supply plus

Data transfer line A

Yes

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

370 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

8.3.3 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP

Wiring

Only in the case of 6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0.

The IM 467 F0 with an integrated fiber-optic cable interface is available for connecting to the

optical version of PROFIBUS DP.

CP443-5

443-5FX00-0XE0

STOP

RUN

INTF

EXTF

RUN

STOP

AUI/TP

Figure 8-4 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP

(1) PROFIBUS DP bus cable

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 371

8.3.4 Connecting a fiber-optic cable to the IM 467 FO

Required accessories

● Package with simplex connectors and polishing sets (6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0)

● Pack of plug-in adapters (6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0)

Installing connectors

1. Remove approximately 30 cm of the sheath of the fiber-optic duplex cable.

2. Install the fiber-optic duplex cable with the associated simplex connectors. You can find a

detailed description of simplex connectors in the

SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks

manual.

TIP: Close the two simplex connectors together rather than separately to obtain a duplex

connector. In this manner you will achieve a better hold in the plug adapter.

IMPORTANT: The polished surface of the plastic fibers must be absolutely smooth and

even. Likewise, the plastic jacket must not protrude or be cut unevenly. Every irregularity

causes strong attenuation of the light signal over the fiber-optic cable!

3. Place the simplex connectors in the plug-in adapter for the IM 467 FO and the fiber-optic

cable in the cable guides provided. Insert the plug-in adapter until you hear the sides clearly

latch into position.

Make sure when you insert the plugs in the plug-in adapter that the transmitter is always

at the top and the receiver is underneath.

Figure 8-5 Installing the connector

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

372 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

(1) Plug-in adapter for the IM 467 FO

(2) Snap the two simplex connectors closed together such that you get a "duplex connector".

(3) Tip: Cut the lower cable approx. 10 mm shorter than the upper one to achieve better cable

routing in the cable duct of the IM 467 FO.

(4) Max. 30 mm bending radius

(5) Fiber-optic duplex cable

Reusing fiber-optic cable

Note

If you insert previously used fiber-optic cable into the plug adapter, you must shorten both fiber-

optic cores by the amount of the curved lengths and reinstall the simplex connectors.

This will prevent any attenuation losses caused by repeatedly bent, heavily stressed portions

of the fiber-optic duplex core.

Inserting the fiber-optic cables into the IM 467 FO

Insert the fiber-optic cable with the mounted plug adapters into the IM 467 FO. Fold the

protruding plug grip upward.

Make sure that it is correctly positioned: The transmitter fiber-optic cable is plugged into the

receiver socket, and the receiver fiber-optic cable is inserted into the transmitter socket of the

fiber-optic interface of the IM 467 FO.

If the IM 467 FO is the last node in the fiber-optic network, you must close the unoccupied

fiber-optic cable interface with blanking plugs (the plugs are already in place when the IM 467

FO is delivered).

CAUTION

Do not look directly into the opening of the optical sender diodes.

The emitted light beam could damage your eyes.

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 373

PROFIBUS DP

Transmitter

Receiver

Grip

Figure 8-6 Inserting the fiber-optic cables into the IM 467 FO

Bending radius for the fiber-optic cable

When placing the fiber-optic duplex core into the plug adapter and routing the cable, be sure

not to exceed the permissible bending radius of 30 mm. See also the installation guidelines

on fiber-optic cables in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual.

8.4 Specifications

8.4.1 Specifications of the IM 467 (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0))

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

25 x 290 x 210

700 g

PROFIBUS DP

● Standard PROFIBUS DP, EN 50 170

● Transmission rate 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps, configurable in

steps

● Transmission technology RS 485 via 9-pin sub D socket

Current consumption

Current consumption from the S7-400 bus (24 VDC)

The IM does not consume any current at 24 V, and it only makes

this voltage available at the MPI/DP interface.

Total current consumption of the com‐

ponents connected to the DP interfa‐

ces, with a maximum of 150 mA

PROFIBUS DP

Operating conditions

Can be used in SIMATIC S7-400, max. 4 IM 467 in

the central rack

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.4 Specifications

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

374 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5

Supply voltage 5 VDC via the backplane bus

Current consumption

● From 5 VDC 1.3 A

Addressing range Max. 4 KB for inputs and 4 KB for out‐

puts

DP master Yes

● DPV 1 No

● Enable/disable No

Number of connectable I/O devices (slaves) 96

Number of connections for S7 functions for the programming

device and operator control and monitoring

32 + 1 diagnostic connection

Data volume per slave Max. 244 bytes

Consistency Max. 128 bytes

Configuration software STEP 7

DP slave No

Deviations from the DP interface integrated

in the CPU

● Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics

● Possibly extended SFC run times

● Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.4 Specifications

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 375

8.4.2 Specifications of the IM 467 FO (6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0)

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

25 x 290 x 210

700 g

PROFIBUS DP

● Standard PROFIBUS DP, EN 50 170

● Transmission rate 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps, configurable in

steps (3 Mbps and 6 Mbps not possi‐

ble)

● Transmission technology FOC;

Wave length l = 660 nm 2 x duplex

sockets

Current consumption

Current consumption from the S7-400 bus (24 VDC)

The IM does not consume any current at 24 V, and it only makes

this voltage available at the MPI/DP interface.

Total current consumption of the com‐

ponents connected to the DP interfa‐

ces, with a maximum of 150 mA

PROFIBUS DP

Operating conditions

Can be used in SIMATIC S7-400, max. 4 IM 467 in

the central rack

IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5

Supply voltage 5 VDC via the backplane bus

Current consumption 1.3 A

● From 5 VDC

Addressing range Max. 4 KB for inputs and 4 KB for out‐

puts

DP master Yes

● DPV 1 No

● Enable/disable No

Number of connectable I/O devices (slaves) 96

Number of connections for S7 functions for the programming

device and operator control and monitoring

32 + 1 diagnostic connection

Data volume per slave Max. 244 bytes

Consistency Max. 128 bytes

Configuration software STEP 7

DP slave No

Deviations from the DP interface integrated in the CPU

● Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics

● Possibly extended SFC run times

● Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.4 Specifications

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

376 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Cable duct and fan subassemblies 9

9.1 Features

Overview

The cable duct and the fan subassembly have the following characteristics

● The air inflow area is variable.

● Shield and cable clamping are possible.

In addition, the fan subassembly has the following characteristics:

● Fans and filter frames can be replaced from the front during operation.

● The fan function is controlled by means of speed monitoring.

● Operation with filter frames is optional.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 377

9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies

LEDs

The three red LEDs of the fan subassembly are assigned to the individual fans. From left to

right, these are:

F1 - for fan 1

F2 - for fan 2

F3 - for fan 3

Fans

The fans have a redundant design. The fan subassembly continues to function even if one fan

fails.

Fan monitoring

The function of the fans is controlled by means of speed monitoring. If the speed of a fan drops

below the limit speed of 1750 rpm, the LED assigned to it lights up. In addition, the relay K1

drops out.

If the speed of a second fan drops below the limit speed, the LED assigned to it lights up; in

addition, the relay K2 drops out.

The following table is the function table for the fan monitoring.

Table 9-1 Function of fan monitoring

Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 LED F1 LED F2 LED F3 Relay K1 Relay K2

- - - H H H - -

- - + H H D - -

- + - H D H - -

+ - - D H H - -

- + + H D D - +

+ - + D H D - +

+ + - D D H - +

+ + + D D D + +

-* -* -* D* D* D* -* -*

Fan in operation or relay picked up

Fan failed or relay dropped out

LED is dark

LED lights up

At power off

Example of a message concept

You can check the fault-free functioning of the fan subassembly using digital inputs.

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

378 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

You can cause the power supply to be cut off after the failure of at least two fans by using the

relay K2. For example, you can use an intermediate contactor to interrupt the mains.

The relay contacts are labeled as follows:

Relay K1: No. 1 to 3

Relay K2: No. 4 to 6

The following diagram explains the circuit in the fan subassembly when all fans are functioning.

L+

24 V

... to the digital input module

Evaluation

(digital input module)

Evaluation

(digital input module)

to the power supply module

Status: All fans operating

to the mains

in the fan assembly

... to the monitor

Figure 9-1 Example of a message concept

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 379

9.3 Cable duct (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)

Function

The cable duct is used when installing outside a cabinet for

● clamping cables and/or for

● shielding or for

● air inlet without fan support

Front view of the cable duct

Eye for

clamping cable

Shield clamp

(Side elevation

Scale 1:1)

Figure 9-2 Front view of the cable duct

Shielding clamps

If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the cable duct.

Specifications

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 109.5 x 235

Weight Approx. 1200 g

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

9.3 Cable duct (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

380 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

Operator controls and indicators on the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly

230

120

V1, 2, 3

4, 5, 6

230

AC 120/230V

120

120V=250mAT

230V=160mAT

AC 120/230V

Quick-release lock LEDs F1, F2, F3

Relay contact

Voltage

selector

switch

Fuse

case

Voltage

connection

Figure 9-3 Controls and indicators of the fan subassembly 120/230 VAC (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

Fuse

Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links, 5 x 20 mm, conforming to

DIN

● 250 mAT for 120 V

● 160 mAT for 230 V.

The fuse for the 230 V range is already installed on shipping from the factory.

Note

If you change the voltage range, you must also insert the fuse for this voltage range in the fan

subassembly. You will find a description of how to change the fuse in the

Installation manual

Shielding clamps

If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the fan subassembly.

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 381

Installation

Follow to the general installation guidelines when mounting the 24 V DC fan subassembly,

see

Installation

manual.

Specifications

Dimensions, weights

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

482.5 x 109.5 x 235

Approx. 2000 g

Cable cross-section 0.5 to 2.5 mm² (litz with connector sleeve)

Electrical parameters

Lifespan of the fans at 40 °C Typ. 70 000 h

Max. contact load of relay contacts 1 to 6

● Switching voltage 24 VDC

● Permitted range Static: 20.4 to 28.8 VDC

Dynamic: 18.5 to 30.2 V

● Switching current 200 mA

Voltages, currents, electrical potentials

At nominal voltage of 230 VAC 120 VAC

Voltage range 170 VAC to 264 VAC 85 VAC to 132 VAC

Frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz

Power consumption

● With fan 17 W 18 W

● Without fan 5 W 4 W

Rated current 90 mA 175 mA

Starting current 0.6 A 1.15 A

Fuses Wickmann Series 195 250 V / 160 mA 250 V / 250 mA

WARNING

Contact with electrical current can lead to personal injury.

If you remove the left cover when installing or removing the fan subassembly, the terminals

on the transformer are accessible briefly.

Remove the voltage from the fan subassembly before you install or remove it. Disconnect

the supply cable before you remove the fan subassembly.

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

382 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

CAUTION

Danger of damage to equipment.

If you mix up the power supply PCB and the monitoring PCB in the fan subassembly, the fan

subassembly may be damaged.

During maintenance of the unit, make sure you do not mix up the power supply PCB and the

monitoring PCB.

Monitoring function

In the case of a fault (defective fans) the fans are not switched off. Once you have replaced

the defective fan(s), the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon as the fans have reached

the required speed. Any faults that occur are not stored. When you switch on the fan

subassembly, the fans start running. After approximately 10 s the current status of the fans is

indicated via LEDs and relays.

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 383

9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)

Operator controls and indicators on the 24 VDC fan subassembly

1 AT

1, 2, 3

4, 5, 6

1 AT

Quick-release lock LEDs F1, F2, F3

Relay contact

Fuse

case 

Figure 9-4 Controls and indicators of the fan subassembly 24 VDC (6ES7408-1TA00-0XA0)

Features

The 24 VDC fan subassembly has the same construction and functional characteristics as the

120/230 VAC fan subassembly.

Wiring

You connect the 24 VDC fan subassembly to the 24 VDC supply in the same manner as for

the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly. You should note the polarity of the spring connections L+

and L-.

Signaling concept

The signaling concept of the 24 VDC fan subassembly is identical to the signaling concept of

the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly.

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

384 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Fuse

Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links, 5 x 20 mm, conforming to

DIN

● 1.0 AT for 24 V

The fuse is already installed on shipping from the factory.

Shielding clamps

If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the fan subassembly.

Installation

Follow to the general installation guidelines when mounting the 24 V DC fan subassembly,

see

Installation

manual.

Technical specifications

Dimensions, weights

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Weight

482.5x 109.5 x 235

Approx. 1600 g

Cable cross-section 0.5 to 2.5 mm² (litz with connector sleeve)

Electrical parameters

Lifespan of the fans at 40 °C Typ. 70 000 h

Maximum contact load of relay contacts 1 to 6

● Switching voltage 24 VDC

● Permitted range Static 20.4 to 28.8 VDC

Dynamic: 18.5 to 30.2 VDC

● Switching current 200 mA

Voltages, currents, electrical potentials

Input voltage

● Nominal value 24 VDC

● Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 28 V

Rated current 450 mA

Starting current 0.9 A at 24 V

Fuses Wickmann Series 195 250 V / 1.0 AT

Power consumption

● With fan 12 W

● Without fan 1.4 W

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 385

CAUTION

Danger of damage to equipment.

If you insert the monitoring PCB in the wrong position in the fan subassembly, the fan

subassembly may be damaged.

During maintenance of the unit, make sure you do not insert the replacement monitoring PCB

in the wrong position.

Monitoring function

In the case of a fault (defective fans) the fans are not switched off. Once you have replaced

the defective fan(s), the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon as the fans have reached

the required speed. Any faults that occur are not stored.

When you switch on the fan subassembly, the fans start running. After approximately 10 s the

current status of the fans is indicated via LEDs and relays.

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

386 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

RS 485 repeater 10

10.1 Introduction

Overview

This section describes the RS 485 repeater in detail.

This includes:

● The purpose of the RS 485 repeater

● The maximum cable lengths between two RS 485 repeaters

● Functions of the various operating elements and terminals

● Information about grounded and ungrounded operation

● Specifications and the block diagram

Further information

You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the section "Configuring of an MPI

or PROFIBUS-DP Network" of the manual

Hardware and Installation

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 387

10.2 Applications and features (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

Application of the RS 485 repeater

The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and couples bus segments. You need

an RS 485 repeater for the following situations:

● There are more than 32 nodes connected to the bus.

● Bus segments should be operated ungrounded on the bus.

● The maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded.

Table 10-1 Maximum cable length of a segment

Baud rate Max. cable length of a segment (in m)

9.6 to 187.5 Kbps 1000

500 Kbps 400

1.5 Mbps 200

3 to 12 Mbps 100

Rules

The following applies if you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters:

● No more than 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series.

● The maximum cable length between two nodes with RS 485 repeater may not exceed the

values listed in the table below.

Table 10-2 Maximum cable length between two RS 485 repeaters

Baud rate Max. cable length between 2 nodes (in m)

with the RS 485 repeater (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0)

9.6 to 187.5 Kbps 10000

500 Kbps 4000

1.5 Mbps 2000

3 to 12 Mbps 1000

RS 485 repeater

10.2 Applications and features (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

388 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

10.3 Design of the RS 485 repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

Design

The table below shows the design and functions of the RS 485 repeater.

Description and functions of the RS 485 repeater

24 V L+ M PEM 5.2

SIEMENS

RS 485-REPEATER

A1B1 A1 B1

A2 B2A2 B2

DP2

DP1

(1) Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply (pin "M5.2" is the ground reference, if you

want to measure the voltage difference between terminals "A2" and "B2").

(2) Shielding clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable of bus segments 1 or 2

(3) Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1

(4) Terminating resistance for bus segment 1

(5) LED for bus segment 1

(6) OFF switch

(= isolate bus segments from each other, for example, for commissioning)

(7) LED for bus segment 2

(8) Terminating resistance for bus segment 2

(9) Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2

(10) Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the DIN rail

(11) Interface for PG/OP on bus segment 1

(12) LED 24 V supply voltage

RS 485 repeater

10.3 Design of the RS 485 repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 389

10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation

Grounded or ungrounded

The following applies to the RS 485 repeater:

● It is grounded, if all other nodes on the segment are also operated on ground potential

● It is ungrounded, if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded potential

Note

Bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device with a pure MPI interface

to the PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater. The segment is grounded, because the MPI

in the PG is grounded, and the PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater is connected internally

with bus segment 1. This does not apply when the programming device has a combination

MPI/DP interface.

Grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, you must jump terminals "M" and "PE" on the

top of the RS 485 repeater.

Ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, "M" and "PE" on the top of the RS 485

repeater must not be interconnected. In addition, the supply voltage to the RS 485 repeater

must be ungrounded.

Connection scheme

In a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential (ungrounded operation), any

interference currents and static charges are discharged to the protective conductor by means

of an RC network integrated in the repeater (refer to the figure below).

24 V

L+ M PE M 5.2

A1 B1 A1 B1

22 nF 10 MΩ

Figure 10-1 RC network with 10 M Ohm for configuration with ungrounded reference potential

RS 485 repeater

10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

390 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

(1) Ground busbar

Electrical isolation between bus segments

Bus segments 1 and 2 are electrically isolated. The PG/OP interface is connected internally

to the port for bus segment 1. The figure below shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater.

24 V L+ M PE M 5.2

SIEMENS

RS 485-REPEATER

A1 B1 A1 B1

A2 B2 A2 B2

OP DP2

OFF

DP1

Figure 10-2 Electrical isolation between the bus segments

(1) Terminals for bus segment 1

(2) Terminals for bus segment 2

(3) Isolation

(4) PG/OP interface

Amplification of bus signals

The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment 1 or the PG/

OP interface and the port for bus segment 2.

RS 485 repeater

10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 391

10.5 Specifications

Specifications of the RS 485 repeater

Specifications

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 45 x 128 x 67

Power supply

● Nominal voltage

Ripple

24 VDC

20.4 to 28.8 VDC

Current consumption at nominal voltage

● Without load on PG/OP socket 200 mA

● Load on PG/OP socket (5 V/90 mA) 230 mA

● Load on PG/OP socket (24 V/100 mA) 200 mA

Isolation Yes, 500 VAC

Connection of fiber-optic conductors Yes, via repeater adapters

Redundancy mode No

Transmission rate (automatically detected by the

repeater)

9.6 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 45.45 Kbps, 93.75 Kbps,

187.5 Kbps, 500 Kbps, 1.5 Mbps, 3 Mbps,

6 Mbps, 12 Mbps

Degree of protection IP 20

Weight (including packaging) 350 g

Pin assignment of the sub-D connector (PG/OP socket)

View Pin No. Signal name Designation

1 - -

2 M24V Ground 24 V

3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B

4 RTS Request to send

5 M5V2 Data reference potential (from station)

6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)

7 P24V 24 V

8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A

9 - -

Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

● Bus segments 1 and 2 are electrically isolated.

● Bus segment 2 and the PG/OP socket are electrically isolated from each other.

● Signals are amplified

– Between bus segments 1 and 2

– Between PG/OP socket and bus segment 2

RS 485 repeater

10.5 Specifications

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

392 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

24 V

A2'

B2'

A1'

B1'

L+ (24 V)

5 V

M5 V

L+ (24 V)

M 5.2

Logic

24 V

-+ + - -

OFF

Segment 1 Segment 2

PG/OP-

socket

Figure 10-3 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

RS 485 repeater

10.5 Specifications

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 393

RS 485 repeater

10.5 Specifications

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

394 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Parameter sets of signal modules A

A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7.

In the user program, you can use an SFC:

● To assign new parameters to the module

● To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module

Parameters stored in data records

The signal module parameters are stored in data records 0 and 1.

Modifiable parameters

You can edit the parameters of data record 1, and then transfer these to the signal module

using SFC55. The CPU parameters are not changed by this action!

You cannot modify any parameters of data record 0 in the user program.

SFCs for parameter assignment

SFCs available for programming signal modules in the user program:

Table A-1 SFCs for assigning parameters to signal modules

SFC No. Identifier Application

55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1) to the addressed

signal module.

56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters (data record 0 or 1) from the CPU to the

addressed signal module.

57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters (data record 0 and 1) from the CPU to the

addressed signal module.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 395

Description of the parameters

The next chapters describe all modifiable parameters of the various module classes. The

parameters of the signal modules are described:

● In the online help of STEP 7

● In this reference manual

The sections dealing with the various signal modules also show you the corresponding

configurable parameters.

Further references

An in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules in the user

program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the

STEP 7 manuals.

Parameter sets of signal modules

A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

396 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

A.2 Parameters of digital input modules

Parameters

The table below lists the parameters you can set for digital input modules.

The comparison illustrates the parameters you can edit:

● In STEP 7

● Using SFC 55 "WR_PARM"

The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module

(refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-2 Parameters of digital input modules

Parameters Data record

number

Parameter assign‐

ment with SFC 55

Parameter assign‐

ment with STEP 7

Destination CPU for interrupt

No Yes

Input delay No Yes

Diagnostics No Yes

Hardware interrupt enable

Yes Yes

Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes

Reaction to error* Yes Yes

Hardware interrupt at positive edge Yes Yes

Hardware interrupt at negative edge Yes Yes

Enable substitute value "1"* Yes Yes

* Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0

Note

If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must

enable the diagnostics in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Structure of data record 1

A data record consists of several bytes, the bits of which can be active or inactive:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Figure A-1 For example, byte 1 with the bits 0 - 7

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1, 2 and 3) for the parameters

of digital input modules.

Parameter sets of signal modules

A.2 Parameters of digital input modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 397

You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

Table A-3 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7 Hardware interrupt enable

6 Diagnostics interrupt enable

0 Reaction to error1

Byte 1

Hardware interrupt

7 On rising edge at channel 7

6 On rising edge at channel 6

5 On rising edge at channel 5

4 On rising edge at channel 4

3 On rising edge at channel 3

2 On rising edge at channel 2

1 On rising edge at channel 1

0 On rising edge at channel 0

Byte 2

Hardware interrupt

7 On rising edge at channel 15

6 On rising edge at channel 14

5 On rising edge at channel 13

4 On rising edge at channel 12

3 On rising edge at channel 11

2 On rising edge at channel 10

1 On rising edge at channel 9

0 On rising edge at channel 8

Byte 3

Hardware interrupt

7 On falling edge at channel 7

6 On falling edge at channel 6

5 On falling edge at channel 5

4 On falling edge at channel 4

3 On falling edge at channel 3

2 On falling edge at channel 2

1 On falling edge at channel 1

0 On falling edge at channel 0

1 Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0

The following table shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 4, 5, and 6) for the parameters

of digital input modules.

Parameter sets of signal modules

A.2 Parameters of digital input modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

398 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

Table A-4 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 On falling edge at channel 15

6 On falling edge at channel 14

5 On falling edge at channel 13

4 On falling edge at channel 12

3 On falling edge at channel 11

2 On falling edge at channel 10

1 On falling edge at channel 9

0 On falling edge at channel 8

Byte 5

Substitute value1

7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7

6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6

5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5

4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4

3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3

2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2

1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1

0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0

Byte 6

Substitute value1

7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15

6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14

5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13

4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12

3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11

2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10

1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9

0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8

1 Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0

Parameter sets of signal modules

A.2 Parameters of digital input modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 399

A.3 Parameters of digital output modules

Parameters

The table below contains all parameters you can set for digital output modules. The comparison

shows:

● Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and

● Which parameters you can change using SFC 55 "WR_PARM".

The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module

(refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-5 Parameters of the digital output modules

Parameters Data record

no.

Parameter assignment

with SFC 55

Parameter assignment

with STEP 7

Destination CPU for interrupt 0 No Yes

Diagnostics No Yes

Diagnostics interrupt enable

Yes Yes

Reaction to CPU STOP Yes Yes

Enable substitute value "1"* Yes Yes

Note

If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must

enable the diagnostics in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1 and 2) for the parameters of

digital output modules.

Parameter sets of signal modules

A.3 Parameters of digital output modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

400 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

Table A-6 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7

6 Diagnostics interrupt enable

0 Reaction to CPU STOP

Byte 1

Substitute

value

7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7

6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6

5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5

4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4

3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3

2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2

1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1

0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0

Byte 2

Substitute

value

7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15

6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14

5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13

4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12

3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11

2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10

1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9

0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8

The following table shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 3, and 4) for the parameters of

digital output modules.

You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

Table A-7 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3*

Substitute

value

7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 23

6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 22

5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 21

4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 20

3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 19

2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 18

1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 17

0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 16

Parameter sets of signal modules

A.3 Parameters of digital output modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 401

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4*

Substitute

value

7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 31

6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 30

5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 29

4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 28

3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 27

2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 26

1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 25

0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 26

* Bytes 3 and 4 are not relevant for SM 421;DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5A

Parameter sets of signal modules

A.3 Parameters of digital output modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

402 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

A.4 Parameters of analog input modules

Parameters

The table below lists all parameters you can set for analog input modules.

The comparison illustrates the parameters you can edit:

● In STEP 7

● Using SFC 55 "WR_PARM"

The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module

(refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-8 Parameters of analog input modules

Parameters Data record

no.

Parameter assignment

with SFC 55

Parameter assignment

with STEP 7

Destination CPU for interrupt

No Yes

Measuring method No Yes

Measuring range No Yes

Diagnostics No Yes

Temperature unit No Yes

Temperature coefficient No Yes

Noise suppression No Yes

Smoothing No Yes

Reference junction No Yes

End of cycle interrupt No Yes

Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes

Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes

Reference temperature 1 Yes Yes

High limit 1 Yes Yes

Low limit 1 Yes Yes

Note

If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must

enable the diagnostics in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of analog input

modules.

You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

Parameter sets of signal modules

A.4 Parameters of analog input modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 403

Byte 0

7 6 0

low byte

high byte

Byte 63

Byte 64

Byte 65

Byte 66

low byte

high byte

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

Byte 6

Byte 31

Byte 32

Byte 33

Byte 34

Byte 1

Byte 2 low byte

high byte

•

Diagnostics interrupt enable

Hardware interrupt enable

Reference Temperature

in 0,01 °C

High limit

Channel 0

Low limit

Channel 0

High limit

Channel 7

Low limit

Channel 7

High limit

Channel 15

Low limit

Channel 15

Figure A-2 Data record 1 for the parameters of analog input modules

Note

The representation of limits and the reference temperature corresponds to the analog value

representation. Observe range limits when setting the limit values.

Parameter sets of signal modules

A.4 Parameters of analog input modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

404 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Diagnostic data of signal modules B

B.1 Evaluating diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program

This section

This section describes the diagnostic data structure in system data. You must be familiar with

this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the signal module in the STEP

7 user program.

Diagnostic data stored in data records

Module diagnostic data may have a length of max. 43 bytes, and are contained in data records

0 and 1:

● Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current state of an

automation system.

● Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in data record

0 and as many as 39 bytes of module specific diagnostic data.

Further references

An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal modules in

the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found

in the STEP 7 manuals.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 405

B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1

Overview

The section below describes the structure and content of the various bytes in diagnostic data.

General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to "1".

Bytes 0 and 1

Table B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of diagnostic data

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7 Incorrect parameter in the module

6 No module parameters

5 Front connector missing

4 External auxiliary voltage missing

3 Channel error

2 External error

1 Internal error

0 Module error

Byte 1 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 Channel information available

Module type (see table "Codes of the module types")

Module types

The table below lists the module type IDs (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1).

Table B-2 Codes of the module types

ID Module type

0101 Analog module

0110 CPU

1000 Function module

1100 CP

1111 Digital module

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

406 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

Overview

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital input

modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to

"1".

You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section

"Diagnostics of the modules".

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Table B-3 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 Module-internal supply voltage failure

3 0

2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP

1 0

0 0

Byte 3 7 0

6 Hardware interrupt lost

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 EPROM error

1 0

0 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 407

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Table B-4 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0

6 Channel type B#16#70: Digital input

Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

Byte 7 5 Channel error 7

6 Channel error 6

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 1

0 Channel error 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

408 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8 7 Channel error 15

6 Channel error 14

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 9

0 Channel error 8

Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The figure

below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B-5 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0

6 0

5 Sensor supply missing

4 Wire break

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Table B-6 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP

1 0

0 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 409

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3 7 0

6 Hardware interrupt lost

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 EPROM error

1 0

0 0

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Table B-7 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0

6 Channel type B#16#70: Digital input

Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

410 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 7 7 Channel error 7

6 Channel error 6

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 1

0 Channel error 0

Byte 8 7 Channel error 15

6 Channel error 14

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 9

0 Channel error 8

Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The figure

below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B-8 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 9-24 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 Wire break

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 411

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

Overview

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital output

modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to

"1".

You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section on

the special module.

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Table B-9 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP

1 0

0 0

Byte 3 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 EPROM error

1 0

0 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

412 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Bytes 4 and 8 of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Table B-10 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0

6 Channel type B#16#72: digital output

Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

Byte 7 7 Channel error 7

6 Channel error 6

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 1

0 Channel error 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 413

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8 7 Channel error 15

6 Channel error 14

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 9

0 Channel error 8

Bytes 9 and 24 of the SM 421; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The figure

below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B-11 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0

6 External load voltage missing

5 0

4 0

3 Short-circuit to M

2 0

1 0

0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Table B-12 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 Module-internal supply voltage failure

3 0

2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP

1 0

0 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

414 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 EPROM error

1 0

0 0

Bytes 4 to 10 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Table B-13 Bytes 4 to 10 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0

6 Channel type B#16#72: digital output

Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 32 channels

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 415

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 7 7 Channel error 7

6 Channel error 6

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 1

0 Channel error 0

Byte 8 7 Channel error 15

6 Channel error 14

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 9

0 Channel error 8

Byte 9 7 Channel error 23

6 Channel error 22

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 17

0 Channel error 16

Byte 10 7 Channel error 31

6 Channel error 30

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 25

0 Channel error 24

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

416 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Bytes 11 to 42 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 11 to 42. The

figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B-14 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 11 - 42 7 0

6 External load voltage missing

5 0

4 Wire break

3 Short-circuit to M

2 Short-circuit to L+

1 0

0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Table B-15 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP

1 0

0 0

Byte 3 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 EPROM error

1 0

0 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 417

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Table B-16 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0

6 Channel type B#16#72: digital output

Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

Byte 7 7 Channel error 7

6 Channel error 6

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 1

0 Channel error 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

418 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8 7 Channel error 15

6 Channel error 14

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 9

0 Channel error 8

Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The figure

below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B-17 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0

6 0

5 Fuse blown

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 419

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

Overview

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for the special analog

input modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is

set to "1".

You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section on

the special module.

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Table B-18 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP

1 0

0 Measuring range module incorrect or missing

Byte 3 7 0

6 Hardware interrupt lost

5 0

4 ADC/DAC error

3 RAM error

2 EPROM error

1 0

0 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

420 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Table B-19 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0

6 Channel type B#16#71: Analog input

Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

Byte 7 7 Channel error 7

6 Channel error 6

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 1

0 Channel error 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 421

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8 7 Channel error 15

6 Channel error 14

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 9

0 Channel error 8

Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The figure

below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B-20 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 9-24 7 Overflow

6 Underflow

5 Reference channel error

4 Wire break

3 Short-circuit to M

2 0

1 0

0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Table B-21 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP

1 0

0 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

422 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3 7 0

6 Hardware interrupt lost

5 0

4 ADC/DAC error

3 0

2 EPROM error

1 0

0 0

Bytes 4 and 7 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Table B-22 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0

6 Channel type B#16#71: Analog input

Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 16 bits long

Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 8 channels

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 423

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 7 7 Channel error 7

6 Channel error 6

5...

4...

3...

2...

1 Channel error 1

0 Channel error 0

Bytes 8 and 23 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 8 to 23. The

following table shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a

channel of the module.

Table B-23 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23

even

7 Overflow

6 Underflow

5 0

4 Wire break

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

The following table shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for

a channel of the module.

Table B-24 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23

odd

7 User calibration does not correspond to the parameter assignment

6 Open conductor in the current source

5 0

4 Underrange or overrange

3 Run time calibration error

2 Open conductor in - direction

1 Open conductor in + direction

0 User connection not wired

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

424 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Table B-25 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP

1 0

0 Thermocouple connection error

Byte 3 7 0

6 Hardware interrupt lost

5 0

4 ADC/DAC error

3 RAM error

2 EPROM error

1 0

0 0

Bytes 4 to 7 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Table B-26 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0

6 Channel type B#16#71: Analog input

Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 16 bits long

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 425

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 8 channels

Byte 7 7 Channel error 7

6 Channel error 6

5 ......

4 ......

3 ......

2 ......

1 Channel error 1

0 Channel error 0

Bytes 8 to 23 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 8 to 23. The

following table shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a

channel of the module.

Table B-27 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 8-23

even

7 Overflow

6 Underflow

5 Reference channel error

4 Wire break

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

426 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

The following table shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for

a channel of the module.

Table B-28 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23

odd

7 User calibration does not correspond to the parameter assignment

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 Runtime calibration error

2 0

1 0

0 0

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 427

Diagnostic data of signal modules

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

428 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Accessories and spare parts C

C.1 Accessories and spare parts

Accessories and spare parts

Accessories - spare parts Order number

For racks

Number wheel for slot labeling C79165-Z1523-A22

Spare slot covers (qty 10) 6ES7490-1AA00-0AA0

For power supplies

Spare connector for PS 405 (DC) 6ES7490-0A00-0AA0

Spare connector for PS 407 (AC) 6ES7490-0AB00-0AA0

Backup battery 6ES7971-0BA00

For digital modules/analog modules

Cover foil (10 x) for labeling strips of the SMs 6ES7492-2XX00-0AA0

Cover flap for fuse receptacle on the AC modules 6ES7422-0XX00-7AA0

Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7974-0AA00-0AA0

Front connector screw-type connection 6ES7492-1AL00-0AA0

Front connector spring connection 6ES7492-1BL00-0AA0

Front connector crimp connection 6ES7492-1CL00-0AA0

Panel for front connector, 5 pieces 6ES7492-2XL00-0AA0

Crimping tool for crimp contacts 6XX3 071

Crimp contacts (package of 250) 6XX3 070

Extraction tool for crimp contacts 6ES5 497-8MA11

Fuses, 8 A, quick blow

● Wickmann 194-1800-0

● Schurter SP001.1013

● Littelfuse 217.008

Labeling sheet for the front connector, petrol blue 6ES7492-2AX00-0AA0

Labeling sheet for the front connector, light 6ES7492-2BX00-0AA0

Labeling sheet for the front connector, yellow 6ES7492-2CX00-0AA0

Labeling sheet for the front connector, red 6ES7492-2DX00-0AA0

For IMs

Terminator for IM 461–0 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0

Terminator for IM 461–3 6ES7461-3AA0-7AA0

Terminator for IM 461–4 6ES7461-4AA00-7AA0

IM 463-, send IM, 600 m to IM 314 of the S5 6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0

IM cable with communication bus, 0,75 m 6ES7468-1AH50-0AA0

IM cable with communication bus, 1.5 m 6ES7468-1BB50-0AA0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 429

Accessories - spare parts Order number

IM cable with communication bus, 5 m 6ES7468-1BF00-0AA0

IM cable with communication bus, 10 m 6ES7468-1CB00-0AA0

IM cable with communication bus, 25 m 6ES7468-1CC50-0AA0

IM cable with communication bus, 50 m 6ES7468-1CF00-0AA0

IM cable with communication bus, 100 m 6ES7468-1DB00-0AA0

IM cable with current transmission, 0,75 m 6ES7468-3AH50-0AA0

IM cable with current transmission, 1.5 m 6ES7468-3BB50-0AA0

Package with plug adapters for IM 467 FO 6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0

Package with simplex plugs and polishing set for IM 467 FO 6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0

For interfacing / networking

Standard mounting rail 35 mm 6ES5710-8MA...

PROFIBUS 6XV1830-0BH10

6XV1830-3BH10

PROFIBUS 6XV1830-0BH10

PROFIBUS 6XV1830-3BH10

PROFIBUS bus connector without PG socket 6ES7972-0BA00-0XA0

PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket 6ES7972-0BB10-0XA0

PROFIBUS bus connector without PG socket, with angled cable out‐

let

6ES7972-0BA40-0X40

PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket, with angled cable outlet 6ES7972-0BB40-0X40

PROFIBUS RS 485 bus terminal 6GK1500-0AA00

6GK1500-0AB00

6GK1500-0DA00

PC/MPI cable (5 m) 6ES7901-2BF00-0AA0

For fan subassembly

Spare fan for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1TA00-6AA0

Filters (qty 10) for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1TA00-7AA0

Monitoring PCB for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1TX00-6XA0

Power supply PCB for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1XX00-6XA0

Cabinets

Cabinet 2200 x 800 x 400 with extension set for SIMATIC S7- 8MC 2281-7FC11-8DA1

Extension set for SIMATIC S7- 8MC 1605–BS70–AA0

Cables for printers with

Cable for interface module

● 1 m 6ES7368-3BB00-0AA0

● 2.5 m 6ES7368-3BC00-0AA0

● 5 m 6ES7368-3BF00-0AA0

● 10 m 6ES7368-3CB00-0AA0

Connector housing, gray

● 9-pin V42254-A6000-G109

● 15-pin V42254-A6000-G115

● 25-pin V42254-A6000-G125

Connector housing, black

Accessories and spare parts

C.1 Accessories and spare parts

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

430 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Accessories - spare parts Order number

● 9-pin V42254-A6001-G309

● 15-pin V42254-A6001-G315

● 25-pin V42254-A6001-G325

Accessories and spare parts

C.1 Accessories and spare parts

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 431

Accessories and spare parts

C.1 Accessories and spare parts

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

432 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices

(ESD) D

D.1 ESD: What are the directives for handling electrostatic sensitive

devices?

Definition

All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to

their design, these electronic components are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to any

electrostatic discharge.

These Electrostatic Sensitive Devices/Modules are commonly abbreviated ESD.

Electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:

CAUTION

Electrostatic sensitive devices can be destroyed by voltages far below the level perceived by

human beings. These voltages are generated when you touch a component or electrical

connections of a module without having discharged your body. In most cases, the damage

caused by overvoltage is not evident immediately, and results in damage only after a

prolonged period of operation.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 433

D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons

Electrostatic charging

Any person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings may

be exposed to electrostatic charge.

The figure shows the maximum electrostatic voltage which may build up on a person coming

into contact with the materials indicated. These values are in conformity with the specifications

of IEC 61000-4-2.

(kV)

5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Figure D-1 Electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person

(1) Voltage in kV

(2) Synthetic material

(3) Wool

(4) Antistatic materials, such as wood or concrete

(5) Relative air humidity in %

Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

434 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge

Ensure sufficient grounding

Make sure all persons, workplaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when ESD

components are being handled. This prevents electrostatic charging.

Avoid direct contact

You should only touch ESD components if this is unavoidable (for example, during

maintenance work). Handle the modules without touching any chip pins or PCB traces. In this

way, the discharged energy can not affect the sensitive devices.

Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by

touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments.

Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 435

Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

436 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

List of abbreviations E

E.1 List of abbreviations

List of abbreviations

Abbreviations Explanations

AC Alternating current

ADC Analog-to-digital converter

AI Analog input

AO Analog output

AS Automation system

STL Statement list (type of representation in STEP 7)

BAF Battery failure

BUS1F; BUS2F LED bus failure on the MPI/PROFIBUS DP interface 1 or 2

CH Channel

COMP Compensation circuit

CP Communications processor

CPU Central processing unit of the PLC

CR Central rack

DAC Digital-to-analog converter

DB Data block

DC Direct current

DI Digital input

DO Digital output

ESD Electrostatic sensitive device

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory

EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory

ER Expansion rack

ID Input delay

SV Set substitution value

EXM Extension module

EXTF Error LED "external fault"

FB Function block

FC Function

FEPROM Flash erasable programmable read-only memory

FM Function module

FRCE Fiber-optic cable

FC Function block diagram

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 437

Abbreviations Explanations

GD Global data communication

ES Sensor supply

IC Constant-current line

IFM1F; IFM2F LED error at interface module 1/2

IM Interface module

INTF Error LED "internal fault"

IP Intelligent I/O

L+ Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage

HLV KLV

FOC Fiber-optic cable

LAD Ladder logic diagram

M Chassis ground

M+ Measuring line (positive)

M- Measuring line (negative)

MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

MPI Multipoint interface

MRES Master reset position of the toggle switch for general reset of the CPU

MSTR Master

OB Organization block

OP Operator panel

OS Operator system

PIO Process image of outputs

PII Process image of inputs

PG Programming device

PS Power supply

QI: Analog output current

QV: Analog output voltage

RAM Random access memory

REDF Redundancy fault

RL: Load impedance

S + Sensing line (positive)

S- Sensing line (negative)

SCL Structured control language

SFB System function block

SFC System function

SM Signal module

PLC Programmable logic controller

SSL Signal module

TD HMI (text display)

SSL Transducer

UC Universal current

TD Universal rack

UCM Common mode voltage

List of abbreviations

E.1 List of abbreviations

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

438 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Abbreviations Explanations

UH: Auxiliary voltage

Uiso Potential difference between MANA and local ground

USR User

Vs Sensor voltage

Sign Sign

CR Central rack

List of abbreviations

E.1 List of abbreviations

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 439

List of abbreviations

E.1 List of abbreviations

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

440 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Glossary

2-conductor/3-conductor/4-conductor connection

Method of connecting to the module, for example, connecting resistance thermometers or

resistors to the front connector of the analog module or loads to the voltage output of an analog

output module.

2-wire transducer/4-wire transducer

Type of transducer (2-wire transducer: Power supply via terminals of the

analog input module; 4-wire transducer: power supply via separate connectors of the

transducer)

Address

An address identifies a specific operand or range of operands, examples: input I 12.1; memory

word MW25; data block DB3.

Automation system

An automation system is a → programmable controller comprising a → central rack, a CPU and

various input/output modules.

Backplane bus

The backplane bus is a serial data bus over which modules communicate with each other and

over which they are supplied with the necessary voltage. The connection between modules is

established by bus connectors.

Backup battery

The backup battery ensures that the → user program on the → CPU is not lost in the event of

a power failure and that defined data areas, bit memory, timers, and counters are also retained.

Backup voltage, external

The same backup can be achieved as with a backup battery if a backup voltage (direct voltage

between 5 V and 15 V) is applied to the "EXT.-BATT." socket of the CPU.

The external backup voltage is required to replace a power supply module if the user program

and data stored in a RAM (for example, bit memory, timers, counters, system data, integrated

clock) needs to be backed up while the module is exchanged.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 441

Basic error limit

The basic error limit represents the operational limit at 25° C relative to the nominal range of

the analog module.

Baud rate

Speed of the data transmission (bps)

Central rack

An S7-400 consists of a central rack (CR) to which expansion racks (ER) can be assigned.

The central rack is the rack containing the → CPU.

Cold restart

→ Hot restart of the automation system and its user program after all dynamic data (variables

of the input/output image, internal registers, timers, counters etc. and their program sections)

have been reset to a predefined value.

A cold start can be triggered automatically (for example following power outage, loss of

information in the dynamic memory areas etc.).

Common mode voltage

Voltage common to all terminals of a group and that is measured between this group and any

reference point (usually ground).

Communication load

Load on cyclic program execution of a CPU caused by communication activities (PROFIBUS-

DP).

To prevent communication activities putting too much load on program execution, it is possible

to set the maximum permitted cycle load caused by communication in the parameter

assignment in STEP 7.

Communications processor

Programmable module for communication tasks, for example, point-to-point links.

Compensating box

Compensating boxes can be used when measuring temperatures with thermoelements

connected to analog input modules. The compensating box is a circuit for compensating

temperature fluctuations at the → reference junction.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

442 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Constant bus cycle time

Constant bus cycle time means a DP bus cycle accurate to a few microseconds that can be

configured in STEP 7.

→ Communications processor

Data block

Data blocks (DBs) are data areas in the user program that contain user data. There are shared

data blocks that can be accessed by all logic blocks and there are instance data blocks

assigned to a specific FB call.

Declaration

Definition of variables (for example parameters or local data of a block) with name, data type,

comment etc.

Default (setting)

The default is a practical basic setting that is always used when no other value is specified.

Destruction limit

Limit of the permitted input voltage/current. If this limit is exceeded, the measurement accuracy

can deteriorate. If the destruction limit is exceeded considerably, the internal measuring

circuitry can be destroyed.

Diagnostic buffer

The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area on the CPU in which the diagnostic events

are entered in the order in which they occur.

The user can read the precise cause of the problem from the diagnostic buffer with STEP 7

(PLC -> Module Information menu command) and start troubleshooting measures.

Diagnostic data

All diagnostic events that occur are collected on the CPU and entered in the → diagnostic

buffer. If an error OB exists, this is started.

Diagnostic interrupt

Diagnostics-compliant modules signal detected system errors to the → CPU using diagnostic

interrupts. If a diagnostic interrupt occurs, the CPU calls OB82.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 443

Diagnostics

Generic term for → system diagnostics, process fault diagnostics and user-defined diagnostics.

Direct data exchange

Direct data exchange is sometimes also known as direct communication. In direct data

exchange, local input address areas of an intelligent DP slave (for example, CPU 315-2 with

PROFIBUS DP attachment) or a DP master are assigned to a PROFIBUS DP partner. The

intelligent DP slave or the DP master receives the input data that the PROFIBUS DP partner

sends to its DP master via these assigned input address areas.

DP master

A node with master functionality in PROFIBUS DP. A master that conforms to IEC

61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the DP protocol is known as a DP master. The token allowing

access to the bus is always passed on among the masters. The slaves, in this case DP slaves,

can only react when requested to by a master. The following distinction must be made:

DP master (class 1): handles user data exchange with the DP slaves assigned to it.

DP master (class 2): Provides services such as: reading input/output data, diagnostics, global

control.

DP slave

A → slave operated on PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol is known as a DP slave.

Equipotential bonding

An electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that ties parts of electrical

equipment and extraneous conductive parts to the same or approximately the same potential

to prevent disturbing or dangerous voltages between these parts.

→ Function block

→ Function

Fiber-optic cable

The "force" function overwrites a variable (for example, memory bit, output) with a value defined

by the user.

At the same time, the variable is write-protected so that the value cannot be modified from any

other location (it cannot, for example, be overwritten by the user program). After removing the

programming device, this value is retained.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

444 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

The write-protection is canceled only after invoking the "unforce" function, following which the

variable can once again be written with the value set by the user program.

The "force" function can, for example, be used during commissioning to set specific outputs

to the "ON" state for any length of time even if the logic operation in the user program is not

true (due to missing wiring at inputs).

A fiber-optic cable is a transmission medium made of glass or plastic fiber. Fiber-optic cables

are insensitive to electromagnetic interference and allow high data transmission rates.

Fiber-optic cable

The "force" function overwrites a variable (for example, memory bit, output) with a value defined

by the user.

At the same time, the variable is write-protected so that the value cannot be modified from any

other location (it cannot, for example, be overwritten by the user program). After removing the

programming device, this value is retained.

The write-protection is canceled only after invoking the "unforce" function, following which the

variable can once again be written with the value set by the user program.

The "force" function can, for example, be used during commissioning to set specific outputs

to the "ON" state for any length of time even if the logic operation in the user program is not

true (due to missing wiring at inputs).

A fiber-optic cable is a transmission medium made of glass or plastic fiber. Fiber-optic cables

are insensitive to electromagnetic interference and allow high data transmission rates.

Floating

In the case of floating I/O modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits are

electrically isolated from each other, for example, by optocouplers, relay contacts, or

transformers. The I/O circuits can be connected to a common potential.

FREEZE

Control command, inputs of the → DP slaves are frozen at their current values.

Function

According to IEC 1131-3, a function (FC) is a → logic block without → static data. A function

allows parameter passing in the user program. This makes them suitable for programming

commonly recurring complex functions such as calculations.

Function block

According to IEC 1131-3, a function block (FB) is a → logic block with → static data. An FB has

"memory" so that it is possible to access its parameters (for example outputs) from any part

of the user program.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 445

Functional grounding

Grounding with the sole purpose of ensuring the intended function of the electrical equipment.

Functional grounding, short-circuits interfering voltages that would otherwise have an

unacceptable influence on the equipment.

Fuse blown

Parameter in STEP 7 for digital output modules. When the parameter is enabled, the blowing

of one or more fuses is detected by the module. With suitable parameter assignment, a →

diagnostic interrupt is triggered.

Grounding

Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to the ground electrode (one or

more conductive parts that make good contact with ground) via a grounding system.

Hardware interrupt

A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules due to a particular event in

the process (violation of a limit value, module has completed the cyclic conversion of its

channels).

The hardware interrupt is signaled to the CPU. In keeping with the priority of this interrupt, the

corresponding → organization block is then executed.

Hold last value (HLV)

The module retains the last value output prior to changing to STOP mode.

Hot restart

When a CPU starts up (for example as a result of activating the mode selector or turning on

the power), cyclic program execution (OB1) initially processes either OB101 (hot restart),

OB100 (cold restart: hot restart) or OB102 (cold restart). Backup of the CPU is absolutely

necessary for a hot restart.

The following applies: all data areas (timers, counters, memory bits, data blocks) and their

content are retained. The → process image of the inputs is read in and the execution of the

STEP 7 user program is continued from the point at which it was last stopped (STOP, power

down).

The other startup modes available are → cold restart and → warm restart.

I/O bus

Part of the → backplane bus in the automation system optimized for fast exchange of signals

between the CPU or CPUs and the signal modules.

Useful data (for example, digital input signals of a signal module) and system data (for example

default parameter data records of a signal module) is transferred over the I/O bus.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

446 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Input delay

Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to suppress coupled

interference. Spurious pulses of 0 ms up to the selected input delay are suppressed.

The selected input delay is subject to a tolerance that can be found in the technical

specifications of the module. A high input delay suppresses longer spurious pulses, a lower

delay suppresses shorter spurious pulses.

The permitted input delay depends on the length of the cable between sensor and module. If,

for example, there are long unshielded cables to the sensor (over 100 m), a high input delay

must be set.

Integration time

The integration time is the reciprocal of the → interference frequency suppression in ms.

Interrupt

SIMATIC S7 recognizes 28 different priority classes that control the execution of the

user program. These priority classes include interrupts, such as hardware interrupts. When an

interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block in

which the user can program the required reaction (for example, in an FB).

Interrupt reaction time

The interrupt reaction time is the time from the first occurrence of an interrupt signal to

executing the first statement in the interrupt OB. General rule: Higher priority interrupts are

serviced first. This means that the interrupt reaction time is extended by the program execution

time of the higher priority interrupts and interrupts with the same priority that were called earlier

(queue).

Linearity error

The linearity error indicates the maximum deviation of the measured/output value from the

ideal linear relationship between measured/output signal and digital value. This is specified as

a percentage related to the nominal range of the analog module.

Load memory

The load memory is part of a programmable module (CPU, CP). It contains the objects

generated by the programming device (local objects). It is implemented either as a plug-in

memory card or as integrated memory.

Local data

Local data is the data assigned to a → logic block that is declared in its → declaration section

or in its variable declaration. It includes the following (block-specific): Formal parameters,

→ static data, → temporary data.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 447

Measuring principle, instantaneous value encoding

A module with instantaneous value encoding is always used for extremely fast measurement

methods or for values that change very quickly. With this technique, the module accesses the

variable to be measured as quickly as possible and returns an instantaneous recording of the

signal at a specific time. It should be remembered that due to this measurement method, the

modules are more "sensitive" than the modules using the integrating method. As a result,

interference affecting the measured value can lead to falsification. When using these modules,

you should make sure that the measurement signal is "clean", for example by adhering to the

installation instructions.

Measuring principle, integrating

A module with an integrating measurement technique is always used for measurements that

are not time-critical. The integration time is inversely proportional to the network frequency.

You set the network frequency in STEP 7 and this results in the integration time. At a network

frequency of 50 Hz, the integration time is 20 ms or even multiples of 20 ms. Since the

measured value is integrated over exactly this period, at least one or more entire periods of

the network frequency that may be superimposed on the measurement signal are also

recorded. The mean value of the interference is therefore integrated to zero (positive

component of the first half period = negative component of the second half period) and, as a

result of the principle, only the useful signal is detected.

Measuring range module

Measuring range submodules are plugged onto analog input modules to adapt them to various

measuring ranges.

Memory reset

During a memory reset, the following memory areas of the CPU are erased: Work memory,

write/read area of the load memory, system memory.

The MPI parameters and the diagnostic buffer are retained.

Mode

Mode means the following:

1. The mode in which the CPU operates as set by the mode selector or using a PG

2. The type of program execution on the CPU

Mode selector

Using the mode selector, the user can set the current mode of the CPU (RUN, STOP) or reset

the memory of the CPU (MRES).

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

448 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Noise suppression

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the alternating voltage power

supply can interfere with the measured value, in particular when measuring small voltage

ranges and with thermoelements. With this parameter, the user specifies the predominant

power supply frequency in the system.

Non-isolated

With non-floating input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits

are electrically interconnected.

Operating state

The automation systems of SIMATIC S7 recognize the following operating modes or simply

modes: STOP, → STARTUP, RUN and HOLD.

Operational limit

The operational limit is the measurement or output error of the analog module throughout the

entire temperature range related to the nominal range of the analog module.

Parameters

1. Variables of a → logic block

2. Variable for setting the properties of a module (one or more per module). When shipped,

every module has practical basic parameter settings that the user can modify in STEP 7.

Point-to-point link

On a point-to-point link, only two nodes are physically linked to each other. This type of

communications link is used when the use of a communication network is not practical or when

different types of nodes need to be connected (for example, PLC with process computer).

Priority class

The S7 CPU operating system provides up to 28 priority classes (= program execution levels"),

for example for cyclic program execution, hardware interrupt-controlled program execution.

Each priority class is assigned to → organization blocks in which the user can program a

reaction. The OBs have different default priorities and if the OBs are called at the same time,

the priority decides which executes first and which can interrupt another. The default priorities

can be modified by the user.

Process image

The signal states of the digital input and output modules are entered in a process image on

the CPU.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 449

A distinction is made between the process image of the inputs and the outputs. The process

image of the inputs (PII) is read from the input modules by the operating system prior to

execution of the user program. The process image of the outputs (PIQ) is transferred to the

output modules by the operating system on completion of program execution.

Product version

The product version distinguishes products with the same order number. The product version

is incremented when upwards-compatible functional enhancements are made, when there are

modifications relating solely to production (use of new components) and when bugs are fixed.

PROFIBUS DP

Digital, analog and intelligent modules, along with a wide range of field devices complying with

IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, such as drives or valve clusters are moved away from the

automation system to the local process over distances of up to 23 km.

The modules and field devices are interconnected with the automation system over the

PROFIBUS DP Fieldbus and are addressed in the same way as centralized I/O.

Programming device

A programming device (PG) is a personal computer with a special compact design, suitable

for industrial conditions. A programming device is completely equipped for programming the

SIMATIC automation systems.

RC element

Connection of ohmic resistor and capacitor in series. When a consumer is turned off, an

overvoltage occurs in circuits with an inductive load that can cause an electric arc and can

reduce the life of the contacts. To extinguish this electric arc, the contact can be bridged by

an RC element.

Reaction time

The reaction time is the time from detecting an input signal to changing the output signal

associated with it.

The actual reaction time is between a longest and a shortest reaction time. When configuring

a plant, the longest reaction time must always be assumed.

Reference channel error

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. This parameter enables the error group

message of the reference junction when using thermoelements. A reference channel error

occurs when using thermoelements:

● When a fault occurs (for example broken wire) in a reference channel to which a

thermoresistor (RTD) is connected (channel 0) to compensate temperature drift.

● When the → reference temperature is outside the permitted range of values.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

450 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Each input channel to which the reference junction "RTD on channel 0" is assigned has the

reference channel error in the situation described above - the measured temperature is no

longer compensated.

Reference junction

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. This parameter specifies the reference point

(point with known temperature) when using the thermoelements. Reference points can be:

Thermoresistor on channel 0 of the module; → compensating box, → reference temperature.

Reference potential

Potential on the basis of which the voltages of the circuits involved are measured.

Reference temperature

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The reference temperature is the temperature

of the reference junction of thermoelements. The reference temperature allows correct

temperature measurement with thermoelements. The temperature of the reference junction

must be known because a thermoelement always detects the temperature difference between

the measuring point and the reference junction.

Repeater

Device for amplifying bus signals and for linking → bus segments over long distances.

Repetition accuracy

The repetition accuracy is the maximum deviation of the measured/output values when the

same input signal is applied or the same output value is specified repeatedly. The repetition

accuracy relates to the nominal range of the module and applies to the settled state (in terms

of temperature).

Resolution

With analog modules, this is the number of bits that represent the digitalized analog value in

binary format. The resolution depends on the module and, with analog input modules, on the

→ integration time. The longer the integration time, the more precise the resolution of the

measured value. The resolution including sign can be up to 16 bits.

Retentive memory

Data areas in data blocks along with timers, counters and bit memory are retentive when their

content is retained through a warm restart or power cycle.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 451

S7 basic communication

Communication functions integrated in the CPU of SIMATIC S7/C7 that can be called up by

the user. These functions are called in the user program with → system functions. The user

data length is up to 76 bytes (small amounts of data). S7 basic communication is implemented

over → MPI.

S7 communication

Communication functions integrated in the CPU of SIMATIC S7/C7 that can be called up by

the user. These functions are called in the user program with → system function blocks. The

user data length is up to 64 Kbytes (large amounts of data). S7 communication provides a

network-independent interface between devices of the types SIMATIC S7/C7 and PG/PC.

Segment

→ Bus segment

Shunt

Conductor connected in parallel in electric circuits.

Signal module

Signal modules (SMs) form the interface between the process and the automation system.

There are input modules, output modules, input/output modules (in each case, digital and

analog)

Smoothing

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are smoothed by digital

filtering. It is possible to select between no, weak, medium and strong filtering for each

individual module. The stronger the smoothing, the higher the time constant of the digital filter.

Standard communication

Communication over standardized protocols such as PROFIBUS-DP, PROFIBUS-FMS.

Static data

Static data is data that is used only within a → function block. This data is stored in an instance

data block belonging to the function block. Data stored in this way is retained until the next

function block call.

Substitute value

Substitute values are values that are output to the process or are used in the user program

instead of a process value if a signal output module is defective.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

452 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

The substitute values can be selected by the user in the parameter settings in STEP 7 (retain

old value, substitute value 0 or 1). Are the values to be output at an output or outputs in the

CPU changes to STOP.

SYNC

Control command from the → master to the → slave: freezes the outputs at their current value.

System diagnostics

System diagnostics is the detection, evaluation and signaling of faults/errors occurring within

the automation system. Examples of such faults and errors include: Program errors or failures

on modules. System errors can be indicated by LEDs or in STEP 7.

Temperature coefficient

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules during when measuring temperature with

thermoresistors (RTD). The temperature coefficient is selected to suit the thermoresistor used

(according to DIN standard).

Temperature error

The temperature error is the drift of the measured/output values caused by changes in the

ambient temperature of the analog module. It is specified as a percentage per degree Kelvin

and relates to the nominal range of the analog module.

Temperature error of the internal compensation

The temperature error of the internal compensation occurs only when measuring with

thermoelements. It indicates the error that must be added to the actual temperature error when

the "internal reference" mode is selected. The error is specified either as a percentage of the

physical nominal range of the analog module or as an absolute value in °C.

Temporary data

Temporary data is → local data of a block that is entered in the L stack during execution of the

block and that is no longer available on completion of execution.

Total current

Total of all the currents of all output channels of a digital output module.

Unforce

→ Force

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 453

Ungrounded

Without electrical connection to ground.

Warm restart

Warm restart following a power down with a set of dynamic data programmed by the user und

a user program component specified in the system.

A warm restart is characterized by the setting of a status bit or other suitable means that can

be read by the user program and indicate that the stoppage of the automation system caused

by a power down was detected in RUN mode.

Wire break

Parameter in STEP 7. A line continuity or wire break check is used to monitor the connection

from the input to the sensor or from the output to the actuator. If a broken wire is detected, the

module senses a current flow at the input/output set in the parameter assignment.

Work memory

The work memory is a → RAM area on the → CPU that is accessed by the processor during

execution of the user program.

Glossary

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

454 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Index

24 VDC fan subassembly

Features, 384

Installation, 385

Specifications, 385

wiring, 384

2-conductor connection, 213

2-wire transducer, 208

3-conductor connection, 213

4-conductor connection, 212

4-wire transducer, 210

Abbreviations, 437

Meaning, 437

Accessories

Order numbers, 429

S7-400, 429

ADC

Meaning, 437

ADC-DAC error

Analog input module, 225

Additional support, 4

Address area

Setting, 354

Addressing

S5 modules, 347

Meaning, 437

Ambient conditions, 24

Climatic, 25

IM 463-2, 345

Mechanical, 24

Analog functions

STEP 7 blocks, 163

Analog input channels

Basic execution time, 196

Conversion time, 196

Cycle time, 196

Measuring method, 189

Measuring range, 189

Representation of analog values, 169

Analog input module

ADC-DAC error, 225

Auxiliary voltage missing, 225

Causes of error and remedies, 225

Channel error, 225

Channel information available, 225

Configuration error, 225

Connecting resistance thermometers, 212

Connecting resistors, 212

Connecting sensors, 204

Connecting thermocouples, 215

Diagnostic data, 420

Diagnostic interrupt, 201

diagnostic message in measured value, 223

Diagnostic messages, 223

Diagnostics, 201

EPROM error, 225

External error, 225

Front connector missing, 225

Hardware interrupt lost, 225

Incorrect parameters, 225

Internal error, 225

isolated, 204

Limit, 201

Measurement, 201

Measuring method, 201

Measuring range, 202

Measuring range module incorrect/missing, 225

Module error, 225

No parameters, 225

Noise suppression, 202

non-isolated, 204

Overflow, 226

Parameter assignment error, 225

Parameters, 201, 403

potential difference, 204

RAM error, 225

Reference channel error, 226

Reference junction, 202

Reference temperature, 202

Run time calibration error, 226

Short-circuit to M, 225

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 264

SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 229

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 455

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 237, 253

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 303

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 292

SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 273

Smoothing of analog input values, 196, 202

STOP mode, 225

Structure of data record 1, 403

Temperature coefficient, 202

temperature unit, 202

Underflow, 226

Wire break, 225

Wire break monitoring, 201

Analog module

Behavior, 192

Commissioning steps, 167

Determination of the measuring error/output

error, 195

Diagnostics, 223

EXTF LED, 223

Interrupt, 227

INTF LED, 223

Load voltage failure, 193

Parameter assignment, 199

Analog modules, 163

Diagnostic interrupt, 227

Analog output channel

Conversion time, 198

Response time, 199

Analog output channels

Basic execution time, 198

Cycle time, 198

Analog output module

Connecting loads to a voltage output, 220

Connecting loads to current outputs, 222

Connecting loads/actuators, 219

electrically isolated, 219

Output, 203

Output range, 203

Output type, 203

Parameters, 203

Response time, 198

Settling time, 198

SM 432, AO 8 x 13 bit, 316

Analog output modules

Properties, 165

Analog signals

Cables, 219

Analog value

Converting, 167

Sign, 168

Analog-to-digital conversion, 196

Meaning, 437

Application

IM 467/ IM 467 FO, 363

RS 485 repeater, 388

Area of application

IM 463-2, 345

Meaning, 437

ATEX Directive, 15

Australia

Marking, 15

Auxiliary voltage missing

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Backplane bus, 46

Backup battery, 43

Function, 43

Shipping and storage conditions, 23

Specifications, 44

Storage, 23

Backup time, 44

Calculating, 44

BAF

Meaning, 437

Basic error limit, 195

Basic execution time

Analog input channels, 196

Analog output channels, 198

Basic knowledge required, 3

Battery, 23, 43

Battery type, 43

Battery voltage, 46

Bending radius

For FOC, 374

Block diagram

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 238, 254

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 317

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 265

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 304

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 293

SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 274

Bus connector, 369

BUS1F; BUS2F

Meaning, 437

Bytes 0 and 1

of diagnostic data, 406

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

456 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Cable

Plug in, 350

Prepare, 350

Cable 721

Pin assignments, 357

Cable duct and fan subassemblies

Features, 377

Cable length

IM 463-2, 347

Segment, 388

Selecting, 351

Cable length selector switch, 349

Cable Lengths

For PROFIBUS DP, 369

Cables, 329

for analog signals, 204, 219

Calculating

Backup time, 44

Calibration software, 293, 303

Causes of error and remedies

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

CE marking, 13

Certifications, 13

Meaning, 437

Change

Fuse, 148, 152

Changing

Configuration in RUN (CiR), 199

Fuse, 156

Parameter assignment in the user program, 199

Rack number, 332

Changing the fuse, 152

Channel cable, 380

Function, 380

Specifications, 380

Channel error

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Channel information available

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

CiR, 86

Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit, 229

Climatic ambient conditions, 25

Commissioning analog modules

Steps, 167

Commissioning digital modules

Steps, 85

Communication bus, 29

Communication services

IM 467, 365

IM 467 FO, 365

COMP

Meaning, 437

Compatibility

IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 342

Compensating

Reference junction temperature for

thermocouples, 216

Compensating box, 217

Connecting, 217

compensation

external, 217

Internal, 216, 217

Configurable diagnostic messages, 88

Configuration

IM 467, 368

IM 467 FO, 368

Interface modules, 325

S5 modules, 355

Configuration error

Analog input module, 225

Configuration in RUN, 86

Configuration in RUN (CiR)

Changing, 199

Configuration of analog output circuits

SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 323

Connecting actuators

to analog output module, 219

Connecting loads

to analog output module, 219

Connecting loads to a voltage output

to analog output module, 220

Connecting loads to current outputs

to analog output module, 222

Connecting resistance thermometers

to analog input module, 212

Connecting resistors

to analog input module, 212

Connecting sensors

to analog input module, 204

Connection

Compensating box, 217

Connecting loads to current outputs, 222

Electrically isolated sensors, 204

IM 463-2, 350

IM 467 FO with fiber-optic cable, 372

Non-isolated sensors, 206

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 457

Resistance thermometers and resistors, 212

rules, 327

Thermocouples to resistance thermometers, 218

Voltage sensors, 207

Connection and circuit diagram

SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 98

SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 138, 141

SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 101

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 113

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 123

SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 127

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 130

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 150

SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 146

Connection diagram

SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 231

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 239, 255

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 318

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 266

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 295

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 305

SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 275

Connection scheme

RS 485 repeater, 390

Connector

Mounting, 372

Connector pin assignment, 370

Contact, direct, 435

Controlling

Operating state, 366

Conversion time

Analog input channels, 196

Analog output channel, 198

Converting

Analog values, 167

Courses, 5

Cover, 47

Meaning, 437

CPU

Meaning, 437

Meaning, 437, 439

CR2

Design, 33

Specifications, 33

CR3

Design, 35

Specifications, 35

cULus approval, 15

Relay modules, 16

Cycle time

Analog input channels, 196

Analog output channels, 198

DAC

Meaning, 437

Data record

for diagnostic data, 405

for parameters, 395

Data record 1

Analog input module design, 403

Digital input module configuration, 397

Digital output module design, 400

Meaning, 437

Definition

Electrostatic sensitive devices, 433

Degree of protection, 26

IP20, 26

Dependencies

Input values, 107

Output values, 145

Design

CR2, 33

CR3, 35

ER1, ER2, 37

IM 467/ IM 467 FO, 363

Power supply, redundant, 41

Rack, 27

UR1, 29

UR2-H, 31

Destination CPU for interrupt

Digital output module, 88

Meaning, 437

Diagnostic data

Analog input modules:, 420

Bytes 0 and 1, 406

Data record, 405

Digital input modules, 407

Evaluating, 405

of the digital output modules, 412

of the SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 407

Signal modules, 405

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 409

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 417

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 412

SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 414

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

458 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 422

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 420

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 425

Diagnostic data entry, 194

Diagnostic interrupt

Analog input module, 201

Analog modules, 227

Digital modules, 93

Diagnostic message, 90

Channel error, 90

Channel information available, 90

EPROM error, 90

External auxiliary voltage missing, 90

External error, 90

Front connector missing, 90

Fuse blown, 90

Hardware interrupt lost, 90

Incorrect parameters, 90

Internal error, 90

Internal voltage failure, 90

Load voltage L+ missing, 90

Module error, 90

No module parameters, 90

Parameter assignment error, 90

Sensor supply missing, 90

Short-circuit to L+, 90

Short-circuit to M, 90

Wire break, 90

Diagnostic messages, 89, 223

Analog input modules:, 223

Digital modules, 90

Reading, 89, 223

Diagnostics

Analog input module, 201

Analog modules, 223

Digital input module, 87

Digital output module, 88

for digital modules, 88

Diagnostics interrupt enable

Digital input module, 87

Digital output module, 88

Digital input module

Diagnostic data, 407

Diagnostics, 87

Diagnostics interrupt enable, 87

Hardware interrupt enable, 87

Input delay, 87

Keep last value, 87

Load voltage L+ missing, 87

Parameters, 87, 397

Sensor supply missing, 87

SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 100

SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 109

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 119, 122

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 112

SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 97

SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 126

Structure of data record 1, 397

Substitute a value, 87

Substitute a value "1", 87

Wire break monitoring, 87

Digital input modules

Features, 83

Digital module

Auxiliary voltage missing, 91

Causes of error and remedies, 91

Channel error, 91

Channel information available, 91

Commissioning steps, 85

Diagnostic messages, 90

Diagnostics, 88

EPROM error, 91

External error, 91

EXTF LED, 89

Front connector missing, 91

Fuse blown, 92

Hardware interrupt, 93

Hardware interrupt lost, 91, 94

Incorrect parameters, 91

Internal error, 91

Internal voltage failure, 91

Interrupt, 93

interrupt-triggering channels, 94

INTF LED, 89

Load voltage L+ missing, 92

Module error, 91

No parameters, 91

Parameter assignment, 85

Parameter assignment error, 91

Sensor supply missing, 92

Short-circuit to L+, 91

Short-circuit to M, 91

STOP mode, 91

Wire break, 92

Digital output module

Destination CPU for interrupt, 88

Diagnostic data, 412

Diagnostics, 88

Diagnostics interrupt enable, 88

Fuse blown, 88

Keep last value, 88

Load voltage L+ missing, 88

Parameters, 88, 400

Short-circuit to L+, 88

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 459

Short-circuit to M, 88

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 149

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 129

SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 137, 140

SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 145

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 153

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 132

Structure of data record 1, 400

Substitute a value, 88

Substitute a value "1", 88

Wire break monitoring, 88

Digital output modules

Features, 84

Discharge of static electricity

Protective measures, 435

Discharge, electrostatic

Persons, 434

Displaying parameter assignment errors

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 301

Meaning, 437

Documentation package, 4

Dynamic parameters, 85

Edge, 87

EEPROM

Meaning, 437

Electrical isolation, 391

Electrically isolated sensors, 204

Connecting, 204

Electromagnetic compatibility, 20

Electrostatic sensitive devices

Definition, 433

EMC

Definition, 20

Meaning, 437

EMC definition, 20

EMC directive, 14

Emission of radio frequency interference, 21

Enabling

Interrupt, 93, 227

Ensuring

Wire break monitoring, 106, 116

EPROM, 437

EPROM error

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Meaning, 437

ER1 and ER2

Specifications, 37

ER1, ER2

Design, 37

Error

of an analog module, 195

Error messages

Power supply modules, 48

Meaning, 438

ESD

Meaning, 437

Evaluating

Diagnostic data, 405

EXM

Meaning, 437

External error

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

EXTF

Meaning, 437

EXTF LED

Analog module, 223

Digital module, 89

Failure

Supply voltage, 107

Fan monitoring, 378

Fan subassemblies

120/230 VAC, 381

24 VDC, 384

Fans, 378

Meaning, 437

Features

24 VDC fan subassembly, 384

Cable duct and fan subassemblies, 377

Digital input modules, 83

Digital output modules, 84

Power supply modules, 39

Power supply, redundant, 41

Relay output module, 84

SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 109

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 119

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 153

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 132

FEPROM

Meaning, 437

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

460 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Firmware, 367

Approval, 18

Meaning, 437

FOC

Meaning, 438

Reusing, 373

FRCE

Meaning, 437

Front connector missing

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Function

Backup battery, 43

Channel cable, 380

IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 330

IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 333

IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 337

IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 340

Interface modules, 325

Operator controls, 47

Functions

Power supply modules, 39

Rack, 27

Fuse, 385

change, 148

Changing, 156

The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly, 381

Fuse blown

Digital module, 92

Digital output module, 88

Meaning, 438

Grounded operation

RS 485 repeater, 390

Grounding, 435

Hardware interrupt

Digital modules, 93

End of scan cycle, 228

when limit is exceeded, 227

Hardware interrupt enable

Digital input module, 87

Hardware interrupt lost

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91, 94

HLV

Meaning, 438

Hotline, 5

I/O bus, 29

Meaning, 438

Meaning, 437

Module types, 406

IEC 61131-2, 13

IFM1F; IFM2F

Meaning, 438

IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

Function, 330

Operator controls and display elements, 330

Parameter assignment, 331

Technical specifications, 332

IM 460-1 and 461-1

Specifications, 336

IM 460-1 and IM 461-1

Function, 333

Operator controls and indicators, 334

Parameter assignment, 335

IM 460-3 and 461-3

Technical specifications, 339

IM 460-3 and IM 461-3

Function, 337

Operator controls and display elements, 337

Parameter assignment, 338

IM 460-4 and 461-4

Specifications, 342

IM 460-4 and IM 461-4

Compatibility, 342

Function, 340

Parameter assignment, 341

Position of operator control and display

elements, 340

IM 463-2

Ambient conditions, 345

Area of application, 345

Cable 721, 357

Cable length, 347

Connecting, 350

EMC resistance, 345

Indicators, 348

LEDs, 349

Operator controls, 348

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 461

Order number, 345

Rules for connecting, 347

Specifications, 361

Terminator, 359

IM 467, 363

Communication services, 365

Configuration, 368

Connection to PROFIBUS DP, 368

Specifications, 374, 376

IM 467 FO, 363

Communication services, 365

Configuration, 368

Connection to PROFIBUS DP, 368

Fiber-optic cable, connecting, 372

IM operating mode, 366

IM 467/ IM 467 FO

Application, 363

Design, 363

Incorrect parameters

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Indicators, 45

IM 463-2, 348

Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131

for digital inputs, 95

Input delay, 108

Digital input module, 87

Input values

Dependencies, 107

Installation

24 VDC fan subassembly, 385

RS 485 repeater, 388

Safety requirements, 19

The 120/230 V DC fan subassembly, 382

Insulation resistance, 26

Insulation test, 26

Interface

Selecting, 350

Interface module

IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 334

IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 337

IM 460-4, 340

IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 340

IM 461-4, 340

Interface modules

Configuration, 325

Function, 325

IM 460-0, 330

IM 460-1, 334

IM 460-3, 337

IM 461-0, 330

IM 461-1, 334

IM 461-3, 337

Interface selector switch, 349

Interference

pulse-shaped, 20

sinusoidal, 21

Interference frequency suppression 10 Hz

Step response, 312

Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz

Step response, 313

Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz

Step response, 312

Interference frequency suppression 60 Hz

Step response, 313

Internal error

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Internal voltage failure

Digital module, 91

Interrupt

Analog modules, 227

Digital modules, 93

Enabling, 93, 227

Interrupt-triggering channels

of the digital module, 94

INTF

Meaning, 438

INTF LED

Analog module, 223

Digital module, 89

Meaning, 438

IP20, 26

Keep last value

Digital input module, 87

Digital output module, 88

L+

Meaning, 438

LAD

Meaning, 438

LED, 366

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, 46

BAF, BATTF, 46

Parameter assignment error, 286

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

462 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

LEDs, 45, 378

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT INDIC on

1BATT, 52

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC on

2BATT, 52

BAF, BATTF; BATT INDIC on BATT, 51

IM 463-2, 349

INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 49

LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 46

Limit

Analog input module, 201

Line harmonics, 21

Load voltage failure

of the analog module, 193

Load voltage L+ missing

Digital input module, 87

Digital module, 92

Digital output module, 88

Low voltage directive, 14

Meaning, 438

M-

Meaning, 438

M+

Meaning, 438

MANA

Meaning, 438

Manual

purpose, 3

Manual package, 4

Marine approvals, 19

Marking

Australia, 15

New Zeeland, 15

Meaning

Abbreviations, 437, 438

AC:, 437

ADC:, 437

AI:, 437

AO:, 437

AS:, 437

BAF:, 437

BUS1F; BUS2F:, 437

CH:, 437

COMP:, 437

CP:, 437

CPU:, 437

CR, 439

CR:, 437

DAC:, 437

DB:, 437

DC:, 437

DI:, 437

DO:, 437

EEPROM:, 437

EMC:, 437

EPROM:, 437

ER:, 437

ES, 438

ESD:, 437

EXM:, 437

EXTF:, 437

FB:, 437

FC, 437

FC:, 437

FEPROM:, 437

FM:, 437

FOC, 438

FRCE:, 437

GD, 438

HLV, 438

IC, 438

ID:, 437

IFM1F; IFM2F, 438

IM, 438

INTF, 438

IP, 438

L+, 438

LAD, 438

M, 438

M-, 438

M+, 438

MANA, 438

MPI, 438

MRES, 438

MSTR, 438

OB, 438

OP, 438

OS, 438

PG, 438

PII, 438

PIO, 438

PLC, 438

PS, 438

QI, 438

QV, 438

RAM, 438

REDF, 438

RL, 438

S +, 438

SCL, 438

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 463

SFB, 438

SFC, 438

Sign, 439

SM, 438

SSL, 438

SSV:, 437

STL:, 437

TD, 438

UC, 438

UCM, 438

UH, 439

Uiso, 439

USR, 439

Vs, 439

Measured value resolution, 169

Measurement

Analog input module, 201

Measuring method

Analog input channels, 189

Analog input module, 201

Measuring methods

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 302

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 271

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 288

SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 236

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 249, 262

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 315

Measuring range

Analog input channels, 189

Analog input module, 202

Measuring range module, 189

Replugging, 190

Setting, 189

Measuring range module incorrect/missing

Analog input module, 225

Measuring range modules

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 270

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 284

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 247, 259

Measuring ranges

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 302

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 272

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 290

SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 236

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 252, 263

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 315

Mechanical ambient conditions, 24

Testing, 25

Mode selector, 367

Module error

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Module overview, 164

Digital modules, 83

Module rack

UR1, 29

UR2, 29

Module replacement, 368

Module types

ID, 406

Modules

Shipping and storage conditions, 23

Storage, 23

Mounting

Connector, 372

MPI

Meaning, 438

MRES

Meaning, 438

MSTR

Meaning, 438

Multiprocessor operation, 368

New Zeeland

Marking, 15

No parameters

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Noise suppression

Analog input module, 202

Non-configurable diagnostic messages, 88

Non-isolated sensors, 205

Connecting, 206

Meaning, 438

OB 40, 93, 227

Start information, 228

OB 82, 93, 227

Meaning, 438

Operating conditions, 24

Operating state

Controlling, 366

the CPU, 193

Operational limit, 195

Operator controls, 45

Function, 47

IM 463-2, 348

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

464 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Operator controls and display elements

IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 330

IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 337

PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R, 74, 76

PS 405 20A, 78, 80

PS 405 4A, 72

PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R, 60, 63

PS 407 20A, 66, 68

PS 407 4A, 54, 57

Receive IM, 331, 338

Send IM, 331

Operator controls and indicators

IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 334

PS 405 4A, 70

Receive IM, 335, 341

Send IM, 334, 338, 341

The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly, 381

Optimum

Signal propagation delays, 106

Order number

6ES7 400-1JA01-0AA0, 29

6ES7 400-1JA11-0AA0, 29

6ES7 400-1TA01-0AA0, 29

6ES7 400-1TA11-0AA0, 29

6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0, 31

6ES7 400-2JA10-0AA0, 31

6ES7 401-1DA01-0AA0, 35

6ES7 401-2TA01-0AA0, 33

6ES7 403-1JA01-0AA0, 36

6ES7 403-1JA11-0AA0, 36

6ES7 403-1TA01-0AA0, 36

6ES7 405-0KA01-0AA0, 74

6ES7 405-0KA02-0AA0, 76

6ES7 405-0KR00-0AA0, 74

6ES7 405-0KR02-0AA0, 76

6ES7 405-0RA01-0AA0, 78

6ES7 405-0RA02-0AA0, 80

6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0, 54

6ES7 407-0DA02-0AA0, 57

6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0, 60

6ES7 407-0KA02-0AA0, 63

6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0, 60

6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0, 63

6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0, 66

6ES7 407-0RA02-0AA0, 68

6ES7 408-0TA00-0AA0, 380

6ES7 408-1TA01-0XA0, 384

6ES7 421-1BL01-0AA0, 97

6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0, 126

6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0, 119

6ES7 421-1FH20-0AA0, 122

6ES7 421-5EH00-0AA0, 109

6ES7 421-7BH01-0AB0, 100

6ES7 421-7DH00-0AB0, 112

6ES7 422-1BH11-0AA0, 129

6ES7 422-1BL00-0AA0, 137

6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0, 145

6ES7 422-1FH00-0AA0, 149

6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0, 158

6ES7 422-5EH00-0AB0, 153

6ES7 422-5EH10-0AB0, 132

6ES7 422-7BL00-0AB0, 140

6ES7 431-0HH00-0AB0, 264

6ES7 431-1KF00-0AB0, 229

6ES7 431-1KF10-0AB0, 237

6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0, 253

6ES7 431-7KF00-0AB0, 303

6ES7 431-7KF10-0AB0, 292

6ES7 431-7QH00-0AB0, 273

6ES7 432-1HF00-0AB0, 316

6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0, 330

6ES7 460-1BA00-0AB0, 334

6ES7 460-1BA01-0AB0, 334

6ES7 460-3AA01-0AB0, 337

6ES7 460-4AA01-0AB0, 340

6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0, 330

6ES7 461-1BA00-0AA0, 334

6ES7 461-1BA01-0AA0, 334

6ES7 461-3AA01-0AA0, 337

6ES7 461-4AA01-0AA0, 340

6ES7 467-5FJ00-0AB0, 363

6ES7 467-5GJ00-0AB0, 363

6ES7 467-5GJ01-0AB0, 363

6ES7 467-5GJ02-0AB0, 363

6ES7 408-1TB00-0XA0, 381

IM 463-2, 345

Power supply modules, redundant, 41

Order numbers

Spare parts, 429

Meaning, 438

Output

Analog output module, 203

Output of analog values

STEP 7 blocks, 163

Output range

Analog output module, 203

Output ranges

SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 323

Output type

Analog output module, 203

Output values

Dependencies, 145

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 465

Overflow

Analog input module, 226

Overload

On 24 V, 51

On 5 V, 51

Parameter assignment

Analog modules, 199

IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 331

IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 335

IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 338

IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 341

to digital modules, 85

User program, 395

Parameter assignment error

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

LED, 286

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 286

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 314

Parameters

Analog input module, 201, 403

Analog output module, 203

Data record, 395

Digital input module, 87, 397

Digital output module, 88, 400

Dynamic, 85, 199

Editing in the user program, 85, 199

SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 105

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 116

SM 421, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 136

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 157

SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 144

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 299

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 270

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 284

SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 235

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 247, 259

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 310

SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 322

Static, 85, 199

Parameters, modifiable, 395

PARM_MOD

SFC 57, 395

Meaning, 438

PII

Meaning, 438

Pin assignment

RS 485 repeater, 392

Pin assignments

Cable 721, 357

PIO

Meaning, 438

Plant changes in runtime, 86

PLC

Meaning, 438

Plug in

Cable, 350

Position of operator control and display elements

IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 340

Potential difference, 347

with analog input modules,

Power module

PS 405 10A, 74, 76

PS 405 10A R, 74, 76

PS 405 20A, 78, 80

PS 405 4A, 72

PS 407 10A, 60, 63

PS 407 10A R, 60, 63

PS 407 20A, 66, 68

PS 407 4A, 54, 57

Power supply module

Invalid slot, 40

PS 405 4A, 70

Power supply modules

Error messages, 48

Features, 39

Functions, 39

Power supply, redundant

Design, 41

Features, 41

Prepare

Cable, 350

PROFIBUS DP, 365

Cable Lengths, 369

PROFIBUS DP master interface, 363

Properties

Analog output modules, 165

SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 100

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 122

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 112

SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 126

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 129

SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 137, 140

SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 145

SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 229

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 237, 253

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 303

SM 432, AO 8 x 13 bit, 316

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 149

SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A, 158

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

466 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 264

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 292

SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 273

Protection class, 26

Protective measures

Avoiding contact, 435

Discharge of static electricity, 435

Grounding, 435

Meaning, 438

PS 405 4A

Operator controls and indicators, 70

Specifications, 70

Technical specifications, 72

PS 407

Technical specifications 10A, 61, 64

PS 407 10A R

Technical specifications, 61, 64

PS 407 20A

Technical specifications, 67, 69

PS 407 4A

Technical specifications, 55, 58

PS 405 10A

Technical specifications, 74, 76

PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R

Operator controls and display elements, 74, 76

PS 405 10A R

Technical specifications, 74, 76

PS 405 20A

Operator controls and display elements, 78, 80

PS 405 20A technical specifications, 78, 80

PS 405 4A

Operator controls and display elements, 72

PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R

Operator controls and display elements, 60, 63

PS 407 20A

Operator controls and display elements, 66, 68

PS 407 4A

Operator controls and display elements, 54, 57

Pulse-shaped interference, 20

Meaning, 438

Rack

CR2, 33

CR3, 35

Design, 27

ER1, 36

ER2, 36

Functions, 27

UR2, 29

UR2-H, 31

Rack number

Changing, 332

Radio frequency interference

Emission of, 21

RAM

Meaning, 438

RAM error

Analog input module, 225

Rating plate, 13

RC network, 390

Reading

Diagnostic messages, 89, 223

Reading analog values

STEP 7 blocks, 163

Receive IM

Operator controls and display elements, 331, 338

Operator controls and indicators, 335, 341

REDF

Meaning, 438

Reducing

Vibrations, 24

Redundant operation, 41

Redundant power supply modules, 41

Reference channel error

Analog input module, 226

Testing, 291

Reference junction

Analog input module, 202

Reference junction temperature for thermocouples

Compensating, 216

Reference temperature

Analog input module, 202

Relay modules

cULus approval, 16

Relay output module

Features, 84

SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel.5 A, 158

Repeater see RS 485 repeater, 387

Replugging

Measuring range module, 190

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 467

Representation of analog value

for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic, 179

Representation of analog values, 167

Binary representation of input ranges, 170

binary representation of output ranges, 185

for ±1 V to ±10 V voltage measuring range, 172

for ±25 to ±500 V voltage measuring range, 172

For analog input channels, 169

for analog output channels, 185

for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic, 179

for resistance thermometer Cu 10 standard, 179

for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Standard, 178

for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Climatic, 177,

178

for resistance thermometers Pt 100, 200, 500,

1000, 177

for resistance-type sensors from 48 Ω to 6

kΩ, 176

for thermocouple type E, 180

for thermocouple type L, 182

for thermocouple type N, 182

for thermocouple type T, 183

for thermocouple type U, 184

for thermocouple types R, S, 183

for thermocouples type B, 180

for thermocouples type J, 181

for thermocouples type K, 181

for voltage measuring ranges, 172

for voltage output ranges, 187

for voltage output ranges ± 10 V, 187

in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA, 174

in current measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA, 175

in the 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA current output

ranges, 188

in the 0 V to 10 V and 1 V to 5 V voltage measuring

ranges, 187

in the 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V voltage measuring

ranges, 173

in the current output range ±20 mA, 188

in the current output ranges, 188

Representation of analog values in the ±3.2 mA to

±20 mA current measuring ranges, 174

Resistance measurement

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 251, 263

Resistance thermometers and resistors

Connecting, 212

Resolution, 168

Response time, 198, 199

Reusing

FOC, 373

Meaning, 438

RS 485 repeater, 387

Application, 388

Connection scheme, 390

Design, 389

grounded, 390

grounded operation, 390

Installation rules, 388

Pin assignment, 392

Specifications, 392

Ungrounded, 390

ungrounded operation, 390

Rules

Connection, 327

Run time calibration error

Analog input module, 226

S-

Meaning, 438

S +

Meaning, 438

S5 expansion unit

Setting, 353

S5 interface modules, 346

S5 modules

Addressing, 347

Configuration, 355

S7 functions, 365

S7-400

Accessories, 429

Spare parts, 429

Safety requirements

Installation, 19

SCL

Meaning, 438

Scope

of the manual, 3

Segment

Cable length, 388

Selecting

Cable length, 351

Interface, 350

Send IM

Operator controls and display elements, 331

Operator controls and indicators, 334, 338, 341

Sensor

Supply voltage, 208

Sensor supply missing

Digital input module, 87

Digital module, 92

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

468 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

Sensors

electrically isolated, 204

Non-isolated, 205

Setting

Address area, 354

Measuring range module, 189

S5 expansion unit, 353

Settling time, 198

SFB

Meaning, 438

SFC

Meaning, 438

SFC 51, 93, 227

SFC 55 WR_PARM, 395

SFC 56 WR_DPARM, 395

SFC 57 PARM_MOD, 395

SFC 59, 93, 227

Shielding clamps, 385

Shipping, 23

Short-circuit

Vs Sensor supply, 107

Short-circuit to L+

Digital module, 91

Digital output module, 88

Short-circuit to M

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Digital output module, 88

Sign

Analog value, 168

Meaning, 439

Signal modules

Diagnostic data, 405

Signal propagation delays

Optimum, 106, 117

Signaling concept, 384

Sinusoidal interference, 21

Meaning, 438

SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC

Properties, 100

Technical specifications, 102

SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V

Features, 109

Specifications, 110

Wiring, 110

SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V

Diagnostic data, 407

Parameters, 105

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Features, 119

Properties, 122

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Diagnostic data, 409

Properties, 112

SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC

Connection and circuit diagram, 98

Technical specifications, 98

SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V

Properties, 126

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Parameters, 116

SM 421, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Parameters, 136

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Diagnostic data, 417

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Diagnostic data, 412

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

Properties, 129

SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Connection and circuit diagram, 138, 141

Diagnostic data, 414

Properties, 137, 140

Technical specifications, 138, 141

SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

Properties, 145

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Features, 153

Parameters, 157

Specifications, 154

Wiring diagram, 154

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Features, 132

Specifications, 133

Wiring diagram, 133

SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Parameters, 144

SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit

Block diagram, 229

Connection diagram, 231

Properties, 229

Technical specifications, 232

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit

Block diagram, 238, 254

Connection diagram, 239, 255

Properties, 237, 253

Technical specifications, 240, 256

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit

Properties, 303

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Diagnostic data, 422

Displaying parameter assignment errors, 301

Measuring methods, 302

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 469

Measuring ranges, 302

Parameters, 299

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit

Measuring methods, 271

Measuring range modules, 270

Measuring ranges, 272

Parameters, 270

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit

Diagnostic data, 420

Measuring methods, 288

Measuring range modules, 284

Measuring ranges, 290

Parameter assignment error, 286

Parameters, 284

Wire break monitoring, 291

SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit

Measuring methods, 236

Measuring ranges, 236

Parameters, 235

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit

Measuring methods, 249, 262

Measuring range modules, 247, 259

Measuring ranges, 252, 263

Parameters, 247, 259

Resistance measurement, 251, 263

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit

Diagnostic data, 425

Measuring methods, 315

Measuring ranges, 315

Parameter assignment error, 314

Parameters, 310

SM 432, AO 8 x 13 bit

Configuration of analog output circuits,

Output ranges,

Parameters,

Properties, 316

SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC

Connection and circuit diagram, 101

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Specifications, 120

Wiring and block diagrams, 120

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Connection and circuit diagram, 123

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Connection and circuit diagram, 113

Technical specifications, 113

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Technical specifications, 123

SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120

Connection and circuit diagram, 127

SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V

Technical specifications, 127

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Properties, 149

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

Connection and circuit diagram, 130

Technical specifications, 130

SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

Technical specifications, 159

SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

Properties, 158

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Connection and circuit diagram, 150

Technical specifications, 150

SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

Connection and circuit diagram, 146

Technical specifications, 146

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit

Block diagram, 317

Connection diagram, 318

Technical specifications, 319

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit

Block diagram, 265

Connection diagram, 266

Properties, 264

Technical specifications, 267

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit

Block diagram, 304

Connection diagram, 305

Technical specifications, 306

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Block diagram, 293

Connection diagram, 295

Properties, 292

Technical specifications, 296

SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Block diagram, 274

Connection diagram, 275

Properties, 273

Technical specifications, 276

Smoothing of analog input values, 196

Analog input module, 202

Spare parts

Order numbers, 429

S7-400, 429

Specifications

24 VDC fan subassembly, 385

Backup battery, 44

Channel cable, 380

CR2, 33

CR3, 35

ER1 and ER2, 37

IM 460-1 and 461-1, 336

IM 460-4 and 461-4, 342

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

470 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08

IM 463-2, 361

IM 467, 374, 376

PS 405 4A, 70

RS 485 repeater, 392

SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 110

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 154

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 133

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 120

The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly, 382

UR1, 30

UR2, 30

UR2-H, 32

SSL

Meaning, 438

Standards, 13

Start information

OB 40, 228

Static parameters, 85

STEP 7 blocks

for analog functions, 163

Step response

Interference frequency suppression 10 Hz, 312

Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz, 313

Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz, 312

Interference frequency suppression 60 Hz, 313

STL

Meaning, 437

STOP mode

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 91

Storage, 23

Backup battery, 23

Modules, 23

Substitute a value

Digital input module, 87

Digital output module, 88

Substitute a value "1"

Digital input module, 87

Digital output module, 88

Supply voltage

Failure, 107

Sensor, 208

support

Additional, 4

Meaning, 437

Meaning, 438

Technical specifications

IM 460-0 and 461-0, 332

IM 460-3 and 461-3, 339

PS 405 10A, 74, 76

PS 405 10A R, 74, 76

PS 405 20A, 78, 80

PS 405 4A, 72

PS 407 10A, 61, 64

PS 407 10A R, 61, 64

PS 407 20A, 67, 69

PS 407 4A, 55, 58

SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 102

SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 98

SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 138, 141

SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 232

SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 240, 256

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 113

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 123

SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 127

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 130

SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A, 159

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 150

SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 146

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 319

SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 267

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 306

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 296

SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 276

Technical support, 5

Temperature coefficient

Analog input module, 202

temperature unit

Analog input module, 202

Terminator, 327

IM 463-2, 359

Test voltages, 26

Testing

Mechanical ambient conditions, 25

Reference channel error, 291

Underflow, 292

The 120/230 V DC fan subassembly

Installation, 382

The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly

Fuse, 381

Operator controls and indicators, 381

Specifications, 382

Thermal voltage, 215

Thermocouple

Connecting to an analog input module, 215

Design, 215

Operating principle, 215

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 471

Thermocouples to resistance thermometers

Connecting, 218

Training center, 5

Meaning, 438

UCM

Meaning, 438

Meaning, 439

Uiso

Meaning, 439

Underflow

Analog input module, 226

Testing, 292

Ungrounded operation

RS 485 repeater, 390

UR1

Design, 29

Specifications, 30

UR2

Specifications, 30

UR2-H

Design, 31

Specifications, 32

User program

Parameter assignment, 395

USR

Meaning, 439

Vibrations, 24

Reducing, 24

Voltage sensors

Connecting, 207

Meaning, 439

Vs Sensor supply

Short-circuit, 107

Wire break

Analog input module, 225

Digital module, 92

Wire break monitoring

Analog input module, 201

Digital input module, 87

Digital output module, 88

Ensuring, 106, 116

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 291

Wiring

24 VDC fan subassembly, 384

SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 110

Wiring and block diagrams

SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 120

Wiring diagram

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 154

SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 133

WR_DPARM

SFC 56, 395

WR_PARM

SFC 55, 395

Index

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

472 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08